User and reference manual - Route 66 Communications

Crocus SHDSLCrocus SHDSLUser and reference manualVersion: 2.6 - 208060Telindus Technical Publications – Geldenaaksebaan 335 - B-3001 Leuven - Belgium – Tel. +32 16 382011

ii Crocus SHDSLUser manualCopyright, safety and statementsDocument propertiesSubjectManual typeCrocus SHDSLUser and reference manualVersion 2.6Code 208060Modification date21 August 2006 ©TelindusCopyright noticeThe information and descriptions contained in this publication are the property of Telindus. Such informationand descriptions must not be copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated or distributedwithout the express prior written permission of Telindus.This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors, for which Telindus nevercan or shall be held liable. Changes are made periodically to the information herein; these changes willbe incorporated in new editions of this publication. Telindus may make improvements and/or changes inthe product(s) described in this publication at any time, without prior notice.Safety requirementsCarefully read the safety instructions, installation precautions and connection precautions as stated inchapter 2 - Installing and connecting the Crocus SHDSL on page 13.

Crocus SHDSLUser manualCopyright, safety and statementsiiiStatementswww.telindusproducts.com → Telindus Access Solutions → Products → Choose a product → Downloads→ CertificatesHereby, Telindus declares that this Crocus SHDSL complies with the essential requirements and otherrelevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.Hierbij verklaart Telindus dat deze Crocus SHDSL overeenstemt met de essentiële vereisten en andererelevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC.Par la présente, Telindus déclare que ce Crocus SHDSL est en conformité avec les exigences essentielleset autres articles applicables de la Directive 1999/5/EC.Hiermit, Telindus erklärt daß dieser Crocus SHDSL in Fügsamkeit ist mit den wesentlichen Anforderungenund anderen relevanten Bereitstellungen von Direktive 1999/5/EC.Mediante la presente, Telindus declara que el Crocus SHDSL cumple con los requisitos esenciales y lasdemás prescripciones relevantes de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.A Telindus declara que o Crocus SHDSL cumpre os principais requisitos e outras disposições da Directiva1999/5/EC.Col presente, Telindus dichiara che questo Crocus SHDSL è in acquiescenza coi requisiti essenziali estipulazioni attinenti ed altre di Direttivo 1999/5/EC.Με το παρόν η Telindus δηλώνει ότι το Crocus SHDSL είναι συµµορφούµενο µε τις βασικές απαιτήσειςκαι µε τις υπόλοιπες σχετικές διατάξες της οδηγίας 1999/5/EC.

iv Crocus SHDSLUser manualCopyright, safety and statementsEnvironmental informationThe crossed-out wheeled bin means that within the European Union the product must be taken to separatecollection at the product end of life. This applies to the device but also to any accessories marked with thissymbol. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste.If you need more information on the collection, reuse and recycling systems, please contact your local wasteadministration. You can also contact us for more information on the environmental specifications of our products.De doorgestreepte container wil zeggen dat binnen de Europese gemeenschap het product voor gescheiden afvalverzamelingmoet worden aangeboden aan het einde van de levensduur van het product. Dit geldt voor het toestel, maar ook voor alletoebehoren dia van dit symbool voorzien zijn. Bied deze producten niet aan bij het gewone huisvuil.Indien u meer informatie wenst over de systemen voor inzameling, hergebruik en recyclage, gelieve dan uw lokale afvaldienstente contacteren. U kan ook ons contacteren wanneer u informatie wenst over de milieu aspecten van onze producten.Le symbole de la poubelle sur roues barrée d’une croix signifie que ce produit doit faire l’objet d’une collecte sélective en fin devie au sein de l’Union Européenne. Cette mesure s’applique non seulement à vorte appareil mais également à tout autreaccessoire marqué de ce symbole. Ne jetez pas ces produits dans les ordures ménagères non sujettes au tri sélectif.Si vous souhaitez plus d'information concernant les systèmes de collecte, de réutilisation et de recyclage, veuillez contactez votreservice de gestion de déchets local. Vous pouvez également nous contacter pour obtenir plus d’information au sujet desspécifications environnementales de nos produits.Das Symbol der durchgestrichenen Abfalltonne auf Rädern bedeutet dass das Produkt in der Europäischen Union einergetrennten Mülsammlung zugeführt werden muss. Dies gilt sowohl für das Produkt selbst, als auch für alle mit diesem Symbolgekennzeichneten Zubehörteile. Diese Produkte dürfen nicht über den unsortierten Hausmüll entsorgt werden.Wenn Sie mehr Informationen brauchen über die Sammlung und Recycling Systemen, bitte konsultieren Sie Ihre örtliche AbfälleVerwaltung. Für mehr Informationen über die Umweltaspekten unserer Produkte, wenden Sie sich an unserer Kundendienst.

Crocus SHDSLUser manualPrefacevDocumentation setThe documentation set of the Crocus SHDSL currently consists of the following:DocumentCrocus SHDSL manual (thismanual)CN4 card nest manual (PDF)maintenance and managementapplication manualscable documentsDescriptionThis is the manual you are reading now.It shows you how to install and connect the Crocus SHDSL and givesyou a basic configuration. It also contains a complete description ofall the configuration, status, performance and alarm parameters forlook-up purposes.The Crocus SHDSL Card Version fits in the CN4 card nest. The CN4card nest manual describes this card nest thoroughly.The Crocus SHDSL can be maintained and managed by a variety ofmaintenance and management tools. Refer to 1.6 - Maintenance andmanagement tools on page 10 for an introduction on these tools andfor a reference to the manual of these tools.A wide variety of cables exist to connect the Crocus SHDSL. TheData cables document (PDF) and the Management cables document(PDF) describe these cables.Organisation of this manualThis manual contains the following main parts:PartUser manualReference manualAnnexThis part …shows you how to install and connect the Crocus SHDSL. It also gives a basicconfiguration of the Crocus SHDSL.gives more detailed information on the Crocus SHDSL, such as software downloadprocedures, technical specifications, etc. It also contains a completedescription of all the configuration, status, performance and alarm parametersfor look-up purposes.gives additional information, such as product sales codes.Refer to the Table of contents on page x for a detailed overview of this manual.

vi Crocus SHDSLUser manualPrefaceTypographical conventionsThe following typographical conventions are used in this manual:The format …Normalindicates …normal text.Italic • new or emphasised words• application windows, buttons and fields. E.g. In the File name field enter …Computertext you have to enter at the DOS or CLI prompt, computer output and codeexamples.E.g. NOK,1,1,Invalid command.Computer Boldtext you have to enter at the DOS or CLI prompt when it is part of a mix of computerinput and output.E.g./o1003:"Edit Configuration">get sysNamesysName = "Orchid 1003 LAN"/o1003:"Edit Configuration">NarrowBluecontainment tree objects and attributes of a device when they are mentioned inthe normal text. I.e. when they are not a part of computer input or output.E.g. Use the sysName attribute in order to …containment tree objects or attributes or part of them that are variable. I.e.depending on the product version, used interface, etc. the names of theseobjects or attributes are slightly different.E.g. topObject//someAttribute means that the name of the object depends on which modular interface you use. For example, v35 incase of a V.35 interface, g703 in case of a G.703 interface, etc.references to other parts in the manual.E.g. “Refer to xx - Title for more information”.Blue underline • a hyperlink to a web site. E.g. www.telindus.com• a reference to another manual. E.g. “Refer to the TMA manual (PDF) formore information”. The abbreviation between brackets is an indication of thefile format (PDF = Portable Document Format / CHM = Compiled HTMLHelp).

Crocus SHDSLUser manualPrefaceviiGraphical conventionsThe following icons are used in this manual:Icon Name This icon indicates …Remarkremarks or useful tips.Cautiontext to be read carefully in order to avoid damage to the device.Warningtext to be read carefully in order to avoid injury.DIP switcha DIP switch or strap table.Basic attributea basic attribute in the containment tree of the Crocus SHDSL.Advanced attributean advanced attribute in the containment tree of the Crocus SHDSL.Structured attributeActiona structured attribute within another attribute in the containment treeof the Crocus SHDSL.an action in the containment tree of the Crocus SHDSL.

viii Crocus SHDSLUser manualPrefaceReading a DIP switch tableAt several places in this manual DIP switch tables are shown. To enable you to read such a table in acorrect manner it is explained below.A DIP switch table has the following layout:The following table explains the DIP switch configuration table layout:NumberThis position displays …1 the DIP switch icon.2 the DIP switch nameExample:Load default configuration3 the DIP switch position on the DIP switch bank.The abbreviations mean the following:DS1 no. 1: DIP switch bank number 1, switch position number 1Example:3 (TT & CV-A)4 (CV-B)The abbreviations mean the following:• DS1 no. 3 (TT & CV-A): DIP switch bank number 1, switch position number 3, forTable Top and Card Version modem A• DS1 no. 4 (CV-B): DIP switch bank number 1, switch position number 4, for Card Versionmodem B.4 the possible settings of the DIP switch: on and off. The default setting is printed in bold.5 the function associated with the corresponding DIP switch setting.

Crocus SHDSLUser manualPrefaceixReading an attribute stringAt several places in this manual attribute strings are shown. To enable you to read such a string in acorrect manner it is explained below.An attribute string has the following layout:The following table explains the attribute string layout:NumberThis position displays …1 the attribute icon. It indicates that the string which follows is an attribute string. Refer toGraphical conventions on page vii for more information.2 the attribute name and its position in the containment tree.3 the default value of a configuration attribute.Hardware versionThis manual describes the hardware of the Crocus SHDSL PCB version 2.0 and higher.Application software versionThis manual describes the features, containment tree and attributes of the Crocus SHDSL applicationsoftware version T2136/01500, T2145/00800 and T2141/01500.For more information on these different application software types, refer to 1.4 - Application softwareoverview on page 8.AudienceThis manual is intended for computer-literate people, who have a working knowledge of computing andnetworking principles.Your feedbackYour satisfaction about this purchase is an extremely important priority to all of us at Telindus. Accordingly,all electronic, functional and cosmetic aspects of this new unit have been carefully and thoroughlytested and inspected. If any fault is found with this unit or should you have any other quality-related commentconcerning this delivery, please submit the Quality Comment Form on our web page atwww.telindusproducts.com/quality.Rating plateFor exact identification, you will find the model designation and serial number on the rating plate on thebottom of the housing. Please note this information here before installation in order to have it to hand inthe event of queries or spare parts orders.

x Crocus SHDSLUser and reference manualTable of contentsTable of contentsUser manual............................................................................................ 11 Introducing the Crocus SHDSL ..........................................................................31.1 Crocus SHDSL features ............................................................................................. 41.2 Crocus SHDSL product overview............................................................................... 51.3 DTE interface overview .............................................................................................. 71.4 Application software overview .................................................................................... 81.5 Power back-off ........................................................................................................... 91.6 Maintenance and management tools ....................................................................... 101.7 Maintenance and management tools connection possibilities ................................. 122 Installing and connecting the Crocus SHDSL.................................................132.1 Safety instructions .................................................................................................... 142.2 Unpacking ................................................................................................................ 152.3 Selecting a site ......................................................................................................... 162.4 Wall mounting........................................................................................................... 172.5 Installation and connection precautions ................................................................... 192.6 Connecting the Crocus SHDSL Table Top............................................................... 202.7 Connecting the Crocus SHDSL Card Version.......................................................... 262.8 Remote power operation .......................................................................................... 322.9 Using a repeater....................................................................................................... 382.10 Front panel LED indicators....................................................................................... 393 DIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL ..............................................453.1 DIP switches and straps........................................................................................... 463.2 DIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL Card Version ................................. 514 Maintaining the Crocus SHDSL........................................................................574.1 Starting TMA on the Crocus SHDSL ........................................................................ 584.2 Starting keyboard management on the Crocus SHDSL........................................... 644.3 Introducing the management attributes of the Crocus SHDSL ................................ 655 The front panel display .....................................................................................715.1 The "windows" of the front panel display.................................................................. 725.2 The main window ..................................................................................................... 735.3 The line window........................................................................................................ 755.4 The DTE window ...................................................................................................... 765.5 The test window ....................................................................................................... 775.6 The model browsing window .................................................................................... 785.7 The connect remote window .................................................................................... 785.8 The version window.................................................................................................. 78

Crocus SHDSLUser and reference manualTable of contentsxi6 Step-by-step configuration ...............................................................................796.1 Configuring the basic line parameters...................................................................... 806.2 Configuring EOC handling........................................................................................ 836.3 Configuring the timing mode .................................................................................... 906.4 Clocking of Crocus devices to access PDH and SDH networks .............................. 916.5 Configuring the clocking mode ............................................................................... 1086.6 Configuring the user speed .................................................................................... 1326.7 Configuring the minimum line speed ...................................................................... 1376.8 Configuring framing and time slots......................................................................... 1436.9 Configuring the user speed and time slots on the Dual Port G703-Serial interface1476.10 Low speed limitations on the G703 Nx64k interfaces ............................................ 1506.11 Configuring the interface specific attributes ........................................................... 1526.12 Configuring the management attributes ................................................................. 1586.13 Configuring remote power operation ...................................................................... 1716.14 Configuring passwords........................................................................................... 1726.15 Executing configuration actions.............................................................................. 1746.16 Troubleshooting the Crocus SHDSL ...................................................................... 1786.17 Crocus SHDSL compatibility with other SHDSL devices ....................................... 179Reference manual .............................................................................. 1817 Configuration attributes..................................................................................1837.1 Configuration attribute overview............................................................................. 1847.2 General configuration attributes ............................................................................. 1897.3 Line configuration attributes ................................................................................... 1947.4 Line pair configuration attributes ............................................................................ 2087.5 Remote power configuration attributes................................................................... 2107.6 DTE Interface configuration attributes.................................................................... 2127.7 Management configuration attributes ..................................................................... 2348 Status attributes ..............................................................................................2398.1 Status attribute overview ........................................................................................ 2408.2 General status attributes ........................................................................................ 2458.3 Line status attributes .............................................................................................. 2498.4 Line pair status attributes ....................................................................................... 2588.5 Remote power status attributes.............................................................................. 2618.6 Repeater and end status attributes ........................................................................ 2638.7 DTE Interface status attributes............................................................................... 2688.8 Management status attributes ................................................................................ 2868.9 Operating system status attributes......................................................................... 288

xii Crocus SHDSLUser and reference manualTable of contents9 Performance attributes ...................................................................................2919.1 Performance attribute overview.............................................................................. 2929.2 Introducing the performance attributes................................................................... 2959.3 Line performance attributes.................................................................................... 2989.4 Line pair performance attributes............................................................................. 3019.5 Repeater and end performance attributes.............................................................. 3049.6 G703 interface performance attributes................................................................... 3059.7 Dual Port G703-Serial interface performance attributes ........................................ 3099.8 Operating system performance attributes .............................................................. 31010 Alarm attributes ...............................................................................................31310.1 Alarm attribute overview......................................................................................... 31410.2 Introducing the alarm attributes.............................................................................. 31710.3 General alarms....................................................................................................... 32510.4 Line alarms............................................................................................................. 32810.5 Line pair alarms...................................................................................................... 33010.6 Remote power alarms ............................................................................................ 33310.7 Repeater and end alarms....................................................................................... 33510.8 Interface alarms...................................................................................................... 33911 TMA subsystem picture of the Crocus SHDSL.............................................34311.1 Displaying the subsystem picture........................................................................... 34411.2 Subsystem picture elements .................................................................................. 34512 Software download..........................................................................................34712.1 What is boot, loader and application software?...................................................... 34812.2 Important download issues..................................................................................... 35212.3 Downloading with TMA........................................................................................... 35312.4 Downloading with TML ........................................................................................... 35412.5 Downloading in loader mode.................................................................................. 35512.6 Downloading in boot mode..................................................................................... 35612.7 Downloading via a management concentrator ....................................................... 35713 Diagnostic tests ...............................................................................................35913.1 Introducing the diagnostic tests.............................................................................. 36013.2 Line tests ................................................................................................................ 36113.3 Interface tests......................................................................................................... 36913.4 Repeater tests ........................................................................................................ 370

Crocus SHDSLUser and reference manualTable of contentsxiii14 Technical specifications .................................................................................37314.1 Crocus SHDSL types ............................................................................................. 37414.2 Line specifications .................................................................................................. 37514.3 RJ45 - RJ12 adapter specifications........................................................................ 37714.4 Maximum covered distance on a noise free line .................................................... 37814.5 G703 interface specifications ................................................................................. 37914.6 RS530 interface specifications ............................................................................... 38014.7 Management interface connectors ......................................................................... 38214.8 Control connector ................................................................................................... 38314.9 Diagnostic tests ...................................................................................................... 38414.10Power requirements ............................................................................................... 38514.11Thermal behaviour when providing remote power ................................................. 38614.12Environmental compliance ..................................................................................... 38714.13Safety compliance .................................................................................................. 38814.14Over-voltage and over-current protection compliance ........................................... 38814.15EMC compliance .................................................................................................... 38814.16Mechanical dimensions .......................................................................................... 388Annex .................................................................................................. 389Annex A:product information ...............................................................................391Annex B:abbreviations ..........................................................................................397Index........................................................................................................ 1

xiv Crocus SHDSLUser and reference manualTable of contents

Crocus SHDSL 1User manualUser manual

2 Crocus SHDSLUser manual

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 1 3User manualIntroducing the Crocus SHDSL1 Introducing the Crocus SHDSLThis chapter introduces the Crocus SHDSL. The following gives an overview of this chapter:• 1.1 - Crocus SHDSL features on page 4• 1.2 - Crocus SHDSL product overview on page 5• 1.3 - DTE interface overview on page 7• 1.4 - Application software overview on page 8• 1.5 - Power back-off on page 9• 1.6 - Maintenance and management tools on page 10• 1.7 - Maintenance and management tools connection possibilities on page 12

4 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 1User manualIntroducing the Crocus SHDSL1.1 Crocus SHDSL featuresThe Crocus SHDSL (Symmetric High Bit Rate Digital Subscriber Line) is a new generation manageablebaseband modem offering full duplex transmission up to 2,3 Mbps over a single two-wire unconditionedunshielded twisted-pair cable.A special 2-pair version offers the possibility to extend the speed range to 4,6 Mbps. The line speed ofthe modem can be automatically adapted to optimise the throughput as a function of the characteristicsof the local loop. The equipment is based on a modulation technology called TC-PAM (Trellis CodedPulse Amplitude Modulation), which guarantees higher speeds and longer loop performance.The TC-PAM modulation also guarantees spectral compatibility with legacy and ADSL transmission systemsin the same cable bundle, offering an attractive solution for high-speed backbone access, for LANto LAN connections, as well as for imaging and other bandwidth-demanding applications.A complete range of plug-in interface boards makes the Crocus SHDSL ideal for interfacing with almostevery application. Not only traditional serial interfaces like V.35, V.36, RS-530 and X.21 (configurable forNx64 kbps operation), but also G703 (transparent or with G.704 framing) and direct Ethernet 10/100Base-T connections with integrated router functionality are available. All these interface boards canbe exchanged in only a few seconds, so flexibility is maximised. For large concentration sites, rackmountversions are mounted in a standard 19" card-nest and can offer densities of up to 30 modems pernest.Both 230/115 Vac and direct 48 Vdc powering can be used. With a free user-friendly graphical Windowsapplication, the operator can configure the local or remotely installed equipment. It is a valuable tool forthe field engineer as it supports performance monitoring, retrieval of statistics and troubleshooting.Alternatively one can obtain a comparable functionality through the use of a VT100 terminal. The CrocusSHDSL also offers an automatic installation mode, which allows standard configurations to be set up inonly a few seconds. For larger networks, the Crocus SHDSL can be managed with a management applicationrunning on the SNMP based HP OpenView management platform. On this platform one can combinethe management of the Crocus SHDSL with the management of all Telindus and many third partyequipment. The integrated management allows one to configure the modem remotely, to query theactual status of the modems, to permanently monitor the performance (real-time and statistical information),to conduct fault analysis, and to report alarms to the operator.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 1 5User manualIntroducing the Crocus SHDSL1.2 Crocus SHDSL product overviewThe following Crocus SHDSL product versions exist:Crocus SHDSL product• Crocus SHDSL 1P TT Vac• Crocus SHDSL 1P TT -48Vdc• Crocus SHDSL 1P CV Twin• Crocus SHDSL 2P TT Vac• Crocus SHDSL 2P TT -48Vdc• Crocus SHDSL 2P CV Twin• Crocus SHDSL G703 1P TT 9Vdc• Crocus SHDSL G703 1P TT RP DP• Crocus SHDSL G703 2P TT RP DP• Crocus SHDSL INF G703 1P TT Vac• Crocus SHDSL INF G703 1P TT NPWR• Crocus SHDSL INF G703 1P TT RP• Crocus SHDSL INF G703 2P TT Vac• Crocus SHDSL INF G703 2P TT NPWR• Crocus SHDSL INF G703 2P TT RP•• Crocus SHDSL RS530 1P TT 9Vdc• Crocus SHDSL RS530 1P TT RP DP• Crocus SHDSL RS530 2P TT RP DPManualThese versions are described in the CrocusSHDSL manual.These versions are described in the manual CrocusSHDSL G703.These versions are described in the manual CrocusSHDSL INF TT G703.These versions are described in the manual CrocusSHDSL RS530.• Telindus 2300 SHDSL Series These versions are described in the manual Telindus2300 SHDSL Series.• Crocus SHDSL 2P G703 CV TWIN-CN7 RPunframed• Crocus SHDSL 2P G703 NX64K TWIN-CN7RP• Crocus SHDSL 2P G703 NX64K TWIN-CN7• Crocus SHDSL G703 NX64K TWIN-CN7 RP• Crocus SHDSL G703 NX64K TWIN-CN7These versions are described in the CrocusSHDSL CN7 manual.The following table gives a description of the used abbreviations:Abbreviation In full Explanation1P 1 pair This version has 1 line pair.2P 2 pair This version has 2 line pairs.4P 4 pair This version has 4 line pairs.

6 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 1User manualIntroducing the Crocus SHDSLAbbreviation In full ExplanationTT Table Top This version is a stand-alone version of the CrocusSHDSL. It is available with or without an LCD displayand keyboard.CV Card Version This version is a card that has to be inserted into theCN4 card nest. The connections (power and line) aremade through the CN4 card nest.CV Twin Card Version Twin This version is a card that has to be inserted into theCN4 card nest. It incorporates two Crocus SHDSLmodems on one card (hence the name Twin). As aresult, one CN4 card nest can contain up to 30modems. The connections (power and line) aremade through the CN4 card nest.Vac Volts - Alternate Current This version has to be powered with 115 or 230 Vac.-48Vdc -48 Volts - Direct Current This version has to be powered with -48 Vdc.9Vdc 9 Volts - Direct Current This version has to be powered with 9 Vdc (using aVac/9Vdc power adapter).RP Remote Power This version can be powered with remote power (i.e.power coming from the central side, over the line).DP Dual Power This version can be powered either with 9 Vdc (usinga Vac/9Vdc power adapter) or with -48 Vdc.G703 G703 interface This version has a fixed G.703 DTE interface insteadof an empty interface slot in which you can insert amodular interface.RS530 RS530 interface This version has a fixed RS530 DTE interface.CN7 Card Nest 7 This version is a card that has to be inserted into theCN7 card nest. The connections (power and line) aremade through the CN7 card nest.

8 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 1User manualIntroducing the Crocus SHDSL1.4 Application software overviewThere are three different application software codes for the Crocus SHDSL, each with their own T-codeand possibly different revisions. These software codes are not straightforward interchangeable.The following table shows you the relationship between boot, loader and application software and thehardware (PCB) and related features:SoftwarePCB 0.x & long servicedown time 1PCB 0.x & short servicedown time 2PCB 1.x 3boot T2135xxx T2135xxx T2140xxxloader T2137003 T2137004 T2142xxxapplication T2136xxx T2145xxx T2141xxx1. With this boot, loader, application software and hardware combination the data traffic is interruptedwhen downloading new application software into the Crocus SHDSL.2. With this boot, loader, application software and hardware combination the data traffic is onlyinterrupted for a short time (less than 3 minutes) when downloading new application softwareinto the Crocus SHDSL. As you can see in the table, switching from PCB 0.x with long servicedown time to PCB 0.x with short service down time requires that the loader code is replacedfirst (local download), followed by the application code.3. All revisions of this boot, loader, application software and hardware combination support noninterrupteddata traffic when downloading new application software.For more information on downloading software, refer to 12 - Software download on page 347.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 1 9User manualIntroducing the Crocus SHDSL1.5 Power back-offThe Crocus SHDSL features power back-off. Power back-off is a part of the ITU-T G.991.2 SHDSL recommendation.It reduces the maximum transmit power level if the line conditions are sufficiently good tooperate at a lower transmit level.Power back-off is performed by default (no configuration attribute). During the ITU-T G.994.1 handshake,the two sides of the line mutually agree on the transmit level. The transmit level is loweredbetween 0 and 6 dB in steps of 1dB.Important remarkWhen 2 devices are connected point to point using the lowest speeds, an attenuation is always neededto get into data state, despite the power back-off mechanism. Connecting the devices with a cable of 1meter for instance will not work.For the lowest speeds, a minimum distance of 2 kilometers (simulated or not) is required between thedevices.

10 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 1User manualIntroducing the Crocus SHDSL1.6 Maintenance and management toolsThe Crocus SHDSL is manageable in many different ways. This section gives a quick overview of thevarious maintenance and management tools.Maintenance ormanagementtoolKeyboard managementTMATMA CLIATWINCLITMA ElementManagementTMA for HPOpenViewDescription and referenceThe Crocus SHDSL Table Top is also available in a version with an LCD displayand a keyboard. Using this display and keyboard you can manage the CrocusSHDSL TT in a basic way. This is called keyboard management.TMA (Telindus Maintenance Application) is a free Windows software package witha comprehensive graphical user interface that enables you to control the Telindusproducts completely. I.e. to access their configuration attributes and look at status,performance and alarm information.Refer to 4 - Maintaining the Crocus SHDSL on page 57 and the TMA manual(PDF) for more information.TMA CLI (TMA Command Line Interface) enables you to use its commands inscripts in order to automate management actions. This is particularly useful inlarge networks.Refer to the TMA CLI manual (PDF) for more information.ATWIN is a menu-driven user interface. You can read and change all attributes aswith TMA, but in a more basic, textual representation using a VT100 terminal.Refer to the Maintenance tools manual (PDF) for more information.CLI is also a Command Line Interface, although not so extensive as TMA CLI.Experienced users who are familiar with the syntax can access the Telindusdevices more quickly than with TMA or ATWIN.Refer to the Maintenance tools manual (PDF) for more information.TMA Element Management is a management application designed to monitorlarge numbers of Telindus devices. It combines the easy to use graphical interfaceof the stand-alone version of TMA with an event-logging application called the ElementViewer.Refer to the TMA Element Management manual (PDF/CHM) for more information.TMA for HP OpenView is the management application that runs on the widelyspread network management platform HP OpenView. It combines the easy to usegraphical interface of the stand-alone version of TMA with the advantages and featuresof HP OpenView.Refer to the TMA for HP OpenView manual (PDF) for more information.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 1 11User manualIntroducing the Crocus SHDSLMaintenance ormanagementtoolSNMPWeb InterfaceEasy ConfiguratorDescription and referenceYou can manage the Crocus SHDSL through SNMP using any SNMP browser.The Crocus SHDSL supports MIB2 and a private MIB, including traps.The private MIB comes with your copy of TMA. After installation of the TMA datafiles, the private MIB file is available in directory C:\Program Files\TMA\snmp 1 withthe name .mib 2 .Refer to the documentation of your SNMP browser for more information.The Web Interface is an ATWIN alike menu-driven user interface. You can readand change all attributes as with TMA, but in a more basic representation using aweb browser.Refer to the Maintenance tools manual (PDF) for more information.The Easy Configurator allows you to add HTML pages on top of the standard WebInterface by adding a set of specific files on the file system of the Crocus SHDSL.These files can be made either by Telindus or by the customer itself.The goal is to offer a simple, custom made web interface which allows only tochange or show those parameters that are relevant for a certain application or customer.Refer to the Maintenance tools manual (PDF) for more information.1. The first part of the directory path may be different if you did not choose the default path duringthe installation of the TMA data files.2. The filename is product dependent. To determine which MIB file corresponds with which product,refer to the models.nms file (located in C:\Program Files\TMA\model 1 ).

12 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 1User manualIntroducing the Crocus SHDSL1.7 Maintenance and management tools connection possibilitiesThe following table gives an overview of all the maintenance and management tools and how you canconnect them with the Crocus SHDSL:Maintenance or managementtoolTool - Crocus SHDSL connectionTool - management concentratorconnection 1Serial 2IP 3Serial 2 IP 3Keyboard 4CLI X 5X 5 X 6ATWIN X 5 X 5 X 6TMA X X XTMA CLI X X XTMA Element ManagementTMA for HP OpenViewSNMP 7Web Interface 8XXXXEasy Configurator X 91. Examples of management concentrators are the Orchid 1003 LAN, the Telindus 1030 Routerseries, the Telindus 2300 SHDSL series, etc. Refer to their corresponding manuals for moreinformation on how to set these devices up as management proxy.2. A serial connection is a connection between the COM port of your PC and the control connectorof the device using a male-female DB9 cable.3. An IP connection is a connection between your PC and the device over an IP network.4. Connection with the Crocus SHDSL is internal. Keyboard and LCD are not available on allmodels.5. Using a VT100 terminal (emulation program).6. Using Telnet.7. Using an SNMP browser.8. Using a web browser.9. The proper XML files must be present on the file system of the management concentrator.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 13User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2 Installing and connecting the Crocus SHDSLFirst this chapter gives some important safety instructions. Then it explains how to install and connectthe Crocus SHDSL TT and CV.You are advised to read this chapter in a sequential manner, from the beginning to the end, without skippingany part. By doing so, your Crocus SHDSL will be completely installed and ready for configurationwhen you reach the end of this chapter.The following gives an overview of this chapter:• 2.1 - Safety instructions on page 14• 2.2 - Unpacking on page 15• 2.3 - Selecting a site on page 16• 2.4 - Wall mounting on page 17• 2.5 - Installation and connection precautions on page 19• 2.6 - Connecting the Crocus SHDSL Table Top on page 20• 2.7 - Connecting the Crocus SHDSL Card Version on page 26• 2.8 - Remote power operation on page 32• 2.9 - Using a repeater on page 38• 2.10 - Front panel LED indicators on page 39

14 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.1 Safety instructionsIMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSUnplug the unit from the wall power outlet or remove it from the card nest before installing, adjusting orservicing.The safety of this unit depends upon the third pin (ground pin) of the 3-wire grounding type plug. Do notdefeat this safety feature. If the power outlet at your site only has 2 pins, please consult a qualified electrician.WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSINSTRUKTIONENVor sämtlichen Arbeiten am Gerät (Installation, Einstellungen, Reparaturen etc.) sollten Sie denNetzstecker aus der Steckdose ziehen.Die Sicherheit dieses Gerätes ist abhängig von dem dritten Kontakt (dem Erdungspin) des 3-poligenSteckers. Beachten Sie unbedingt diese Sicherheitsstandard. Sollten Sie nur eine ältere 2-polige Steckdosezur Verfügung haben, lassen Sie diese von einem Elektriker gegen eine 3-polige Steckdoseauswechseln.SAFETY WARNINGTo avoid damage to the unit, please observe all procedures described in this chapter.SICHERHEITSBESTIMMUNGENUm eine Beschädigung des Gerätes zu verhindern, beachten Sie bitte unbedingt die Sicherheitsbestimmungen,die in diesem Abschnitt beschrieben werden.Ensure that the unit and its connected equipment all use the same AC power and ground, to reducenoise interference and possible safety hazards caused by differences in ground or earth potentials.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 15User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.2 UnpackingChecking the shipping cartonRough handling during shipping causes most early failures. Before installation, check the shipping cartonfor signs of damage:• If the shipping carton is damaged, please place a claim with the carrier company immediately.• If the shipping carton is undamaged, do not dispose of it in case you need to store the unit or ship itin the future.Package contentsThe box should contain the following items:• Crocus SHDSL• TMA CD-ROM including the TMA software and appropriate model files and the User and Referencemanual in PDF format.Optionally (depending which sales item you ordered):• power cord (Crocus SHDSL 115/230 Vac)

16 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.3 Selecting a siteWARNINGAlways place the unit on its feet without blocking the air vents.Do not stack multiple units directly onto each other, as stacking can cause heat build-up that could damagethe equipment.ACHTUNGStellen Sie das Gerät niemals seitlich, sondern nur auf den Füßen auf und achten Sie darauf, daß dieLüftungsschlitze an der Seitenverkleidung frei bleiben.Stapeln Sie nicht mehrere Geräte direkt übereinander, dies kann zu einem Hitzestau führen.Install the unit in an area free of extreme temperatures, humidity, shock and vibration. Position it so thatyou can easily see and access the front panel and its control indicators. Leave enough clearance at theback for cables and wires. Position the unit within the correct distances for the different accesses andwithin 2m of a power outlet.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 17User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.4 Wall mountingThe Crocus SHDSL TT can be mounted on a wall. Proceed as follows:StepAction1 Drill two holes in the wall, according to the following specifications:·• diameter of the drill: 4 mm• distance between the holes: 120 mm• depth of the holes: at least 25 mm2 Insert two wall plugs in the holes, with following specifications:·• diameter: 4 mm·• length: 20 mm3 Screw two square hooks (steel zinc plated and white epox) in the plugs, with followingdimensions:4 Slide the Crocus SHDSL over the hooks until it touches the wall. This is indicated witha in the figure below.5 Slide the Crocus SHDSL down until it is firmly attached. This is indicated with b in thefollowing figure.

18 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSLThe following figure illustrates how to mount the Crocus SHDSL against the wall:

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 19User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.5 Installation and connection precautionsESD WARNINGThe circuit boards are sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD) and should be handled with care. It isadvisable to ensure an optimal electrical contact between yourself, the working area and a safety groundbefore touching any circuit board. Take special care not to touch any component or connector on thecircuit board.EMC WARNINGThe complete Crocus family and the CN4 card nest are fully EMC compliant. Because of the modularstructure of the CN4 card nest, all unused slots (power slots, card slots and interface slots) have to becovered with the appropriate blanking modules at installation time.To ensure compliance with EMC directive 89/336/EEC, shielded cables or ferrite beads have to be used.NOTEThis unit may be powered by an IT Power System.The connectors of the Crocus SHDSL should only be connected to the following circuit types:Connector name Connector label Connector type Circuit typeline line RJ45 TNV-1 1TNV-3 2management CTRL subD SELV1. Without Remote Power2. With Remote Power• SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage): local connection (e.g. PC to Crocus SHDSL) or leased line insidethe building.• TNV-1 (Telecom Network Voltage): leased line outside the building.• TNV-2: PSTN from PABX inside the building.• TNV-3: PSTN from operator PABX outside the building.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 21User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.6.1 Table Top connectionsAll the connections have to be made at the back of the Table Top.Crocus SHDSL - 115/230 Vac modelThe following figure gives a rear view of the Crocus SHDSL TT.Crocus SHDSL - 48V modelThe following table labels the different parts located at the back of the Crocus SHDSL.Part labelPWR115/230 Vac-48VdcInterfaceCTRLLINEPart descriptionpower switchpower inletDTE interface slotDB9 control connector (sometimes also called auxiliary or NMS connector)RJ45 line connector

22 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.6.2 Connecting the power supply to the Table TopThe following table explains how to connect the power supply. The TT exists in two different models:TT model Connector type Connecting the power supply115/230 Vac standard IECpower supplyconnectorFor a 115/230 Vac model, connect the standard IEC powersupply connector to the power inlet. Refer to Crocus SHDSL -115/230 Vac model on page 21.-48 Vdc 48 V power supplyconnectorFor a -48 Vdc model, a power supply connector is deliveredwith the Crocus SHDSL.The + and - indications are withrespect to each other, not to ground level. This means that fora standard -48 Vdc connection, the ground has to be connectedto +, while the negative voltage has to be connected tothe -.When the -48 Vdc power supply connector is wired, connectit to the power inlet. Refer to Crocus SHDSL - 48V modelon page 21.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 23User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.6.3 Signal and protective ground interconnectionYou can configure the interconnection between signal ground and protective ground (earth). Do this bymeans of the appropriate strap located on the TT motherboard. For more information, refer to 3.1.3 -Straps of the TT on page 49.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 25User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.6.5 Inserting the DTE interface in the Table TopAt the back of the TT, an empty slot is provided in which you can insert the desired DTE interface modulewithout opening the housing.To insert the DTE interface in the TT, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Gently slide the DTE interface on the two inner slides into the empty slot.The followingfigure shows this procedure:2 When nearly inserted, press tight.3 Lock both screws.4 When the DTE interface is present, connect the application.

26 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.7 Connecting the Crocus SHDSL Card VersionThis section explains how to connect the Crocus SHDSL CV. The following gives an overview of thissection.• 2.7.1 - Inserting the Card Version in the CN4 card nest on page 27• 2.7.2 - Filling an entire CN4 card nest on page 28• 2.7.3 - The CN4 card nest line connector on page 29• 2.7.4 - Connecting the line to the Card Version on page 30• 2.7.5 - Inserting the DTE interface in the Card Version on page 31

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 27User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.7.1 Inserting the Card Version in the CN4 card nestThe CV consists of a stuffed print, provided with a front panel. The CV has to be inserted in the CN4 cardnest. Most connections to this card are performed via 3 DIN-connectors on the back of the card:• the middle connector for power supply, line and management connections• the two extreme connectors for interface connections.To insert the CV in the CN4 card nest, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Gently slide the CV on the two inner slides into an available slot.The following figureshows this procedure:2 When nearly inserted, press tight.3 Fasten the two screws located at the front of the CV.

28 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.7.2 Filling an entire CN4 card nestFor EMC reasons the cards all fit closely to each other. Therefore, you will experience that inserting thelast card in a completely filled up rack is somewhat difficult. To fill up an entire rack, it is best to proceedas follows:StepAction1 Insert card 1 up to 14 in slot 0 up to 13 of the CN4 card nest.2 Fasten the screws of card 1 up to 14.3 Insert the last card in slot 14 of the CN4 card nest.4 Fasten the screws of the last card.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 29User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.7.3 The CN4 card nest line connectorThe line connector for the CV is provided at the back of the CN4 card nest. The following table explainswhich line pair has to be connected to which connector position:Indication What to connect FigureL1 • 1P CV Twin: line pair of modem A• 2P CV Twin: line pair 1 of modem AL2 • 2P CV Twin: line pair 2 of modem AL3 • 1P CV Twin: line pair of modem B• 2P CV Twin: line pair 1 of modem BL4 • 2P CV Twin: line pair 2 of modem BFor optimum performance, the used line pairs have to be properly twisted pairs.

30 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.7.4 Connecting the line to the Card VersionThe line connector for the CV is provided at the back of the CN4 card nest. To connect a line pair to theCN4 line connector, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Slide the wires of the line pair in the connector positions as indicated in 2.7.3 - The CN4card nest line connector on page 29.2 Fasten the line connector screws.For more information on how to connect the line pairs to the CN4 card nest, refer to the manual of theCN4 card nest.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 31User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.7.5 Inserting the DTE interface in the Card VersionAt the back of the CN4 card nest, empty slots are provided in which the desired DTE interface modulecan be inserted without extracting the card from the card nest. The upper interface slot is used formodem A and the lower interface slot is used for modem B.To insert the DTE interface in the CN4 card nest, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Gently slide the DTE interface on the two inner slides into the slot that lies in line with theCV.The following figure shows this procedure:2 When nearly inserted, press tight.3 Fasten the two screws of the DTE interface.4 When the DTE interface is present, connect the application.

32 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.8 Remote power operationThis section gives an overview of the remote power functionalities and indicates how to activate them.The following gives an overview of the section.• 2.8.1 - What is remote power (RP)? on page 33• 2.8.2 - Remote power operation overview on page 34• 2.8.3 - Activating remote power source operation on page 35• 2.8.4 - Installing the optional module for remote power source operation on page 36The Crocus SHDSL G703 and RS530 (i.e. the non-RP version) can not be powered by remote power.Only use the Crocus SHDSL G703 RP and RS530 RP version in a remote power setup.When using remote power, certain limitations apply with regards to the number of Card Versions thatcan be inserted in the CN4, CN4-4 and CN4-2 rack. Refer to 14.11 - Thermal behaviour when providingremote power on page 386.

34 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.8.2 Remote power operation overviewSome versions of the Crocus SHDSL family can work as remote power source, while others can onlywork as remote power sink. The following table gives an overview of the remote power functionality inthe different Crocus SHDSL versions:Version RP source RP sinkCrocus SHDSL CV X -Crocus SHDSL TT - -Crocus SHDSL G703 TT - -Crocus SHDSL G703 TT RP - XCrocus SHDSL RS530 TT - -Crocus SHDSL RS530 TT RP - XCrocus SHDSL xP CV CN7 RP X -Crocus SHDSL Repeater - XRefer to 3.2.2 - DIP switches of the CV on page 53 for more information about the settings of the DIPswitches of a CV device.

36 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.8.4 Installing the optional module for remote power source operationTo enable remote power operation on the Crocus SHDSL CV, the optional module on the CV motherboardmust be used.When mounting the RP source module, it is important that the appropriate DIP switch is set correctly.Refer to 3.2.2 - DIP switches of the CV on page 53 for more information about the DIP switch.Failure to comply with this rule will result in irreversible damage to the Crocus SHDSL.To install the remote power module, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Place the CV on a flat surface in front of you, with the DIP switches, straps, etc. facingup and the front panel facing the left side.2 Take the optional module and hold it in such a way that the connectors and metal spacersare facing down.To avoid damage to the Crocus SHDSL motherboard, mount the module with the connectorsand metal spacers facing down!3 Take the optional module and position the connectors of the module over the pin headersJx-A and Jx-B of the CV motherboard (see figure below). Make sure the component sideof the module is facing down.4 Push the module down so that the pin headers slide in the connectors.5 Turn the CV around, i.e. with the DIP switches, straps, etc. facing down.6 Fasten the screw of the module through the hole in the CV motherboard.⇒The optional remote power module is installed.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 37User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 39User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.10 Front panel LED indicatorsThis section gives an overview of the front panel LEDs and what they indicate. The following gives anoverview of this section.• 2.10.1 - Introducing the front panel LEDs on page 40• 2.10.2 - Power LED (PWR, green) on page 41• 2.10.3 - Test LED (TST/142, red) on page 41• 2.10.4 - Error LED (AIS/ERR, red) on page 42• 2.10.5 - Request to send LED (RTS/105, green) on page 42• 2.10.6 - Transmit data LED (TXD/103, green) on page 43• 2.10.7 - Receive data LED (RXD/104, green) on page 43• 2.10.8 - Data carrier detect LED (DCD/109, green) on page 43

40 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.10.1 Introducing the front panel LEDsWhen all the connections are made and the Crocus SHDSLis powered, the LEDs on the front panelreflect the actual status of the Crocus SHDSL.The figures below show the front panel LED indicators of the Crocus SHDSL:Front panel LED status modesFor some front panel LED indicators (TST, AIS ERR and DCD) different status modesexist. These status modes can be distinguished by the way the LED lights up:LED status LED duty cycle Descriptioncontinuously off 0% The LED never lights up.continuously on 100% The LED lights up continuously.blinking 50% The LED is as much lit as it is out.flashing 20% The LED only lights up during 20%of the time.monitoring - The LED lights up irregularly. Forinstance, it lights up on detection ofa certain signal. I.e. it monitors thissignal.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 41User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.10.2 Power LED (PWR, green)This LED indicates that the Crocus SHDSL is connected to the power supply and is switched on.2.10.3 Test LED (TST/142, red)This LED indicates whether the Crocus SHDSL is in normal operation or in test condition (ET, AL, RDL,DL or a combination of them). Four different status modes can be distinguished:LED statusoffcontinuously onDescriptionNo test is active.An interface test is active.In case the test LED and the power LED are on (all other LEDs are in a randomstate), then the Crocus SHDSL runs in loader mode. For more information onloader mode, refer to 12.1.2 - What is loader software? on page 350.blinkingflashingA test initiated by the management system is active.An interface test has been terminated by the management system.When the Crocus SHDSL switches from loader mode to application mode, the TSTLED flashes 5 times.Termination of an active test by the management system is necessary to prevent hang-up situationscaused by accidental activation of a test. Once the test indicator starts flashing, all active test conditionsshould be removed first, before initiating a new test session.

42 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.10.4 Error LED (AIS/ERR, red)This LED indicates an error has occurred. The errors have different priority levels. I.e. when two errorsof different origin occur at the same time, one error will get priority over the other error. The different errorLED status modes and error priorities are displayed in the following table:LED status Description Error priorityoff No error has occurred. -monitoring The Crocus SHDSL its internal error test pattern generator /detector (ET) is active and received bit errors.highcontinuously onflashing (CVonly)In case a G703 interface is used, it indicates an Alarm IndicationSignal (AIS) has been detected on the incoming G.704transmit data. This means that the application has detected anerror, and it communicates this to the interface by setting alldata bits to 1 (which is the AIS condition).Alarm signalling is active and an alarm has been detected.For more information on alarm signalling, refer to 10.2.3 -Alarm signalling on page 324mediumlow2.10.5 Request to send LED (RTS/105, green)This LED indicates the state of the connected DTE equipment. It indicates the inverse of the linkDownstatus attribute of the modular interface. For the different modular interface types, this means the following:InterfaceRS530, V35,V36, HSSIX21G703BridgeRouterDual Port interfacesWhat the RTS LED indicatesThe LED is on when an RTS signal is detected. I.e. the connection between theCrocus SHDSL and the DTE is up.The LED is on when a valid C signal is detected. I.e. the connection between theCrocus SHDSL and the DTE is up.The LED is on when there is no loss of signal.The LED is on when the LAN connector is plugged in the interface.The LED is on when there is a connection between the Crocus SHDSL and therouter interface.Both interfaces have to be up (as defined above), before the RTS LED lights up.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2 43User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL2.10.6 Transmit data LED (TXD/103, green)This LED monitors the data sent by the application (Data Terminal Equipment) to the DTE interface moduleof the Crocus SHDSL.Note that the data is monitored after it went through the DTE interface circuitry. Some interfaces (G703,Bridge and Router) add framing information which activates the TXD LED even if no real user data isbeing transmitted.2.10.7 Receive data LED (RXD/104, green)This LED monitors the data sent to the application (Data Terminal Equipment) by the DTE interface moduleof the Crocus SHDSL.Note that the data is monitored before it went through the DTE interface circuitry. Some interfaces(G703, Bridge and Router) used on the remote side add framing information which activates the RXDLED even if no real user data is being received.2.10.8 Data carrier detect LED (DCD/109, green)This LED indicates whether the central Crocus SHDSL is in synchronisation with the remote SHDSLdevice. Three different modes can be distinguished:LED statusoffblinkingonDescriptionNo signal is detected on the line.A training cycle between central and remote SHDSL device is in progress.The central and remote SHDSL devices are synchronised. A data link is present.In case of a Crocus SHDSL2P two DCD LEDs are present, one for each line pair.

44 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 2User manualInstalling and connecting the Crocus SHDSL

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3 45User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL3 DIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSLThis chapter locates the DIP switches and straps on the Crocus SHDSL TT and Card Version motherboard.It gives an overview of their function and it explains how to change their settings.The following gives an overview of this chapter.• 3.1 - DIP switches and straps on page 46• 3.2 - DIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL Card Version on page 51Default settings are printed in bold.

46 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL3.1 DIP switches and strapsThis section locates the DIP switches and straps on the TT motherboard. It gives an overview of theirfunction and it explains how to change their settings.Disconnect the Crocus SHDSL from the mains before you open the housing to change DIP switch and/or strap settings.The following gives an overview of this chapter.• 3.1.1 - The TTmotherboard on page 47• 3.1.2 - DIP switches of the TT on page 48• 3.1.3 - Straps of the TT on page 49• 3.1.4 - Changing DIP switch and strap settings of the TT on page 50Default settings are printed in bold.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3 47User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL3.1.1 The TTmotherboardThe figure below shows the position of the DIP switches and straps on the TT motherboard.

48 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL3.1.2 DIP switches of the TTThe following table gives an overview of DIP switch bank DS1 of the TT:DIP switch name DS1 no. Setting Functionboot mode 1 on Normal operation.offStart up in boot mode.loader mode 2 on Normal operation.offStart up in loadermode.load default configuration3 on Normal operation.offLoad default configuration.- 4 - - not used -For more information on …• DIP switch and strap location on the TT motherboard, refer to 3.1.1 - The TTmotherboard on page 47.• changing DIP switch and strap settings on the TT, refer to 3.1.4 - Changing DIP switch and strap settingsof the TT on page 50.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3 49User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL3.1.3 Straps of the TTOn the TT, you can configure the interconnection between signal ground and protective ground (earth).To do so, use strap ST9:Strap settings Connection Descriptiondisconnectedconnectedthrough 100ohms resistordirectly connectedAs default, the signal ground is disconnected from theearth. This avoids problems which might occur when theearth potential of the Crocus SHDSL and the connectedapplication is not the same. In such a situation earth currentloops may induce distortion on the transmitted data,resulting in transmission errors.Sometimes you might want to connect the CrocusSHDSL earth to the application earth although bothearth potentials are not the same. (E.g. to avoid a big differencebetween both earth potentials.) To avoid thathigh earth currents are generated, you can make thisconnection through a 100 ohms resistor.Sometimes it is not possible to connect the applicationdirectly to the earth. In that case you can earth the applicationthrough the Crocus SHDSL by connecting theCrocus SHDSL to the earth and setting strap ST9 inposition 3.Also the opposite situation might occur: it isnot possible to earth the Crocus SHDSL. In that caseyou can earth the Crocus SHDSL through the applicationby connecting the application to the earth and settingstrap ST9 in position 3.For more information on …• DIP switch and strap location on the Crocus SHDSL motherboard, refer to 3.1.1 - The TTmotherboardon page 47.• changing DIP switch and strap settings on the Crocus SHDSL, refer to 3.1.4 - Changing DIP switchand strap settings of the TT on page 50.

50 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL3.1.4 Changing DIP switch and strap settings of the TTTo change the DIP switch and/or strap settings of the Crocus SHDSL, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Switch the Crocus SHDSL off.2 Disconnect the Crocus SHDSL from the mains.3 Unscrew the two screws located at the back of the Crocus SHDSL.4 Remove the cover as follows:1. Carefully lift the back of the cover a few centimetres.2. Gently pull the cover backwards from under the nose of the Crocus SHDSL.5 Change the DIP switch and/or strap settings.6 Replace the cover and close tight.7 Fasten the two screws located at the back of the Crocus SHDSL.8 Reconnect the Crocus SHDSL to the mains.9 Switch the Crocus SHDSL on.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3 51User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL3.2 DIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL Card VersionThis section locates the DIP switches and straps on the Crocus SHDSL Card Version motherboard. Itgives an overview of their function and it explains how to change their settings.The following gives an overview of this chapter.• 3.2.1 - The CV motherboard on page 52• 3.2.2 - DIP switches of the CV on page 53• 3.2.3 - Changing DIP switch and strap settings of the CV on page 55

52 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL3.2.1 The CV motherboardThe figure below shows the position of the DIP switches and straps on the Crocus SHDSL CV motherboard.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3 53User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL3.2.2 DIP switches of the CVDIP switch bank DS1The following table gives an overview of DIP switch bank DS1 of the Crocus SHDSL CV:DIP switch name DS1 no. Setting FunctionBoot mode 1 on Normal operation.offStart up in boot mode.loader mode 2 on Normal operation.offStart up in loader mode.load default configuration- modem Aload default configuration- modem Boptional powering module3 on Normal operation.offLoad default configuration.4 on Normal operation.offLoad default configuration.5 on mandatory setting when no remotepower module mountedoffmandatory setting when remotepower module mounted- 6 - - not used -- 7 - - not used -- 8 - - not used -• When mounting the RP source module, it is important that DS1-5 is set to off.Failure to comply with this rule will result in irreversible damage to the Crocus SHDSL.• Refer to 2.8.4 - Installing the optional module for remote power source operation on page 36 for moreinformation on how to install the optional module.• Also refer to 7.5 - Remote power configuration attributes on page 210 to set the remote power configurationattributes.

54 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSLDIP switch bank #ADS1 and #CDS1Use DIP switch banks #ADS1 and #CDS1 to enable remote power source operation:DIP switch name#ADS1 and #CDS1no.SettingFunctionremote power 1, 2, 3 and 4 on mandatory setting when no remotepower module mountedoffmandatory setting when remotepower module mounted• When mounting the RP source module, it is important that these DIP switches are set to off.Failure to comply with this rule will result in irreversible damage to the Crocus SHDSL.• Refer to 2.8.4 - Installing the optional module for remote power source operation on page 36 for moreinformation on how to install the optional module.• Also refer to 7.5 - Remote power configuration attributes on page 210 to set the remote power configurationattributes.For more information on …• DIP switch and strap location on the CV motherboard, refer to 3.2.1 - The CV motherboard onpage 52.• changing DIP switch and strap settings on the CV, refer to 3.2.3 - Changing DIP switch and strapsettings of the CV on page 55.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3 55User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL3.2.3 Changing DIP switch and strap settings of the CVTo change the DIP switch settings of the CV, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Loosen the two screws located at the front of the CV.2 Slide the CV out of the CN4 card nest.3 Change the DIP switch and/or strap settings.4 Gently slide the CV on the two inner slides into the CN4 card nest again.The followingfigure shows this procedure:5 When nearly inserted, press tight.6 Fasten the two screws located at the front of the CV.

56 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 3User manualDIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4 57User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4 Maintaining the Crocus SHDSLOnce you installed the Crocus SHDSL, you can proceed with the configuration. You can do this usingany of the management tools introduced in 1.7 - Maintenance and management tools connection possibilitieson page 12.This chapter briefly highlights two of those management tools: the Telindus Maintenance Application(TMA) and keyboard management. It gives an introduction and describes how to start a managementsession on the Crocus SHDSL. Furthermore, it also introduces the terminology concerning the managementof a Telindus device.The following gives an overview of this chapter.• 4.1 - Starting TMA on the Crocus SHDSL on page 58• 4.2 - Starting keyboard management on the Crocus SHDSL on page 64• 4.3 - Introducing the management attributes of the Crocus SHDSL on page 65

58 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4.1 Starting TMA on the Crocus SHDSLThis section introduces the Telindus Maintenance Applications (TMA). Then it explains how you can starta TMA session on the Crocus SHDSL.The following gives an overview of this section:• 4.1.1 - Introducing TMA on page 59• 4.1.2 - Starting a TMA session through the control connector on page 60• 4.1.3 - Starting a TMA session through a management concentrator on page 62• 4.1.4 - Important remarks on starting a TMA session on page 63

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4 59User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4.1.1 Introducing TMAWhat is the Telindus Maintenance Application?TMA is a free Windows software package that enables you to maintain the Crocus SHDSL, i.e. to accessits configuration attributes and look at status, performance and alarm information using a user friendlygraphical user interface.TMA is an excellent tool for complete management of the Telindus access devices. When using TMA incombination with a network management system such as HP OpenView, complete networks can bemanaged from one central site.Consult the TMA user manual to install it and get acquainted with the TMA user interface.You will need a new version of the model file distribution if changes have been made to the attributes ofthe Crocus SHDSL. The most recent model files can always be downloaded from the Telindus web siteat http://www.telindusproducts.com/tma.How to connect TMA?There are two ways to establish a connection between the computer running TMA and the CrocusSHDSL:• over a serial connection, through the control connector of the Crocus SHDSL.• over an IP or a serial connection, through a management concentrator.

60 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4.1.2 Starting a TMA session through the control connectorTo establish a connection between the computer running TMA and the Crocus SHDSL through the controlconnector, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Connect a serial port of your computer(e.g. COM1) through astraight DB9 male - female cablewith the control connector of theCrocus modem.2 Start TMA.3 In the TMA window, either …• select from the menu bar: Connect → Device…• or press the shortcut key: Ctrl+N• or press on the Connect to device button:The Connect (to a device) window is being displayed asin the following figure:4 In the Connect (to a device) window, configure the following parameters:• Select the option Serial, and specify the COM port of your computer the CrocusSHDSL is connected to.• If a password has previously been configured in the Crocus SHDSL then also fill inthe password field.5 If the necessary parameters are filled in, press the Next > button.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4 61User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSLStepAction6 In the TMA window, either …• select from the menu bar: Connect → Selectdevice…• or press the shortcut key: Ctrl+D• or press on the Select device button:The Connect (select a device) window is beingdisplayed as in the following figure:7 Two situations can be distinguished depending on establishing a connection to a CrocusSHDSL TT, CV or CV Twin:• For a Crocus SHDSL TT and CV, the following applies:- In order to connect to the local Crocus SHDSL, choose On device.- In order to connect to the remote Crocus SHDSL, choose After device and enterrelative NMS address 1 or higher.• For a Crocus SHDSL CV Twin, select the following:- In order to connect to the local Crocus SHDSL, choose On device and selectmodem A or modem B.- In order to connect to the remote Crocus SHDSL choose After device, enter relativeNMS address 1 or higher and select modem A or modem B.If a password has previously been configured in the Crocus SHDSL then also fill in thepassword field.8 If the necessary parameters are filled in, press the Finish button.9 After a couple of seconds, the attributes of the selected Crocus SHDSL appear in theTMA window.

62 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4.1.3 Starting a TMA session through a management concentratorOn central locations with many access devices, the Crocus SHDSL can be connected to a managementconcentrator (e.g. Orchid 1003 LAN or Telindus 1035 Orchid). In this case the management concentratoris a proxy device for the Crocus SHDSL. This means you can connect TMA to the Crocus SHDSLthrough the management concentrator.What is more, the management concentrator can act as an IP proxy device for the Crocus SHDSL. TheIP address related to the Crocus SHDSL is defined in the management concentrator.Refer to the manual of the management concentrator for more information on the configuration and managementcapabilities of this device.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4 63User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4.1.4 Important remarks on starting a TMA sessionStarting a TMA session on modem B of a Crocus SHDSL CV TwinSuppose that both modem A and B of a Crocus SHDSL CV Twin have a password. In that case, if youwant to connect with TMA to modem B …• first enter the password of modem A in the Connect device window (refer to 4.1.2 - Starting a TMAsession through the control connector on page 60, step 3).• then enter the password of modem B in the Select device window (refer to 4.1.2 - Starting a TMAsession through the control connector on page 60, step 6).Starting a TMA session on a remote deviceThe following table shows you which attributes are of importance when starting a TMA session on aremote device:If you want to open a TMA session on a remote…Crocus SHDSL TT,Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router,then set the attribute …ctrlPortProtocol to management.What is more, if the remote Crocus SHDSL TTcontains a router interface and you want to managethis "remote" interface, then also the ctrlPort-Protocol of the remote Crocus SHDSL TT has to beset to management.eocChannel to itu-G.991.2.Obviously, you can only start a TMA session on the remote device if the data link is up.

64 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4.2 Starting keyboard management on the Crocus SHDSLKeyboard management on the Table TopIf you have an Crocus SHDSL Table Top that is equipped with an LCD display and a keyboard, you canuse this display and keyboard to manage the Crocus SHDSL TT.Keyboard management on the Card VersionThe Crocus SHDSL Card Version does not exist in a version with LCD display and keyboard. Instead,you can use the Telindus EasyConnect hand-held terminal to manage the Crocus SHDSL CV. This iscomparable to the LCD display and keyboard on the Crocus SHDSL TT.How to start keyboard management?In order to start keyboard management, proceed as follows:StepAction1 On the keyboard, press the key until the following string is displayed:2 Press the Enter key. Now the following is displayed:PASSWORD:←3 In case previously …• a password has been configured in the Crocus SHDSL, then …- Press the enter the key.- Select the needed characters by means of the , and Enter keys.- When finished, press the Enter key.• no password has been configured in the Crocus SHDSL, then just press the Enterkey.4 Now you are ready to manage the Crocus SHDSL TT using the keyboard.To find out how exactly you can use the keyboard to browse the containment tree, tochange attribute values, etc., refer to the Telindus EasyConnect manual (PDF) and morespecifically to the section "How to browse a model?".In order to exit keyboard management, repeatedly press the Esc key until the main displaywindow appears again.Status information on the displayWhen you are not busy managing the Crocus SHDSL with the keyboard, the display shows status information.For more information, refer to Chapter 5 - The front panel display on page 71.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4 65User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4.3 Introducing the management attributes of the Crocus SHDSLThis section gives an introduction to the management attributes of the Crocus SHDSL. It introducesterms such as containment tree, group, object, attribute, value and action.The following gives an overview of this section:• 4.3.1 - Containment tree terminology on page 66• 4.3.2 - The Crocus SHDSL containment tree on page 68• 4.3.3 - Crocus SHDSL attribute overview on page 69

66 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4.3.1 Containment tree terminologyThe following figure depicts the TMA window containing the Crocus SHDSL containment tree.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4 67User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSLThe following table explains the terminology associated with the containment tree.TermcontainmenttreeobjectattributevaluestructuredvaluegroupactionDescriptionThe containment tree represents the hierarchical structure of the Crocus SHDSL. It iscomposed of a number of objects that are ordered in a tree. This tree resembles a Windowsdirectory structure:• it is also a levelled structure, with nodes which can be expanded or reduced• the containment tree objects can be compared with file folders• the objects contain attributes like file folders contain files.An object represents a physical interface, an application or a combination of both. Eachobject has its own set of attributes.Example:The top object crocusShdsl contains the sub object line. On its turn, the sub objectline contains the sub object linePair [1]. This object contains all the attributes concerning theline pair. E.g. the status attribute lineAttenuation (dB).An attribute is a parameter related to a certain object. It has a certain value.Example:The object line contains the attribute channel, which has the values central and remote.An attribute has a certain value which is …• changeable in case of a configuration attribute (provided you have write access)• read only in case of a status, performance and alarm attribute.Example:The configuration attribute channel can be set to the value central or remote.Some attribute values contain underlying values: a structured value. These values aredisplayed in the structured value window. If an attribute contains structured values thena bit string, or is displayed after the attribute.Example:The alarmLevel attribute contains a structured value which displays alarms and their correspondingpriority level.Groups assemble a set of attributes related by functionality. There are four groups inTMA, which correspond with the four tabs in the attribute window:• configuration• status• performance• alarms.A group in combination with an object may have actions assigned to them. These actionsare displayed in the action window.Example:The Cold Boot action only appears when the top object crocusShdsl is selected incombination with the group Configuration.

68 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4.3.2 The Crocus SHDSL containment treeThe following table lists the different objects of the Crocus SHDSL containment tree.ObjectThis object contains …> crocusShdsl the general system attributes. It is the top object in the containment tree.E.g. the status attribute sysUpTime: 00005d 02h 53m 16s.Note that:• for a TT this object is called crocusShdslTt• for a CV this object is called crocusShdslCv.>> line the general line attributes.E.g. the configuration attribute channel.>>> linePair[ ] the specific line pair attributes.E.g. the status attribute lineAttenuation (dB).>> the DTE interface attributes.E.g. the configuration attribute clocking.The name of this object depends on the type of DTE interface.E.g. v35 in case of a V35 interface, g703 in case of a G703 interface, …>> management the network management attributes.E.g. the configuration attribute consoleNoTrafficTimeOut.>> operatingSystem the operating system attributes.E.g. the performance attribute currUsedProcPower (%).>> fileSystem the file system attributes.E.g. the status attribute fileList

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4 69User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL4.3.3 Crocus SHDSL attribute overviewThe reference part of this manual explains all the attributes of the Crocus SHDSL. One chapter describesone group of attributes:• chapter 7 describes the configuration attributes• chapter 8 describes the status attributes• chapter 9 describes the performance attributes• chapter 10 describes the alarm attributes.

70 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 4User manualMaintaining the Crocus SHDSL

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 5 71User manualThe front panel display5 The front panel displayThe Crocus SHDSL Table Top is also available in a version with an LCD display and a keyboard. Usingthis display and keyboard you can manage the Crocus SHDSL TT in a basic way. By connecting theTelindus EasyConnect hand-held terminal to a Crocus SHDSL Card Version you can manage it in a similarway.When you are not busy managing the Crocus SHDSL with the keyboard, the display shows status information.This chapter describes the information that can be seen on the display.The following gives an overview of this chapter.• 5.1 - The "windows" of the front panel display on page 72• 5.2 - The main window on page 73• 5.3 - The line window on page 75• 5.4 - The DTE window on page 76• 5.5 - The test window on page 77• 5.6 - The model browsing window on page 78• 5.7 - The connect remote window on page 78• 5.8 - The version window on page 78

72 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 5User manualThe front panel display5.1 The "windows" of the front panel displayPressing the or key on the keyboard, allows you to navigate through the different front panel display "windows".The following gives an overview of the different front panel display windows:Pressing the Esc key in any window returns you to the main window.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 5 73User manualThe front panel display5.2 The main windowThe main window displays general status information. The structure of the window is as follows:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223241 C d o w n V 3 5 f b2 S H D S L c 2 0 4 8 / 2 0 4 8 i n t pThe following table clarifies the main window display structure:Display position Field Descriptionrow 1 - column 2 consistency Displays whether the Crocus SHDSL is underconsistency of a management concentrator ornot:·• C: under consistency,·• blank: not under consistency.row 1 - column 3 … 6 general status Displays the general state of the CrocusSHDSL: up, down, test.row 1 - column 13 … 18 DTE type Displays the DTE interface type currently inuse: V35, V36, X21, G703, RS530, BRIDGE,ROUTER, …row 1 - column 20 & 21 fallback speed Displays whether the Crocus SHDSL operatesin fallback speed or not:• fb: fallback speed,• blank: no fallback speed.row 2 - column 1 … 5 modem type Displays the modem type: SHDSL.row 2 - column 6 channel Displays the channel currently in use:• c: central channel,• r: remote channel.

74 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 5User manualThe front panel displayDisplay position Field Descriptionrow 2 - column 8 … 11 line speed (kbps) Displays the line speed currently in use: from 64up to 2304.row 2 - column 13 … 16DTE speed(kbps)Displays the DTE interface speed currently inuse: from 64 up to 2304.row 2 - column 18 … 21 clocking Displays the clocking mode currently in use:• int: internal clocking• inta: internal alternative clocking• intp: internal preferred clocking• sr: slave-receive clocking• sr-a: slave-receive alternative clocking• sr-p: slave-receive preferred clocking• ext: external clocking• exlb: external loop-back clocking• stat: station clocking.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 5 75User manualThe front panel display5.3 The line windowThe line window displays status information of the line. The structure of the window is as follows:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223241 l i n e : t e s t 2 0 4 8 d a t a2 a t t : 2 6 . 5 d B n m r : 2 7 . 5 d BThe following table clarifies the line window display structure:Display position Field Descriptionrow 1 - column 1 signal quality Displays the signal quality pyramid.row 1 - column 2 … 6 line pairs Displays for which line pair the status information isbeing displayed:• line: there is only 1 line pair,• l1: status information of line pair 1 is being displayed,• l2: status information of line pair 2 is being displayed.row 1 - column 7… 10 line status Displays the state of the line: up, down, test.row 1 - column 12 … 15 line speed (kbps) Displays the line speed currently in use: from 64 up to2304.row 1 - column 17 … 24 modem status Displays the state of the modem: idle, data,hs_preac, hs_activ, ch_bitrt, equ_trn, etc.row 2 - column 1 … 10 attenuation Displays the attenuation in dB.row 2 - column 12 … 21 noise margin Displays the noise margin in dB.

76 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 5User manualThe front panel display5.4 The DTE windowThe DTE window displays status information of the DTE interface. The structure of the window is as follows:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223241 V 3 5 : u p 2 0 4 8 i n t p2 t d r d r t s c t s d s r d c dThe following table clarifies the DTE window display structure:Display position Field Descriptionrow 1 - column 1 … 7 DTE type Displays the DTE interface type currently in use: V35, V36,X21, G703, RS530, BRIDGE, ROUTER, …row 1 - column 8 … 11 DTE status Displays the state of the DTE interface: up, down, test.row 1 - column 13 … 16DTE speed(kbps)Displays the DTE interface speed currently in use: from 64up to 2304.row 1 - column 18 … 21 clocking Displays the clocking mode currently in use:• int: internal clocking• inta: internal alternative clocking• intp: internal preferred clocking• sr: slave-receive clocking• sr-a: slave-receive alternative clocking• sr-p: slave-receive preferred clocking• ext: external clocking• exlb: external loop-back clocking• stat: station clocking.row 2 DTE signals Displays the state of the DTE interface signals:• lowercase: the corresponding signal is off (not active).• uppercase: the corresponding signal is on (active).The following indications are possible:• td: transmit data• rd: receive data• rts: request to send• cts: clear to send• dsr: data set ready• dcd: data carrier detect• ind: indicator signal• ais: alarm indication signal• lfa: loss of frame alignment• los: loss of signal

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 5 77User manualThe front panel display5.5 The test windowIn the test window you can …• execute a diagnostic test.• clear the error counter.• monitor the status of a diagnostic test.The structure of the window is as follows:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223241 r l + e t2 e t a l r l d l c l rThe following table clarifies the test window display structure:Display position Field Descriptionrow 1 - column 1 … 7 test type Displays the type of test currently in use: notest, et, al, rl, dl, al+et and rl+et.row 1 - column 7 … 15test status and originatorBriefly displays the status of the test currently inuse: progress or ending,and then displays the originator of the test currentlyin use: keyboard, nms, interface,remote, cmditpr, network or layer2.row 1 - column 17 … 24 error counter Displays the number of detected errors since thestart of an ET, AL-ET or RL-ET test: 0 up to65534. An overflow condition is indicated by65535 or *****.row 2 - column 3 & 4row 2 - column 7 & 8row 2 - column 11 & 12row 2 - column 15 & 16error testanalogue loopremote digital loopdigital loopUsing these actions you can start a diagnostictest. Proceed as follows:1. Move the cursor with the and keysunderneath the string of the test you want tostart.2. Press the Enter key.⇒The test starts and the corresponding teststring becomes uppercase.3. To stop the test, press the Enter key again.ÞThe test stops and the corresponding teststring becomes lowercase again.row 2 - column 20 … 21 clear error counter Using this action you can clear the error counter.Move the cursor with the and keys underneaththe clr string and press the Enter key.

78 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 5User manualThe front panel display5.6 The model browsing windowThe model browsing window allows you to enter the containment tree of the Crocus SHDSL. This allowsyou to manage the Crocus SHDSL using the keyboard. This is called keyboard management.For more information, refer to 4.2 - Starting keyboard management on the Crocus SHDSL on page 645.7 The connect remote windowUsing the connect remote action allows you to display and operate the front panel windows of the remoteCrocus SHDSL from your local Crocus SHDSL. This means you can also perform keyboard managementon the remote Crocus SHDSL using the local keyboard and display.5.8 The version windowThe version window displays the version of the application software (also called control software orfirmware) and the DSP software. The structure of the window is as follows:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223241 C T L / T 2 1 3 6 / 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 / 0 1 / 0 22 L D R : T 2 1 3 7 / 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 / 0 1 / 0 2The following table clarifies the line window display structure:Display position Field Descriptionrow 1 control version Displays the control softwarecode, version and release date.row 2 loader version Displays the loader softwarecode, version and release date.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 79User manualStep-by-step configuration6 Step-by-step configurationThis chapter describes in a step-by-step manner how to perform a basic configuration on CrocusSHDSL.You are advised to read this chapter in a sequential manner, from the beginning to the end, without skippingany part. By doing so, your Crocus SHDSL will be completely configured and ready for use whenyou reach the end of this chapter.The following gives an overview of this chapter.• 6.1 - Configuring the basic line parameters on page 80• 6.2 - Configuring EOC handling on page 83• 6.3 - Configuring the timing mode on page 90• 6.4 - Clocking of Crocus devices to access PDH and SDH networks on page 91• 6.5 - Configuring the clocking mode on page 108• 6.6 - Configuring the user speed on page 132• 6.7 - Configuring the minimum line speed on page 137• 6.8 - Configuring framing and time slots on page 143• 6.9 - Configuring the user speed and time slots on the Dual Port G703-Serial interface on page 147• 6.10 - Low speed limitations on the G703 Nx64k interfaces on page 150• 6.11 - Configuring the interface specific attributes on page 152• 6.12 - Configuring the management attributes on page 158• 6.13 - Configuring remote power operation on page 171• 6.14 - Configuring passwords on page 172• 6.15 - Executing configuration actions on page 174• 6.16 - Troubleshooting the Crocus SHDSL on page 178• 6.17 - Crocus SHDSL compatibility with other SHDSL devices on page 179For a complete overview of the attributes of the Crocus SHDSL, refer to the reference manual.

80 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.1 Configuring the basic line parameterscrocusShdsl/line/channelDefault: remote for TT / central for CVRange: remote / centralThe channel attribute defines which modem is the central andwhich the remote modem. I.e. it determines which modem acts as master and which as slave during thesynchronisation procedure of the modem.The default channel setting of a TT is remote, while that of a CV is central. Therefore there will never bea synchronisation problem when a CV and a TT are used in a regular set-up, the CV at the backboneside and the TT at the customer side.• If two TTs are used at each end of the data link, make sure to change the channel attribute of one ofthe TTs into central.• If two CVs are used at each end of the data link, make sure to change the channel attribute of one ofthe CVs into remote.crocusShdsl/line/regionThe region attribute defines which S-HDSL standard is used:Default:annexBRange: enumerated, see belowValueannexAannexBautoDescriptionThe American S-HDSL standard is used.The European S-HDSL standard is used.The S-HDSL standard is selected automatically.For compatibility with other SHDSL devices, setting this attribute to the correct value might be essential.Refer to 6.17 - Crocus SHDSL compatibility with other SHDSL devices on page 179.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 81User manualStep-by-step configurationcrocusShdsl/line/modeThis attribute is only present on the Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version. Usethe mode attribute to select between single pair or dual pair operation.Default:autoRange: singlePair, dualPairWhen you change the mode attribute, then make sure that you use the correct speed attribute to set theuser speed:If the mode attribute is set to …singlePair,dualPair,then use the attribute …speed to configure the user speed.speed2P to configure the user speed.

82 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationcrocusShdsl/line/eocChannelDefault:itu-G.991.2Range: itu-G.991.2 / proprietaryUse the eocChannel attribute to determine how the checksum of EmbeddedOperations Channel (EOC) messages is calculated. Make sure that on both the central and theremote device the eocChannel attribute is set to the same value.The eocChannel attribute has the following values:Valueproprietaryitu-G.991.2DescriptionThe checksum is calculated using a proprietary method.The checksum is calculated using the G.SHDSL standard method.For compatibility with other SHDSL devices, setting this attribute to the correct value might be essential.Refer to 6.17 - Crocus SHDSL compatibility with other SHDSL devices on page 179.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 83User manualStep-by-step configuration6.2 Configuring EOC handlingThis section explains what EOC is. Then it explains how you can configure the handling of the EOC messages.Finally, it discusses which information is retrieved depending on the setting of the eocHandlingattribute.The following gives an overview of this section.• 6.2.1 - What is EOC? on page 84• 6.2.2 - The EOC handling attribute on page 85• 6.2.3 - Discovering devices on the SHDSL line on page 86• 6.2.4 - EOC retrieved information on page 86

84 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.2.1 What is EOC?SHDSL devices can communicate with each other through the Embedded Operations Channel (EOC).For instance the Crocus SHDSL can send the following types of EOC requests:• inventory, to get information (manufacturer, release, etc.) about the remote SHDSL device,• enable / disable network loop-backs on the remote SHDSL device,• retrieve statistics or failure information (SNR Margin, loop attenuation, number of CRC errors, etc.).The EOC messages are defined in G.991.2 to provide interoperability.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 85User manualStep-by-step configuration6.2.2 The EOC handling attributecrocusShdsl/line/eocHandlingUse the eocHandling attribute to define the handling of the EOC messages.The eocHandling attribute has the following values:Default:noneRange: enumerated, see belowValuepassiveDescriptionIn this mode, the Crocus SHDSL will never send any spontaneous standard EOCmessages. It will only answer to standard EOC requests coming from the otherside. Also, after getting into datastate, no Telindus specific EOC data will be sentthe first 2 minutes, unless the device has received a Telindus specific frame fromthe other side (e.g. o10 data, or a test or configuration frame).Use this value when the Crocus SHDSL is connected to the Telindus 2300.nonediscoveryinventoryinfoalarmConfigurationThe Crocus SHDSL does not send any spontaneous EOC requests, except for discoveryprobes, they are still sent. The Crocus SHDSL will also answer to EOCrequests coming from other SHDSL devices.The Crocus SHDSL "scans" the SHDSL line. For every device it discovers, it addsan object to the containment tree. Refer to 6.2.3 - Discovering devices on theSHDSL line on page 86.Then the Crocus SHDSL retrieves information from these devices and displays itin the corresponding objects. Exactly which information is retrieved depends onthe setting of the eocHandling attribute. Refer to 6.2.4 - EOC retrieved informationon page 86.Also in this case the Crocus SHDSL "scans" the SHDSL line, adds the objects tothe containment tree and retrieves information from the devices. Refer to 6.2.3 -Discovering devices on the SHDSL line on page 86 and 6.2.4 - EOC retrievedinformation on page 86.Additionally, the central 1 SHDSL device forces the remote 2 SHDSL device andany intermediary repeater to use the link alarm thresholds lineAttenuation and signal-Noise as configured on the central device in the attribute line/linkAlarmThresholds. Inother words, the settings of the lineAttenuation and signalNoise on the central deviceoverrule those of the remote device and repeaters.Refer to crocusShdsl/line/linkAlarmThresholds on page 203 for moreinformation.1. The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.2. The remote device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to remote.

86 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.2.3 Discovering devices on the SHDSL lineWhen you change the eocHandling attribute from none to any other value, the Crocus SHDSL starts "scanning"the SHDSL line in order to determine which devices are present between itself and its remote counterpart.When the scan is finished, some new objects are added to the containment tree on the samelevel as the line object:• If one or more repeaters are present on the SHDSL line, a repeater[ ] object is added for every repeater.• For the remote counterpart, an end object is added.The new objects are not added instantaneously. It can take up to 5 minutes before these objects appearin the containment tree.For example, suppose you have a link with a Crocus SHDSL as central device, a Telindus 1421 SHDSLRouter as remote device and one Crocus SHDSL Repeater in between. Suppose you set the eocHandlingattribute to discovery. In that case the one repeater[ ] object and an end object is added to the containmenttree as can be seen in the screenshot:The first discovered repeater will have id 3, the second one will have id 4, etc.6.2.4 EOC retrieved informationAs said before, exactly which information is retrieved from the remote SHDSL device(s) through the EOCchannel depends on the setting of the eocHandling attribute.This section gives an overview in which case which information is retrieved:• EOC status information, refer to EOC status information.• EOC performance information, refer to EOC performance information.• EOC alarm information, refer to EOC alarm information.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 87User manualStep-by-step configurationEOC status informationEOC status information Does the attribute or element display relevant information in case eocHandling is set to … ?ObjectcrocusShdsl/…Attribute(Element)none/passive discovery inventory info alarmConfigurationline eocAlarmThresholds(lineAttenuation, signal-Noise)No. The value isalways 0.0.• On the central 1 : yes. The values are those as set in the linkAlarmThresholdsattribute.• On the remote 2 : no. The value is always 0.0.Yes. The values arethose as set in the linkAlarmThresholdsattributeon the central device. 3numDiscoveredRepeaters Yes.repeater[ ]orendvendorId(countryCode, provider-Code, vendorSpecific)No repeater[ ] orend object is created.Yes.vendorModel No. Yes.vendorSerial No. Yes.vendorSoftVersion No. Yes.eocSoftVersion Yes.shdslVersion Yes.eocState Yes.eocAlarmThresholds(lineAttenuation, signal-Noise)No. The value is always 0.0. Yes. The values arethose as set in the linkAlarmThresholdsattributeon the remote device.Yes. The values arethose as set in the linkAlarmThresholdsattributeon the central device.repeater[ ]/linePair[ ]orend/linePair[ ]lineAttenuation No repeater[ ] orend object is created.signalNoiseNo. The value is always 0.0. Yes. The values are the actual line attenuationand signal noise as measured on the remotedevice.1. The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.2. The remote device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to remote.3. Refer to 6.2.2 - The EOC handling attribute on page 85 for more information on the alarmConfiguration value.

88 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationEOC performance informationEOC performance information Does the attribute or element display relevant information in case eocHandling is set to … ?ObjectcrocusShdsl/…Attribute none discovery inventory info alarmConfigurationrepeater[ ]/linePair[ ]orend/linePair[ ]lineParameters No repeater[ ] orend object is created.performanceh2LineParametersh2Performanceh24LineParametersNo. The value is always 0.0. Yes. The values are the same as those on theremote device.Note that in this case the sysUpTime is not theelapsed time since the last cold boot, but theelapsed time since the creation of the repeater[ ] orend object.h24Performanced7LineParametersd7Performance

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 89User manualStep-by-step configurationEOC alarm informationEOC alarm information Does the attribute or element display relevant information in case eocHandling is set to … ?ObjectcrocusShdsl/…Attribute none discovery inventory info alarmConfigurationline/linePair[ ] lineAttenuation The thresholds as configured in the linkAlarmThresholds attribute on the local devicesignalNoiseare used to generate the alarms.The thresholds as configuredin the linkAlarm-Thresholds attribute onthe central 1 device areused to generate thealarms 2 .repeater[ ]/linePair[ ]orend/linePair[ ]lineAttenuation No repeater[ ] orend object is created.signalNoiseNo alarms are generated. The thresholds as configuredin the linkAlarm-Thresholds attribute onthe local device areused to generate thealarms.The thresholds as configuredin the linkAlarm-Thresholds attribute onthe central device areused to generate thealarms.errSecExceeded The thresholds as configuredin the linkAlarmsevErrSecExceededThresholds attribute onthe local device areused to generate thealarms.1. The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.2. Refer to 6.2.2 - The EOC handling attribute on page 85 for more information on the alarmConfiguration value.

90 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.3 Configuring the timing modecrocusShdsl/line/timingModeUse the timingMode attribute to set the timing mode.The Crocus SHDSL has two clock sources:• one takes care of the clocking on the SHDSL line.• one takes care of the clocking on the modular user interface.Using the timingMode attribute you can define whether these two clocks run independent from each other(i.e. plesiochronous mode) or whether they are "coupled" with each other (i.e. synchronous mode).The timingMode attribute has the following values:Default:plesiochronousRange: synchronous / plesiochronousValueplesiochronoussynchronousDescriptionIn this mode each SHDSL frame has 0 or 4 stuffing bits to compensate clock deviationstowards the user interface clock. In this mode, all possible clocking modescan be selected.In this mode the SHDSL frame does not have stuffing bits to compensate clockdeviations towards the user interface clock. In this case only internal and slavereceive clocking is allowed. What is more, internal clocking is only allowed at oneside of the link (e.g. the central side) and slave receive clocking at the other side(e.g. the remote side).Synchronous mode is the typical timing mode in DSLAM set-ups.• In case of a G703 Nx64k interface, if you set the framing attribute to framed, then the Crocus SHDSLalways operates in plesiochronous mode regardless of the setting of the timingMode attribute.• You always have to work in the same timing mode at both sides of the link. In other words:- central: synchronous - remote: synchronous → allowed- central: plesiochronous - remote: plesiochronous → allowed- central: synchronous - remote: plesiochronous or vice versa → not allowed• For compatibility with other SHDSL devices, setting this attribute to the correct value might be essential.Refer to 6.17 - Crocus SHDSL compatibility with other SHDSL devices on page 179.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 91User manualStep-by-step configuration6.4 Clocking of Crocus devices to access PDH and SDH networksThis section explains the principles of network clocking and is a guideline for configuring the CrocusSHDSL to interface to the carrier networks.A good knowledge and understanding about clocking mechanisms is essential to correctly build errorfree synchronous networks, connecting end users to PDH and SDH infrastructures.As this section gives a general explanation about clocking, section 6.5 - Configuring the clocking modeon page 108 actually describes how to configure the clocking mode on the Crocus SHDSL.The following gives an overview of this section:• 6.4.1 - Introduction on page 92• 6.4.2 - Network clocking principles on page 93• 6.4.3 - The Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) networks on page 94• 6.4.4 - The Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) networks on page 96• 6.4.5 - Access to PDH networks on page 99• 6.4.6 - Access to SDH networks on page 102• 6.4.7 - Synchronous interfaces on page 106

92 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.4.1 IntroductionSince transmission and switching in carrier networks has become digital, network synchronisation hasan increasing importance in telecommunications.Basically there was no need for network synchronisation to interconnect analogue switching machinesover digital transport networks. Transmission equipment based on the Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy(PDH) must not be synchronised, it allows multiplexing of asynchronous channels with substantial frequencyoffsets using the bit justification technique.When digital switching machines such as ISDN exchanges and cross-connect switches were introduced,problems arose with asynchronous architectures as PDH because digital switching equipment requiresto be synchronised in order to avoid slips. By the introduction of the circuit switched data networks, therewas a need of more stringent synchronisation requirements.In the ‘90s, the ongoing spreading of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) technology in transmissionnetworks has created a need for adequate network synchronisation facilities. For this reason, networkoperators have set up synchronisation networks.In this section, clocking principles for access to and data transfer over PDH and SDH transmission networksare explained.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 93User manualStep-by-step configuration6.4.2 Network clocking principlesCentral clockTo guarantee good synchronisation in digital networks, all network elements are synchronised to a central2.048 kHz clock with long term accuracy. This central clock is generated by a high precision PrimaryReference Clock (PRC) with an accuracy of 1x10-11 or better with verification to Coordinated UniversalTime (UTC) as specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.811.A PRC can be realised as an autonomous clock or can be controlled by UTC-derived precision signalsreceived from a radio or satellite system (GPS).Hierarchical structureTo distribute this clock through the network, a hierarchical structure is defined in ITU-T standards G.812& G.813. Refer to the following figure:The PRC is transported via the clock network to the slave units. This clock signal is regenerated in theSSUs and SECs with the aid of phase-locked loops (PLLs). If the clock supply fails, the slave unit appliesthe stored frequency correction to keep a relatively accurate clock signal.The clock signal paths through the network can be the same as those used for the data transport.Station clockModern synchronisation networks are based on the concept of a building clock, this is a slave clock unitas the SSUs and SECs, that supplies timing to all the equipment deployed in that location, including digitalexchanges, cross-connects, terminal equipment and multiplexers. This clock signal is what we callstation clock.

94 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.4.3 The Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) networksAsynchronous tributariesPDH systems allow multiplexing of asynchronous tributaries with substantial frequency offsets based onbit justification. Therefore PDH networks do not need to be synchronised. Every equipment clock is independentfrom the others, but their frequencies are kept close to the nominal values within a specifiedtolerance (for example: +/- 50 ppm at 2 Mbit/s).PDH systems are transparent to the timing content of the transported digital signals. This means that,despite the fact that the multiplexer clocks are independent, the transported signal keeps its frequency,only gathering some jitter due to transmission lines and justification. The bit justification technique allowsto transfer the timing content of a digital signal across a transmission chain where clocks are asynchronous,as shown in the figure below.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 95User manualStep-by-step configurationTimingBecause E1 signals coming from PCM multiplexers or cross connect switches need to be synchronisedto avoid slips, this equipment is enslaved to a master clock, delivered by a Primary Reference Clock(PRC) via the clock synchronisation network. The synchronous E1 signals are multiplexed into asynchronousE2 and further on in E3 and E4 signals. E2, E3 and E4 are asynchronous multiplex signalswith the 2M timing signal embedded. This allows transferring 2 Mbps timing across PDH networks to synchroniseclocks located in far locations.GatewaysBy the introduction of the PDH infrastructure, two different multiplex stages were defined: one based ona primary rate of 2 Mbit/s and one based on 1,5 Mbit/s as used in North America and Japan. Gatewaysbetween these networks were very difficult and expensive to realize.DisadvantagesInherent to plesiochronous transport is the generation of important jitter and wander at the tributary interfaces.Another disadvantage of PDH is that, once multiplexed, there is no simple way to extract an E1 bearerwithout fully demultiplexing down from the E4 level towards E1, requiring a complete hierarchy of multiplexers.

96 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.4.4 The Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) networksSDH hierarchyTo eliminate the disadvantages of the PDH infrastructure, the SDH hierarchy was developed, bringingthe following advantages:• high transmission rates, up to 10 Gbit/s over fiber optic links• more efficient and flexible add & drop function• high availability, reliability and robustness• multi-service platform: able to handle PSTN, ISDN, Frame Relay, ATM, IP, etc.• interfaces are globally standardized, easier to interconnect carriersThe basic SDH frame is called a Synchronous Transport Module (STM-N), in which heterogeneousasynchronous and synchronous tributary channels as PDH and ATM can be mapped. Frame speedscan be between 52 Mbit/s and 10 Gbit/s.The basic package unit for tributary channels is the container C-n. For each PDH speed a special containeris provided. These containers are much larger than the payload to be transported, the remainingcapacity is used for justification.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 97User manualStep-by-step configurationNetwork elementsCurrent SDH networks are build with four different types of network elements:• regenerators: regenerate the clock and amplitude relationships of the incoming data signals.• terminal multiplexers: combine asynchronous and synchronous input signals into higher bit rate STM-N signals.• add & drop multiplexers: asynchronous and lower speed synchronous signals can be extracted fromor inserted into higher speed SDH bitstreams.• digital cross-connects (DXC): allows mapping of PDH channels in SDH virtual containers as well asswitching of various containers.

98 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationSynchronisationIn networks using SDH transport infrastructure, not only primary rate multiplexers and switching equipmentare synchronized, but also the nodes of the SDH transport network, limiting jitter and wander generationat the interfaces.Redundant ring structuresSDH infrastructures typically are hybrid communication networks, build in redundant ring structures withvarious asynchronous and synchronous tributaries as in the example below.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 99User manualStep-by-step configuration6.4.5 Access to PDH networksSynchronisation on the same clockAs the 2 Mbps and Nx64 Kbps signals in the PDH networks are synchronized on the 2.048 kHz PrimaryReference Clock, also all access devices must be synchronized on the same clock. This can be done byapplying the network clock to the “station clock” input of the devices or by operating in “external clock”.Therefore these interfaces are synchronous, allowing transporting clock from one device to another.Clock signals can be transferred separately from the data signals (e.g. station clock) or can be encodedin the data, as done in the G.703 interfaces which are typically used to connect to PDH/SDH infrastructures.

100 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationAccessing PDH networks - examples• Example 1: typical Nx64 Kbps connectionsTypical Nx64 Kbps connections to a PDH infrastructure are shown below. As the backbone imposes theclock, the equipment connected to the network necessarily operates in external or station clock, the endpoints in slave receive. In external clock, the modem clock is derived from the incoming G.703 signal, incase of station clock, the clock signal is transferred separately.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 101User manualStep-by-step configuration• Example 2: accessing PDH networks using a Crocus SHDSL QUAD DXCThe Crocus SHDSL QUAD DXC is perfectly suitable to be used in PDH environment as it can use thestation clock or can slave on one of the four E1 interfaces. The most convenient configuration is to usethe station clock as master and fallback to the E1 interfaces if the station clock fails.If no station clock is available, the QUAD has to search for a clock on the E1 interfaces as shown in thenext picture.

102 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.4.6 Access to SDH networksAsynchronous or synchronousChannel inputs on Add & Drop Multiplexers in SDH networks can be asynchronous or synchronous. Themost common way to connect PDH tributaries to ADMs is asynchronous, also for the 2.048 Kbps signals,without giving a clock at his interfaces. This implicates that, when we interconnect two end-users over aSDH backbone, the clock must be generated by other means. This can be the station clock, derived fromthe PRC, or an internal clock generator from one of the transmission devices, such as modems, or bythe end user application. This clock generator must operate within the required specifications regardingaccuracy and stability, for example +/- 50 ppm at 2.048 Kbps.Typical 2 Mbit/s connectionsSome typical 2 Mbit/s connections to a SDH infrastructure are shown below. It is clear that the clock configurationat the end-points depends on the type of used interfaces and the end-user equipment.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 103User manualStep-by-step configurationModems with integrated cross-connect functionalitiesSpecial attention must be paid in case modems with integrated cross-connect functionalities are used.As a DXC supports only one clock to synchronize all ports, all modems connected to the DXC must usethis same clock. In this case the use of the station clock is strongly advised. Refer to the figure below foran example.

104 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationAccessing SDH networks - examplesBelow some examples of topologies to access SDH networks are given, using different types of accessequipment. To keep the drawings orderly, the ADM symbols are skipped. It must be clear that thesedrawings are just some examples and do not exclude many other clock configurations and combinationsin access topologies.• Example 1: accessing SDH networks using the Crocus SHDSL QUAD DXCWhen using the Crocus SHDSL QUAD DXC, only one clock can be used by all interfaces of this card.As shown below, this clock can be the station clock or the internal clock. All end-to-end connections runningover the QUAD are slaved on this clock:- Using the station clock:- Using the internal clock:As in an SDH network the connections are made to an ADM and not to a DXC, clock slaving on the E1ports of the SHDSL QUAD is not recommended and this also means that end-user equipment shouldnot generate the clock.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 105User manualStep-by-step configuration• Example 2: accessing SDH networks using a Crocus SHDSL CV or Telindus 2300In case a Crocus SHDSL CV or Telindus 2300 is installed, each interface may have an independentclocking, allowing end-user equipment to generate the clock.- Using a Crocus SHDSL CV:- Using a Telindus 2300:

106 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.4.7 Synchronous interfacesData transferOn a synchronous interface, data transfer between DTE and DCE is done at the rhythm of a clock signal.This timing signal is used to sample the transmit data in the transmitter of the DCE. The transmitter alsouses this timing signal to modulate his carrier in case of a voice band modem or to encode the data incase of a baseband modem. This means that the clock frequency of the transmit clock is transported bythe line signal to the remote end. The transport of the synchronous user data over the link can be synchronousor plesiochronous.In the receiver at the remote end, the line signal is demodulated or decoded and receive clock is derivedfrom the received line signal. By doing this, the receive clock has the same frequency as the transmitclock at the other side of the link. In this way the transmitter at one side and the receiver at the other sideof the link are perfectly synchronized.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 107User manualStep-by-step configurationExchange of clock signalsThe way clock signals are exchanged between DTE and DCE depends on the type of interface:• V24, V35, V36, RS530, HSSI: these interfaces have separated clock signals to synchronize transmit(TxClk or ExClk) and receive (RxClk) data:• X21 interface uses only one clock signal (S or X) to synchronize both transmit and receive data:• G703 interface uses codirectional timing, this means that clock information is encoded in the data signal:

108 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5 Configuring the clocking modeThis section explains how to configure the clocking mode on the Crocus SHDSL. It also explains howthe auto clocking mechanism works. The following gives an overview of this section.• 6.5.1 - The clocking attribute on page 109• 6.5.2 - Fixed clocking modes on page 110• 6.5.3 - Preferred and alternative clocking on page 111• 6.5.4 - Schematic overview of the different clocking modes for V.xx and RS530 type of interfaces onpage 112• 6.5.5 - Schematic overview of the different clocking modes for X21 type of interfaces on page 114• 6.5.6 - Schematic overview of the different clocking modes for G703 type of interfaces on page 115• 6.5.7 - Possible clocking modes versus DTE interface on page 118• 6.5.8 - Special points of interest concerning clocking on some interfaces on page 119• 6.5.9 - Clocking decision sequences on the Crocus SHDSL on page 121• 6.5.10 - The presence of the external clock signalon the Crocus SHDSL on page 123• 6.5.11 - Auto-sensingon the Crocus SHDSL on page 124• 6.5.12 - Auto clocking for RS530, V35 and V36 interfaces on page 125• 6.5.13 - Auto clocking for Bridge and Router interfaces on page 127• 6.5.14 - Auto clocking for the X21 interface on page 128• 6.5.15 - Some examples of auto clocking on page 130

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 109User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.1 The clocking attributeThe location of the clocking attribute in the Crocus SHDSL containment tree is:crocusShdsl//clockingDefault:Range: enumerated, see belowUse the clocking attribute to select a clocking mode. The available clockingmodes depend on which DTE interface is used. Also the default clocking mode is interface dependent.All possible clocking modes and their exact notation (important if you work with CLI!) are given in thetable of 6.5.7 - Possible clocking modes versus DTE interface on page 118.Use the transmitSampleClock attribute to invert the transmit sample clock. Refer to 6.5.3 - Preferred andalternative clocking on page 111 and crocusShdsl//transmitSampleClock on page 216 formore information.

110 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.2 Fixed clocking modesThis section explains the fixed clocking modes. The following table gives an overview:Clocking modeinternalslave receiveexternalexternal loopbackstationDescriptionThe DCE generates the transmit clock signal and sends it to the application via theTxClk circuit (circuit 114).Internal clocking can be selected in combination with preferred or alternative clocking.This is explained in the following section.The DCE ‘s transmit clock signal is derived from the received line data. This reconstructedclock signal is sent to the application via the TxClk circuit (circuit 114).Slave receive clocking can be selected in combination with preferred or alternativeclocking. This is explained in the following section.The application generates the transmit clock signal and sends it to the DCE via theExtTxClk circuit (circuit 113).The receive clock signal RxClk is the same as the external transmit clock signalExtTxClk.To synchronize the receive data RxD on the ExtClk, retiming of the RxDis required.The external and external loop-back differenceThe following explains the difference between external and external loop-backclocking mode:• external clocking mode: the receive data is sampled by the DTE with the RxClksignal. In this case, the RxClk does not have to be in phase with the ExtTxClksignal (i.e. no re-timing required on the receive data).• external loop-back clocking mode: the receive data is sampled by the DTE withthe ExtTxClk signal. In this case, the RxClk signal has to be in phase with theExtTxClk signal (i.e. re-timing on the receive data).RemarkStation clocking can only be selected when you use a Crocus SHDSL CV with aG703 interface.The station clock signal is applied to a connector located on the back of the CN4card nest or to a DSL concentrator. This clock signal is then routed to the CrocusSHDSL via the backplane of the nest. The Crocus SHDSL then uses the stationclock as transmit clock.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 111User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.3 Preferred and alternative clockingInternal and slave receive clocking can be selected in combination with preferred or alternative clocking:Clocking modepreferredalternativeDescriptionThe application (DTE) loops back the incoming TxClk to the ExtClk output. Thisguarantees an optimal phase relationship between the transmitted data and thetransmitted clock. This because the transmission delays of both signals are exactlythe same.The application does not loop back the clock, the TxClk is sent directly to transmitterwithin the DCE. In this case there is always a delay between the transmitteddata and the transmit clock.RemarkIn case you select the alternative clocking mode, be aware that the transmissiondelays over the interface cables between the TxD and TxClk circuits can becomesignificant. Especially at high speeds the cable length to interconnect devicesbecomes critical. As a result TxClk and TxD can become out of phase at the transmitteras shown in the picture below, which results in errors when sampling thedata. In case TxD and TxClk are out of phase, you can try to adjust this by invertingthe transmit sample clock using the transmitSampleClock attribute in the configurationparameters.Important remarks:The switch-over time between alternative and preferred clocking is about 100ms.

112 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.4 Schematic overview of the different clocking modes for V.xx and RS530type of interfacesAs this group of interfaces use separate clock signals to synchronize transmit and receive data allowingslight differences in speed between both clock signals, multiple clock configurations are available toadapt to any user application or network topology.The transmit clock on these interfaces can be selected between internal and slave receive clocking inboth alternative or preferred mode, external, external loopback and auto clocking. The figures belowshow the relationships between clock and data in the different configurations, and the possible configurationsin TMA:

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 113User manualStep-by-step configurationThe figure below shows the possible configurations in TMA:

114 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.5 Schematic overview of the different clocking modes for X21 type of interfacesX21 recommendationThe X21 recommendation (1988) defines the interface between DCE and DTE equipment for synchronousoperation on Public Data Networks (PDN). This is a well-defined topology were only external andslave receive clocking modes are required and in which the number of control signals is also limited. Itis typically a connection to a PDH infrastructure.Some points of interest:• On this interface, only one clock signal is used to synchronize both transmit and receive data,demanding that there is only one clock in the transmission system.• The X21 recommendation defines a call procedure and refers to X24 for the definition of the interfacecircuits and to X26 (=V10) and X27 (=V11) for the electrical characteristics of the interface circuits.• Today the X21 interface is commonly used as a symmetrical interface without the X21 call procedure.In that case, in general, the standards X24 and X27 are applied.The figures below show the relationships between clock and data in the different configurations:

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 115User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.6 Schematic overview of the different clocking modes for G703 type ofinterfacesOne encoded signalAs G703 interfaces are codirectional interfaces, they transport both data and clock in the same encodedsignal. On this way they can transport clock information from a higher network level to a lower networklevel in the digital hierarchy. For this reason, the default configuration of G703 interfaces is externalclock.G703 interfaces are typically used to give access to carrier backbones and to interconnect backboneequipment such as cross-connect switches (DXC), TDM multiplexers and PABXs in PDH infrastructures.In these networks, only one master clock is allowed to synchronize all devices at the E1 level (2.048kbps).Crocus SHDSL TT vs. Crocus SHDSL CVOn a Crocus table-top modem, the G703 interface can be configured for internal or external clock operation.A card version modem also supports the use of a station clock that can be applied via the backplaneof the cardnest. When station clock is selected, also a backup clock can be provided in case thestation clock is not present.Clock functionalitiesDepending on the type of equipment, the clock functionalities can differ: when multiple modems and multipleinterfaces are available on the same device, there is a main difference in clock functionalitiesdepending on the fact of a DXC feature is present or not.If no DXC is present, the clocking on all interfaces is independent and so we may have different clockingon each interface (Crocus SHDSL TWIN, Telindus 2300). In case a DXC is present only one clock isallowed for all interfaces (Crocus SHDSL QUAD DXC).

116 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationCrocus SHDSL TTThe figures below show the relationships between clock and data in the different configurations for theCrocus SHDSL TT:The figure below show the possible configurations in TMA:

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 117User manualStep-by-step configurationCrocus SHDSL CVThe figures below show the relationships between clock and data in the different configurations for theCrocus SHDSL CV:The figure below show the possible configurations in TMA:

118 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.7 Possible clocking modes versus DTE interfaceThe following table gives an overview of the clocking modes which are available on the different CrocusSHDSL devices:DeviceINTINT ALTINT PREFSLV RCVSLV RCV ALTSLV RCV PREFEXTEXT LOOPBACKLINESTATIONAUTOCrocus SHDSL TTVxx/RS530/X21 X X X X X X XG703 X XDUAL PORT X XROUTER X XCrocus SHDSL TWIN CVVxx/RS530/X21 X X X X X X XG703 X X XDUAL PORT X X XROUTER X X XCrocus SHDSL TT G703 X XCrocus SHDSL TT RS530 X X X X X X XCrocus SHDSL QUAD CVDXCTelindus 2300 2X X X XX 11. EXT on the Crocus SHDSL QUAD CV DXC means that the modem can be slaved on one ofthe E1 interfaces2. Clocking parameters on the Telindus 2300 refers to the receive clocking, refer to the Telindus2300 manual for more information

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 119User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.8 Special points of interest concerning clocking on some interfacesThis section gives a few special points of interest concerning clocking on some interfaces.X21 interface clockingFor the X21 interface the special points of interest are:Special point ofinterestone clockexternal clockingexternal loopbackDescriptionAs this interface only uses one clock to synchronize both TxD and Rxd, only oneclock is allowed in a link.When connecting X21 interfaces back-to-back in external clocking mode, thereceive data signal R is sent to the DTE with the S clock, independently of the Xclock.S and X clockNormal X.21 operation only provides the S clock (DCE originated), which is usedfor both transmit and receive clocking. Therefore, the normal clock configurationwould be internal alternative at one side, and slave receive alternative at theother.If the X clock circuit is present, external clocking is also possible. In thatcase, the S clock is only used to clock out the receive data.External loop-backMany applications on X.21 deny the S clock signal and sample the receive datawith their X clock. However, in case the S and X clock are not in phase, bit errorsmay occur. This is especially so when there is some jitter on the receive data signal.To solve this problem you can use the external loop-back clocking mode. Inthis clocking mode the receive clock is the same as the external transmit clock.RemarkA set-up using external loop-back clocking can only work when the remote CrocusSHDSL is in slave receive clocking mode.ignoring the Xclockextended X21linkIn case you have a set-up in which you do not use the X clock and if you want toavoid that the (possible) presence of an X clock signal negatively influences theclocking, then you can choose to ignore the X clock signal completely. Do this bysetting the xSignal attribute to ignore (refer to 7.6.2 - X21 interface configurationattributes on page 217).When connecting two X21 interfaces back-to-back for an extended X21 link, usethe external clocking mode. In that case, the receive data is sent to the DTE withthe S clock, independently of the X clock.

120 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationG703 interface clockingIn internal clocking mode it is the Crocus SHDSL who generates the reference clock signal to samplethe receive data. In station clocking mode the station clock on the CN4 card nest is used as referenceclock.Both internal and station clocking mode imply that the applications on both sides of the link should be inslave receive clocking mode. In other words, there can be only one master clock in a G703 system.Dual Port G703-Serial interface clockingThe available clocking modes on the Dual Port G703-Serial interface are actually those of the G703interface (internal, external and station). The serial interface always slaves on the clock of the G703interface. The only clocking modes that you can select on the serial interface are preferred or alternativeclocking.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 121User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.9 Clocking decision sequences on the Crocus SHDSLThis section gives an introduction to clocking decision sequences on the Crocus SHDSL.Clocking decision sequencesClocking decisions are not only made in auto clocking mode, but also in fixed clocking mode. Forinstance when the Crocus SHDSL is configured in external clocking mode and the external clock signalis lost, then the Crocus SHDSL decides to go to internal alternative clocking mode in order to continueoperation.

122 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationWhich factors influence the clocking decision sequence?The following table lists all the factors that influence the clocking decision sequence. They are listed fromthe highest to the lowest priority.PriorityInfluencing factor1 Initiation of a testDepending on which type of diagnostic test is started, the Crocus SHDSL selects a newclocking mode in order to continue correct operation.2 The local / remote interface combinationNot only the local, but also the remote interface type has an impact on the clocking decisionsequence. Especially X21 and G703 interfaces require special attention, becausethey have limited clocking possibilities.3 The local configured clocking modeThe clocking mode that you configure is not necessarily the clocking mode that will beused.E.g. if you configured the Crocus SHDSL in internal preferred clocking mode, but no clocksignal is detected on the ExtTxClk pin of the interface, then the Crocus SHDSL will selectinternal alternative clocking mode.The actual remote clocking modeThis information in combination with the remote interface type information as describedunder priority 2 has a certain impact on the clocking mode that will actually be chosen bythe Crocus SHDSL.4b 1The presence of an external clock signalThe presence or absence of the external clock signal also plays its role in the clockingdecision sequence.4c 1For X21: the master / slave selection and remote auto or fixed clocking mode4a 15 The line synchronisationSome applications require that a clock signal is always present on the RxClk circuit. If aCrocus SHDSL is in slave receive clocking mode and the local and remote CrocusSHDSL are not synchronised, then the RxClk is derived …·• from the ExtTxClk in case an external clock signal is detected·or• from a clock signal generated internally in the Crocus SHDSL.1. These three items are on the same priority level.This information is useful when both local and remote Crocus SHDSL are equipped withan X21 interface. If both X21 interfaces are in auto clocking mode, one has to act as masterand the other as slave in the clocking decision sequence. They mutually decide whowill be the master and who the slave.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 123User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.10 The presence of the external clock signalon the Crocus SHDSLThe presence or absence of an external clock signal may influence the clocking mode that is actuallychosen by the Crocus SHDSL. This section explains how.All interfaces supporting the external clock signal, regularly check the presence of this external clock signal.The following table clarifies what happens when no external clock signal is present or when it is lost:If the CrocusSHDSL is configuredin …a preferredclocking mode,external, externalloop-back orstation clockingmode,and if the external clock signal is not present or if it is lost,then the Crocus SHDSL automatically switches to alternative clocking mode.If at a certain moment the external clock signal (re)appears, the Crocus SHDSLswitches (back) to the preferred clocking mode.then the Crocus SHDSL automatically switches to internal alternative clockingmode.If at a certain moment the external clock signal (re)appears, the Crocus SHDSLswitches (back) to external, external loop-back or station clocking mode.

124 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.11 Auto-sensingon the Crocus SHDSLThis section explains what auto-sensing is.What is auto-sensing?Auto-sensing is a part of the clocking decision process. As already explained in 6.5.9 - Clocking decisionsequences on the Crocus SHDSL on page 121 and 6.5.10 - The presence of the external clock signalonthe Crocus SHDSL on page 123, the presence of an external clock signal has an impact on the clockingdecision sequence. This is shown in the following table:If the externalclock signal …is present,is not present,then the Crocus SHDSL selects …external clocking mode.In this case, the auto clock selection sequence ends here.internal or slave receive clocking mode. In this case, the auto clock selectionsequence continues:• If the external clock signal appears (i.e. the DTE loops back the clock signal tothe ExtTxClk pin of the interface), then the Crocus SHDSL selects internal orslave receive preferred clocking mode.• If the external clock signal does not appear(i.e. the DTE does not loop back theclock signal to the ExtTxClk pin of the interface), then the Crocus SHDSLselects internal or slave receive alternative clocking mode.RemarkThe selection between internal or slave receive clocking mode depends on theremote interface type / remote clocking combination.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 125User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.12 Auto clocking for RS530, V35 and V36 interfacesIn case of auto clocking, initially the Crocus SHDSL selects a clocking mode depending on the interfaceand clocking mode used by the remote Crocus SHDSL. After that also other factors may influence theclocking decision sequence as explained in 6.5.9 - Clocking decision sequences on the Crocus SHDSLon page 121.This section explains the auto clocking decision for a local RS530, V35 and V36 interface in function ofthe remote interface and clocking mode.Remote interfaceRemote clockingmodeClocking mode selected by the local Crocus SHDSLG703 internal • slave receive preferredstation• slave receive alternativeThe decision between these clocking modes is made by theauto-sensing mechanism. Refer to 6.5.11 - Auto-sensingon theCrocus SHDSL on page 124external • external• slave receive preferred• slave receive alternativeX21 internal • externalexternal • slave receive preferred• slave receive alternativeThe decision between these clocking modes is made by theauto-sensing mechanism. Refer to 6.5.11 - Auto-sensingon theCrocus SHDSL on page 124The decision between these clocking modes is made by theauto-sensing mechanism. Refer to 6.5.11 - Auto-sensingon theCrocus SHDSL on page 124RemarkThe combination X21 + internal clock and RS530, V35 or V36+ external clock is not advisable because in X21 systems onlyone clock source may be present. However, the local CrocusSHDSL selects this external clocking mode to indicate that theapplication generates a clock signal.slave receive • external loop-back• internal preferred• internal alternativeThe decision between these clocking modes is made by theauto-sensing mechanism. Refer to 6.5.11 - Auto-sensingon theCrocus SHDSL on page 124

126 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationRemote interfaceRemote clockingmodeClocking mode selected by the local Crocus SHDSLother any • external• external loop-back(in case the remote interface is in slave receive clockingmode)• internal preferred• internal alternativeThe decision between these clocking modes is made by theauto-sensing mechanism. Refer to 6.5.11 - Auto-sensingon theCrocus SHDSL on page 124

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 127User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.13 Auto clocking for Bridge and Router interfacesIn case of auto clocking, initially the Crocus SHDSL selects a clocking mode depending on the interfaceand clocking mode used by the remote Crocus SHDSL. After that also other factors may influence theclocking decision sequence as explained in 6.5.9 - Clocking decision sequences on the Crocus SHDSLon page 121.This section explains the auto clocking decision for a local Bridge and Router interfaces in function ofthe remote interface and clocking mode.Remote interfaceRemote clockingmodeClocking mode selected by the local Crocus SHDSLG703 any slave receiveX21 any slave receiveother any internal

128 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.14 Auto clocking for the X21 interfaceIn case of auto clocking, initially the Crocus SHDSL selects a clocking mode depending on the interfaceand clocking mode used by the remote Crocus SHDSL. After that also other factors may influence theclocking decision sequence as explained in 6.5.9 - Clocking decision sequences on the Crocus SHDSLon page 121.This section explains the auto clocking decision for a local X21 interface in function of the remote interfaceand clocking mode.Local interface: X21 - remote interface: X21When both local and remote Crocus SHDSL are equipped with an X21 interface and at least one of themis in auto clocking mode, then one interface is chosen as master and the other as slave:• If only one X21 interface is in auto clocking mode, then this interface is the master.• If both X21 interfaces are in auto clocking mode, they mutually decide who will be the master andwho the slave.First the auto clocking decision of the X21 master is explained, then that of the X21 slave.X21 masterExternal clocksignal present?Remote clockingmodeClocking mode selected by the local Crocus SHDSLyes slave receive external loop-backanything elseexternalno slave receive • internal preferred• internal alternativeThe decision between these clocking modes is made by theauto-sensing mechanism. 6.5.11 - Auto-sensingon the CrocusSHDSL on page 124.internal or external• slave receive preferred• slave receive alternativeThe decision between these clocking modes is made by theauto-sensing mechanism. 6.5.11 - Auto-sensingon the CrocusSHDSL on page 124

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 129User manualStep-by-step configurationX21 slaveIs the remote clockingmode fixed slave receive?Clocking mode selected by the local Crocus SHDSLyes • external loop-back• internal preferred• internal alternativeno • external• external loop-back• slave receive preferred• slave receive alternativeThe decision between these clocking modes is made by the autosensingmechanism. Refer to 6.5.11 - Auto-sensingon the CrocusSHDSL on page 124.The decision between these clocking modes is made by the autosensingmechanism. Refer to 6.5.11 - Auto-sensingon the CrocusSHDSL on page 124.

130 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.5.15 Some examples of auto clockingThis section gives some examples of decision sequences made by the Crocus SHDSL when it is configuredin auto clocking mode.The following figures and corresponding text display the auto clocking decision. Normally only the clockingdecision of the local Crocus SHDSL is described, unless the decision of the remote Crocus SHDSLhas an impact on the decision of the local Crocus SHDSL. In that case, both auto clocking decisionsequences are given.Auto clocking example: V35 and auto clocking - V35 and auto clocking

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 131User manualStep-by-step configurationAuto clocking example: X21 and auto clocking - X21 and auto clockingWhen both local and remote Crocus SHDSL are equipped with an X21 interface and when both are configuredfor auto clocking mode, they mutually decide who will be the auto clocking master and who theslave.

132 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.6 Configuring the user speedThis section explains how to configure the user speed. It also explains how the auto speed mechanismworks. The following gives an overview of this section:• 6.6.1 - The speed attribute on page 133• 6.6.2 - Using odd speeds on the Crocus SHDSL 2P when using serial interfaces on page 134• 6.6.3 - How does the auto speed mode work? on page 135• 6.6.4 - Clocking and speed combinations on page 136In case of a G703 interface, skip this section and go to 6.8 - Configuring framing and time slots onpage 143 for the time slot configuration.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 133User manualStep-by-step configuration6.6.1 The speed attributeThe location of the speed attribute in the Crocus SHDSL containment tree is:crocusShdsl//speedDefault:autoRange: enumerated, see belowUse the speed attribute to select a user speed. The user speeds can be seteither to a fixed speed or to auto speed. The user speed ranges from 64 kbps up to 2304 kbps in stepsof 64 kbps.The exact notation of the user speed (important if you work with CLI) is: kbps. For example64kbps, 2048kbps, 2304kbps, …crocusShdsl//speed2PThis attribute is only present on a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version.Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowUse the speed2P attribute to select a user speed in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (if it is truly in 2 pair operation,see below). The user speeds can be set either to a fixed speed or to auto speed. The user speedranges from 128 kbps up to 4096 kbps in steps of 128 kbps.In case of the serial interfaces, it is possible to select the user speed in steps of 64 kbps or 128 kbps.Refer to 6.6.2 - Using odd speeds on the Crocus SHDSL 2P when using serial interfaces on page 134.The exact notation of the user speed (important if you work with CLI) is: kbps. For example128kbps, 1024kbps, 4608kbps, …When you change the line/mode attribute, then make sure that you use the correct speed attribute to setthe user speed:If the mode attribute is set to …singlePair,dualPair,then use the attribute …speed to configure the user speed.speed2P to configure the user speed.Important remark• In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version, set the speed2P attribute of either the central or remoteCrocus SHDSL to auto, but not of both. Else the 2 line pairs could train at a different speed which isnot allowed.• In case you use a G703 interface in one Crocus SHDSL and a serial interface in the other CrocusSHDSL, then the auto speed only works when more than 2 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 1pair version) or 4 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version) are selected.• If both the central 1 and remote 2 Crocus SHDSL are configured in external clocking mode and anexternal clock signal is present, then it is the central Crocus SHDSL modem who determines thespeed on which the line trains.1. The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.2. The remote device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to remote.

134 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.6.2 Using odd speeds on the Crocus SHDSL 2P when using serial interfacesWhen using serial interfaces (RS530, V35, V36 X21) in the Crocus SHDSL 2P, odd speeds can be used.With PCB version 1.2 and lower, the user speed could only be adjusted in steps of 128 kbps. As of PCBversion 2.0, user speeds between 64kbps and 2048 kbps can be selected in steps of 64kbps; onceabove 2048 kbps, steps of 128 kbps are possible. All speeds that are a variation of 64 kbps (so 32 kbpsper line pair) are called odd speeds. Refer to the following table:PCB versionPossible user speed …1.2 and lower can vary between 128 kbps and 4096 kbps in steps of 128kbps.As of 2.0can vary between 64 kbps and 4096 kbps, in steps of:• 64 kbps up to 2048 kbps• 128 kbps from 2176 kbps up to 4608 kbpsRefer to 6.6.1 - The speed attribute on page 133 for more information about the speed2P attribute.Important remarks• When using odd speeds, the interface works in slotted E1 mode. This means that only one clocksource is allowed. If more than one clock source is available, communication will fail.• The line speed will always be a multiple of 128 kbps. The following example illustrates this:When a user speed of 192 kbps is selected, 3 timeslots with data will have to be sent over the line.One timeslot with dummy data will be sent together with the three data timeslots. This results in a linespeed of 256 kbps (multiple of 128 kbps).• When using auto speed on one of two interfaces, the resulting line speed will always be a multiple of128 kbps.The following example illustrates this:- central modem: user speed = 320 kbps (5 timeslots)- remote modem: user speed = auto speed;This results in 5 timeslots of 64 kbps and one dummy timeslot. So the resulting line speed will be 384kbps (multiple of 128 kbps).When a line speed of 320 kbps is required, the user must set the speed to 320 kbps manually on theremote side.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 135User manualStep-by-step configuration6.6.3 How does the auto speed mode work?The following table explains how the auto speed mode works:If the Crocus SHDSL is configuredin …external clocking mode andan external clock signal ispresent,any other clocking mode,then the Crocus SHDSL…measures the frequency of the external clock signal and automaticallyadapts the user speed.The user speed (and ditto external clock) can range from 64 kbps upto 2304 kbps in steps of 64 kbps.adopts the speed as selected on the remote Crocus SHDSL.When both local and remote Crocus SHDSL are configured in autospeed mode, the user speed is set to the maximum common userspeed on both sides.Special case - G703In case the interface used in the remote Crocus SHDSL is a G703interface configured in …• framed mode, then the user speed is calculated as the sum of theselected G.704 time slots.• unframed (transparent) mode, then the user speed is set to 2Mbps.Important remark• In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version, set the speed2P attribute of either the central or remoteCrocus SHDSL to auto, but not of both. Else the 2 line pairs could train at a different speed which isnot allowed.• In case you use a G703 interface in one Crocus SHDSL and a serial interface is the other CrocusSHDSL, then the auto speed only works when more than 2 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 1pair version) or 4 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version) are selected.• If both the central 1 and remote 2 Crocus SHDSL are configured in external clocking mode and anexternal clock signal is present, then it is the central Crocus SHDSL modem who determines thespeed on which the line trains.1. The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.2. The remote device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to remote.

136 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.6.4 Clocking and speed combinationsThe following table shows which user speed the local Crocus SHDSL will adopt when it is set to autospeed and this in function of the local clocking and remote user speed and clocking combination.Remote Crocus SHDSL(speed / clock)Local CrocusSHDSLauto / externalauto / internal orslave receivefixed / externalfixed / internal orslave receive(speed / clock)auto / externalThe local userspeed equals thelocal externalclock.The local userspeed equals thelocal externalclock.The local userspeed equals thelocal externalclock.The local userspeed equals thelocal externalclock.auto / internal orslave receiveThe local userspeed equals theremote externalclock.The local userspeed equals themaximum commonuser speed.The local userspeed equals theremote fixedspeed. (Speedshould matchexternal clock!)The local userspeed equals theremote fixedspeed.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 137User manualStep-by-step configuration6.7 Configuring the minimum line speedThis section starts with an important remark on setting the minimum line pair speed. Then it explains howto configure a minimum line speed and what the purpose is of doing this. The following gives an overviewof this section:• 6.7.1 - Important remark on the minimum line pair speed on page 138• 6.7.2 - The minimum line pair speed attribute on page 139• 6.7.3 - Purpose of the minimum line pair speed on page 142

138 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.7.1 Important remark on the minimum line pair speedIf you configure the minimum line pair speed (i.e. you set the minLinePairSpeed attribute to any value differentfrom ), then only one master clock is allowed in the system.In other words, only the following clocking combinations are allowed:One sideinternalexternalexternalstationOther sidealways slave receiveslave receiveexternal (provided the application on both sides use the same network clock)station or slave receiveExecuting an ET test on both sides will not work in case both sides change their clocking modes to internal!ExampleThe following is a perfectly legal set-up as long as the minimum line pair speed is not configured (i.e.minLinePairSpeed = ):• clocking = internalPreferred• speed = 640kbps• minLinePairSpeed = • clocking = internalPreferred• speed = 640kbps• minLinePairSpeed = However, if you set the minimum line pair speed to a value higher than the user speed, then the SHDSLline operates in slotted E1 mode. In that case, only one master clock is allowed in the system. So youwould have to change the configuration to, for example:• clocking = internalPreferred• speed = 640kbps• minLinePairSpeed = 1024kbps• clocking = slaveRcvPreferred• speed = 640kbps• minLinePairSpeed = 1024kbpsIn these general examples, serial interfaces are used, but the principle stays the same for G703 interfaces.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 139User manualStep-by-step configuration6.7.2 The minimum line pair speed attributeAlso see 6.7.1 - Important remark on the minimum line pair speed on page 138.The location of the minimum line pair speed attribute in the Crocus SHDSL containment tree is:crocusShdsl/line/minLinePairSpeedUse the minLinePairSpeed attribute to determine what the minimum speed onthe line pair has to be when the Crocus SHDSL trains.The purpose of this is:Default:Range: 192kbps up to2048kbps (in steps of64kbps)• To be able to set the line speed independently from the user speed. This allows easy upgrading to ahigher user speed.• To be able to use a G703 Nx64k interface in the Crocus SHDSL with less than 3 time slots configured(or 6 time slots on a 2 pair version) or a serial interface in the Crocus SHDSL with speeds lower than192 kbps.

140 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationThe minLinePairSpeed attribute has the following values:Value192kbps up to2048kbps (in stepsof 64kbps)DescriptionThe line speed follows the user speed.For example, if the user speed is set to 640 kbps (speed(2P) = 640kbps), then thespeed on the line pair equals …• 640 kbps in case of a Crocus SHDSL 1P (1 pair) version.• 320 kbps on each line pair in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version.The line speed no longer follows the user speed. The line trains on the speed asset with the minLinePairSpeed attribute.For example, if the user speed is set to 640 kbps (speed(2P) = 640kbps) and the minimumline speed is set to 1024 kbps (minLinePairSpeed = 1024kbps), then the speedon the line pair(s) equals 1024 kbps. (On a Crocus SHDSL 1P (1 pair) version thisis also the total line speed. On a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version, however, thetotal line speed then is 2048 kbps since the minLinePairSpeed attribute sets, as thename implies, the minimum speed on the line pair.)RemarkNote that the maximum total line speed that you can set using the minLinePair-Speed attribute is 2048 kbps. So for a Crocus SHDSL 1P (1 pair) version you canset the minLinePairSpeed attribute to its maximum value (being 2048 kbps). For aCrocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version, however, you can only set it up to 1024 kbps(which is a total line speed of 2048 kbps). If you nevertheless set the minLinePairSpeedattribute to a value higher than 1024 kbps, then a message is displayed inthe messages table and the Crocus SHDSL 2P continues to operate with a totalline speed of 2048 kbps.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 141User manualStep-by-step configuration• Make sure that you set the minLinePairSpeed attribute to the same value on both the central and remoteSHDSL device.• When using the minLinePairSpeed attribute on the central or remote SHDSL device, the user speed ofthe other device may not be set to autospeed.

142 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.7.3 Purpose of the minimum line pair speedEasily upgrading the user speedYou could determine in advance what the maximum speed is that can be achieved on the line (e.g. 1024kbps) and set the minimum line pair speed to this value (e.g. minLinePairSpeed = 1024kbps). Suppose thecustomer initially wants 256 kbps. So you set the user speed to 256 kbps (speed(2P) = 256kbps). Now whenthe customer decides he wants a higher user speed (e.g. 640kbps), then you can easily change the userspeed to this higher speed (e.g. speed(2P) = 640kbps) without first having to determine again whether theline can handle this speed. What is more, the line does not have to retrain after you changed the userspeed. So you can perform user speed upgrades in an easy, cost-efficient way.Low speed operation - compatibility with other SHDSL devicesIf you want to use a G703 Nx64k interface in the Crocus SHDSL with only 1 or 2 time slots configured(or 2 or 4 time slots in case of a 2 pair version) or a serial interface in the Crocus SHDSL with speedslower than 192 kbps, then you have to set the minimum line pair speed to 192 kbps (minLinePairSpeed =192kbps). This to insure correct time slot synchronisation on both sides.Low speed operation - 2 time slots and 2 applicationsIf you want to use a G703 Nx64k interface in the Crocus SHDSL with only 2 time slots configured (or 4time slots in case of a 2 pair version) and each time slot carries the data of a different application, thenyou also have to set the minimum line pair speed to 192 kbps (minLinePairSpeed = 192kbps). This to insurethat on the remote side the data is separated correctly.The reason is the following:• In case you select only 2 time slots (or 4 time slots in case of a 2 pair version) but you do not configurethe minimum line pair speed (minLinePairSpeed = ), then the SHDSL line operates in Nx64 mode(refer to crocusShdsl/line/framerType on page 252 for more information on this mode). Sincein this case the user data has become a continuous bit stream on the SHDSL line, it is almost impossibleto correctly separate the data from the two different applications at the remote end.• In case you select only 2 time slots (or 4 time slots in case of a 2 pair version) but you configure theminimum line pair speed to be 192 kbps (minLinePairSpeed = 192kbps), then the SHDSL line operates inslotted E1 mode (refer to crocusShdsl/line/framerType on page 252 for more information onthis mode). Since in this case the user data is also put in time slots on the SHDSL line, it is perfectlypossible to separate the data from the two different applications at the remote end.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 143User manualStep-by-step configuration6.8 Configuring framing and time slotsThis section explains how to select the framing mode and how to allocate time slots on a G703 Nx64kinterface. The following gives an overview of this section:• 6.8.1 - Selecting unframed or framed mode on page 144• 6.8.2 - Selecting the time slots on page 145• 6.8.3 - Time slot transposition on page 146

144 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.8.1 Selecting unframed or framed modecrocusShdsl/g703/framingUse the framing attribute to select between unframed or framed mode:Default:unframedRange: framed / auto /unframedValueunframedframedDescriptionIn unframed (or transparent) mode, a 2 Mbps data stream is sent transparentlyover the line.The attributes timeSlots and crc4Insertion are of no use in unframed mode.In framed (G.704 framing) mode and in case of a …• Crocus SHDSL 1P (1 pair), up to 32 time slots each containing a 64 kbps datastream can be sent over the line. Each 64 kbps time slot can be enabled or disabled.• Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair), up to 16 time slots pairs together containing a 128kbps data stream can be sent over the line. Each 128 kbps time slot pair canbe enabled or disabled. I.e. you always have to select an even number of timeslots. E.g. 2, 4, 10, etc.RemarkIf you set the framing attribute to framed, then the Crocus SHDSL always operates inplesiochronous mode regardless of the setting of the timingMode attribute.autoIf after the training sequence the chosen line speed is …• 2 Mbps, then the G703 interface automatically works in unframed mode.• lower than 2 Mbps, then the G703 interface automatically works in framedmode. Which timeslots will be used, depends on the line speed and the timeslotsconfigured in the timeslot attribute:- If the line speed is lower than the configured timeslots, then the correspondingnumber of timeslots starting from the lowest configured will be used.- If the line speed is higher than or equal to the configured timeslots, only theconfigured timeslots will be active.In all cases the timeslot attribute in the status group reflects the timeslots used.Important remark• In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version, set the framing attribute ofeither the central or remote Crocus SHDSL to auto, but not of both. Else the 2line pairs could train at a different speed which is not allowed.• The number of selected timeslots must be higher then or equal to the line speedto have a good configuration.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 145User manualStep-by-step configuration6.8.2 Selecting the time slotscrocusShdsl/g703/timeSlotsUse the timeSlots attribute to enable or disable the individual 64 kbps timeslots in the framed data stream.Default:ts0=1, other ts=0Range: enumerated, see belowImportant remark• The use of time slot 0 is not supported.• In case you use a G703 interface in one Crocus SHDSL and a serial interface in the other CrocusSHDSL, then the auto speed only works when more than 2 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 1pair version) or 4 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version) are selected.• When line speeds 64 or 128 kbps are selected, the modem will train on 192 kbps (3 time slots), whileonly one timeslot can be selected on the G703 interface. When an ET test is started at the side whereauto framing (with all timeslots enabled) is set, the pattern of the ET test will be placed in 3 timeslots,and not in the one selected timeslot.Local G703 Nx64k versus remote interfaceThe following table shows you what to do or what happens on the remote Crocus SHDSL (dependingon the used interface), when the local Crocus SHDSL is equipped with a G703 Nx64k interface in framedmode:If the remote Crocus SHDSLis equipped with …an RS530, V35, V36, X21,Bridge or Routera G703 Nx64k interfaceset to …a fixed speed,auto speed,then …this fixed speed has to be configured by the userand should equal Nx64 kbps (with N = number ofallocated time slots on the local G703 Nx64kinterface).its speed is adapted automatically to Nx64 kbps(with N = number of allocated time slots on thelocal G703 Nx64k interface).the same amount of time slots should be configuredby the user as on the local Crocus SHDSL.Example• framed mode• TS6, TS12, TS25 = 1• all other time slots = 0• auto speed, slave receive clock⇒the DTE interface speedchanges to 192 kbps (3x64kbps)

146 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.8.3 Time slot transpositionIf at both sides of the link a G703 Nx64k interface is used, it is possible to perform a time slot transposition.Such a transposition is realised by setting the G703 Nx64k in framed mode and enabling at bothsides the time slots which have to be transposed. The first time slot at the local side will be put in the firsttime slot at the remote side, the second in the second, and so on.Example:• framed mode• TS6, TS12, TS25 = 1• all other time slots = 0• framed mode• TS10, TS16, TS26 = 1• all other time slots = 0In this example, TS6 of the local Crocus SHDSL is put in TS10 of the remote Crocus SHDSL, TS12 inTS16 and TS25 in TS26. A similar mechanism exists in the receive direction.The following figure shows the time slot transposition mechanism:

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 147User manualStep-by-step configuration6.9 Configuring the user speed and time slots on the Dual PortG703-Serial interfaceBecause on the Dual Port G703-Serial interface you can configure both a user speed and time slots, thissection highlights some special points of interest concerning this configuration.The following gives an overview of this section:• 6.9.1 - Selecting unframed or framed mode on page 148• 6.9.2 - Configuring the user speed and time slots on page 148• 6.9.3 - How is the serial and G703 data ordered? on page 149

148 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.9.1 Selecting unframed or framed modeOn the G703 interface of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface you can select between unframed orframed mode as described in 6.8.1 - Selecting unframed or framed mode on page 144.Unframed mode can only work when the Dual Port G703-Serial interface is used as G703 interface only.So if you set the framing attribute to unframed, then the Dual Port G703-Serial interface always worksin G703 only mode, independently of the setting of the multiplexingMode attribute. Also refer to 6.11.3 -Configuring the Dual Port G703-Serial interface on page 155.6.9.2 Configuring the user speed and time slotsOn the …• serial interface of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface you can configure a user speed in the sameway as on the other serial interfaces (RS530, V35, V36, etc.). Refer to 6.6 - Configuring the userspeed on page 132.• G703 interface of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface you can configure the time slots in the sameway as on a regular G703 Nx64k interface. Refer to 6.8 - Configuring framing and time slots onpage 143. However, note that if you use …- both the serial and the G703 interface, then at least one time slot has to be set. The G703 interfacemust be up, otherwise no serial data traffic is possible neither.- both the serial and the G703 interface, the serial RS530 port cannot be used as an X21 interface.- the G703 interface only, then you can set the time slots as on a regular G703 Nx64k interface.When using both the serial and the G703 interface care has to be taken that the sum of the user speedand the time slots does not exceed the maximum possible line speed. If it does, a warning is logged inthe status message table.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 149User manualStep-by-step configuration6.9.3 How is the serial and G703 data ordered?When using both the serial and the G703 interface, the data coming from the G703 interface is put onthe line first followed by the data coming from the serial interface. This is shown in the following twoexamples.ExampleAs you can see in this example, the first time slots on the remote G703 interface (TS 7, 8, 9) match thetime slots of the central G703 interface (TS 1, 3, 7). The time slots do not necessarily have to be thesame on both sides (time slot transposition). The remaining time slots on the remote G703 interface arefilled with the data from the central serial interface.ExampleAs you can see in this example, the time slots on the remote G703 interface (TS 7, 8, 9) match the timeslots of the central G703 interface (TS 1, 3, 7). The time slots do not necessarily have to be the sameon both sides (time slot transposition), but the order remains the same.

150 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.10 Low speed limitations on the G703 Nx64k interfacesWhen configuring low speed on the G703 Nx64k interfaces, there are some limitations regarding timeslot configuration (and in some cases a workaround to overcome these limitations). The following tablesgive an overview of these limitations when using different interfaces in the Crocus SHDSL and connectingthe Crocus SHDSL to other Telindus SHDSL devices. The table below shows the different combinationsof possible user speeds for central and remote units. The user speeds are indicated with value N.N is a 64kbit/s multiple (e.g. N = 32 = 2048kbit/s). The first table gives all the combinations for 1 pairSHDSL devices, while the second table gives the combinations for 2 pair SHDSL devices. The cells ingrey have few practical use. This does not mean the devices cannot operate in this way as central orremote units.1 Pair versions:Remote deviceCentraldeviceCrocusSHDSL +serial/routerifCrocusSHDSL +G703 Nx64KCrocusSHDSL G703(RP)CrocusSHDSL + DualPort ifTelindus 1421in PleisiochronousmodeCrocusSHDSL +serial/router ifN = 1 … 36 N = 1 … 32 N = 1 … 32 N = 1 … 32CrocusSHDSL +G703 Nx64KN = 1 … 32 N = 1 … 32 N = 1 … 32 N = 3 … 32 1N = 1 … 32CrocusSHDSL G703(RP)CrocusSHDSL +G703-SerialDPCrocusSHDSL QuadTelindus 2300SHDSLN = 1 … 32 N = 1 … 32 N = 1 … 32 N = 3 … 32 1 N = 1 … 32N = 3 … 32 1N = 1 … 32 N = 1 … 32 N = 1 … 32 N = 3 … 32 1 N = 1 … 32N = 1 … 32 N = 1 … 32 N = 1 … 32 N = 3 … 32 1 N = 1 … 321. N = 1…31 on serial interface. The time slots on the central G703 destined for the G703 on theremote DP interface have the lowest time slot values.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 151User manualStep-by-step configuration2 Pair versions:Remote deviceCentraldeviceCrocusSHDSL +serial/routerifCrocusSHDSL +G703 Nx64KCrocusSHDSL G703(RP)CrocusSHDSL + DualPort ifTelindus 1421in PleisiochronousmodeCrocusSHDSL +serial/router ifN = 2 … 72(N=even)N = 2 … 32(N=even)N = 1…32 N = 2,4,6 … 32(N=even)CrocusSHDSL +G703 Nx64KN = 2 … 32(N=even)N = 1…32 N = 1…32 N = 6 … 32 1(N=even)N = 2,4,6 … 32(N=even)CrocusSHDSL G703(RP)N = 2 … 32(N=even)N = 1…32 N = 1…32 N = 6 … 32 1(N=even)N = 2,4,6 … 32(N=even)CrocusSHDSL +G703-SerialDPN = 6 … 32 1(N=even)CrocusSHDSL QuadN = 2 … 32(N=even)N = 1…32 N = 1…32 N = 6 … 32 1(N=even)N = 2,4,6 … 32(N=even)Telindus 2300SHDSLN = 2 … 32(N=even)N = 1…32 N = 1…32 N = 6 … 32 1(N=even)N = 2,4,6 … 32(N=even)1. N = 1…31 on serial interface. The time slots on the central G703 destined for the G703 on theremote DP interface have the lowest time slot values.

152 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.11 Configuring the interface specific attributesThis section explains the most important interface specific attributes. The following gives an overview ofthis section:• 6.11.1 - Configuring the RS530, V35 and V36 interfaces on page 153• 6.11.2 - Configuring the G703 interface on page 154• 6.11.3 - Configuring the Dual Port G703-Serial interface on page 155• 6.11.4 - Configuring the Bridge interface on page 157

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 153User manualStep-by-step configuration6.11.1 Configuring the RS530, V35 and V36 interfacescrocusShdsl//rtsControlUse the rtsControl attribute to define which device will activate the RTS signal.Default:internalRange: external / internalNormal operation requires the RTS signal (circuit 105) to be active before the Crocus SHDSL activatesits data transfer state, as indicated by the CTS signal (circuit 106). Therefore, make sure the RTS signalis activated either by the application or by the Crocus SHDSL.If RTS control is set to …the RTS signal is activated by…Use this setting in case …external the application. the application has to be in commandof the RTS signal.internal the Crocus SHDSL. the application is not able toactivate the RTS signal.

154 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.11.2 Configuring the G703 interfacecrocusShdsl/g703/codingUse the coding attribute to set the G703 interface encoding mode. Possiblevalues are:Default:hdb3Range: ami / hdb3Valueamihdb3DescriptionAlternate Mark Inversion is selected. This is a bipolar code with no zero substitution.High Density Bipolar 3 is selected. This is a modified bipolar code.With HDB3encoding, more than three consecutive zeroes occurring in the data are replacedby a substitution word. This to ensure a high pulse density. Therefore, data linksusing the HDB3 code can carry data patterns with a low 1 density. Most of theG703 applications use HDB3 encoding.crocusShdsl/g703/crc4InsertionThis attribute is only present on a G703 Nx64k interface in framed mode.Use the crc4Insertion attribute to determine whether the CRC-4 (cyclic redundancy check) is recalculatedbefore sending it to the interface. The CRC is used to check the data integrity on the G.703 connection.The crc4Insertion attribute has the following possible values:Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowValueautodisabledenabledDescriptionIn auto mode, CRC-4 insertion is …·• disabled if the data is unframed,·• enabled if the data is G.704 framed.CRC-4 insertion is disabled.CRC-4 insertion is enabled.crocusShdsl/g703/jitterAttenuationDefault:32bitsRange:Use the jitterAttenuation attribute to set the buffer depth of the jitter attenuator.The jitter attenuator of the Crocus SHDSL attenuates the clock and data jitter.The values of the jitterAttenuation attribute are 32 bits and 128 bits. You may wish to limit the buffer size to 32bits in applications where throughput delay is critical.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 155User manualStep-by-step configuration6.11.3 Configuring the Dual Port G703-Serial interfacecrocusShdsl/dualPort/multiplexingModeUse the multiplexingMode attribute to determine whether you use both theG703 and serial interface or the G703 interface only.The multiplexingMode attribute has the following possible values:Default:multiplexedRange: g703Only / multiplexedValuemultiplexedg703OnlyDescriptionThe Dual Port G703-Serial interface multiplexes two data streams using Time DivisionMultiplexing:·• one stream form the G703 interface,·• one stream from the serial interface.Only the data stream from the G703 interface is taken. In this case, the Dual PortG703-Serial interface acts as a regular G703 Nx64k interface. The opposite, i.e.the serial interface only, is not possible.RemarkIf on the G703 part of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface you set the framingattribute to unframed, then the Dual Port G703-Serial interface always works inG703 only mode, independently of the setting of the multiplexingMode attribute.crocusShdsl/dualPort/g703/stationClockFallbackDefault:internalRange: external / internalUse the stationClockFallback attribute to determine to which clocking mode theCrocus SHDSL has to fall back in case you configured the Crocus SHDSL in station clock mode but thestation clock signal is no longer present. You can use this attribute to insure that even when the stationclock signal drops, only one master clock is present in the set-up.

156 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationThe stationClockFallback attribute has the following possible values:ValueinternalexternalDescriptionThe clocking mode falls back to internal clock mode in case the station clock signalis no longer present.The clocking mode falls back to external clock mode in case the station clock signalis no longer present.crocusShdsl/dualPort/g703/fallbackClockingDefault:internalRange: slaveReceive / internalUse the fallbackClocking attribute to determine to which clocking mode theCrocus SHDSL has to fall back in case you configured the Crocus SHDSL in external clock mode butthe external clock signal is no longer present. You can use this attribute to insure that even when theexternal clock signal drops, only one master clock is present in the set-up.The fallbackClocking attribute has the following possible values:ValueinternalslaveReceiveDescriptionThe clocking mode falls back to internal clock mode in case the external clock signalis no longer present.The clocking mode falls back to slave receive clock mode in case the externalclock signal is no longer present.The external clock mentioned here is the external clock on the G703 interface.crocusShdsl/dualPort/rs530/x21ConversionUse the x21Conversion attribute to determine whether you use the Dual PortG703-Serial interface as X.21 interface (enabled) or not (disabled).Default:disabledRange: enabled / disabledYou can set the straps of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface in such a way that it operates in RS-530,RS-530A, V.35, V.36 or X.21 mode. When you select another operation mode, you also have to use thecorrect interface conversion cable. What is more, in case you set the Dual Port G703-Serial interface toX.21 mode you also have to set the x21Conversion attribute enabled. This to insure correct operation whenusing the Dual Port G703-Serial interface as X.21 interface.For more information on setting the Dual Port G703-Serial interface in an other mode and for more informationon the interface conversion cables, refer to the manual of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 157User manualStep-by-step configuration6.11.4 Configuring the Bridge interfacecrocusShdsl/bridge/IanFilterUse the lanFilter attribute to enable or disable the filter functionality of thebridge. The lanFilter attribute can be set to:Default:enabledRange: disabled / enabledValueenableddisabledDescriptionThe bridge acts as a filter.Refer to Example of a bridge set-up. Data coming from network 1, will only be letthrough by the bridge if this data has a destination outside network 1 or if it has abroadcast or multicast address. This means the bridge filters the data anddecreases the traffic on the serial line.The bridge acts as a repeater.Refer to Example of a bridge set-up. All the data which originates from network 1 willbe let through to network 2. Even if the data is not destined for that network.Example of a bridge set-upThe following figure depicts a bridge set-up:

158 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.12 Configuring the management attributesThis section explains the management attributes of the Crocus SHDSL. These attributes allow you tomake all the devices in your network accessible for management from one central location.First this section gives you some rules of thumb and remarks concerning the management of the CrocusSHDSL in a network. Then it explains the attributes that have an impact on the management of the CrocusSHDSL. Finally, it gives some examples of networks and how to configure the Crocus SHDSL tomake it accessible for the central management system.The following gives an overview of this section:• 6.12.1 - Rules of thumb and remarks concerning management on page 159• 6.12.2 - Using relative or absolute addressing on page 160• 6.12.3 - Selecting the purpose of the control connector on page 161• 6.12.4 - Forwarding management data to the line and control connector on page 162• 6.12.5 - Configuring the management data on the line on page 164• 6.12.6 - Configuring the management data on a G703 interface on page 165• 6.12.7 - Configuring the internal DMM function on page 166• 6.12.8 - Example - management over the line and the control port on page 167• 6.12.9 - Example - management over the line and the E1 interface on page 169

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 159User manualStep-by-step configuration6.12.1 Rules of thumb and remarks concerning managementThe following lists some rules of thumb concerning the management of Telindus devices in a network:• Make sure there is only one path towards the management system. Else you might get unexpectedresults (e.g. devices that do not answer to polling, answer of several devices at once when pollingone device, etc.).• Once your network starts to become complex on management level (i.e. more than just in-line connectionsas depicted in Relative addressing on page 160), you are advised to use absolute addressinginstead of relative addressing (refer to Absolute addressing on page 160).In practice, it is best to use absolute addressing when you configure one of the attributes listed belowas follows:- ctrlPortProtocol attribute to management,- internalDmm attribute to enabled,- g703/saBits to anything else than transparent.• On a Crocus SHDSL CV, the control port is linked to modem A on management level. This meansthat when you use the control port to create an extended management link, the management datapasses through modem A to the control port.• On a Crocus SHDSL CV, the attributes ctrlPortProtocol and internalDmm are present in both the containmenttree of modem A and modem B. However, changing these attributes on modem B has no effect!You have to change them on modem A in order to have an effect.• If you use a router interface in the Crocus SHDSL and you want to manage it through the control connectoror over the line, then you are advised to set the ctrlPortProtocol attribute to management. Else youmight be unable to manage the router interface. However, if you use a router interface in a CrocusSHDSL CV and you want to manage it through the high-speed bus of the CN4 card nest (using amanagement concentrator), then the ctrlPortProtocol attribute may be set to any value.• If you use a router interface in modem B of a Crocus SHDSL CV and you set the ctrlPortProtocolattribute to management, then the router interface is linked to modem A instead of modem B on managementlevel.In practice, this means that when using e.g. a management concentrator you have to specify modemA instead of modem B in your exit port settings.• When 10M Router interfaces are inserted in a Crocus SHDSL CV in modem A and B, the ctrlPortProtocolattribute should be set to Console, and not to Management.• Changing the ctrlPortProtocol and internalDmm attribute causes the Crocus SHDSL to reboot.

160 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.12.2 Using relative or absolute addressingIn order to connect with TMA to the Crocus SHDSL (refer to 4.1 - Starting TMA on the Crocus SHDSLon page 58), you can use two addressing schemes:Address typerelativeDescriptionThis type of addressing is meant for a network topology where the devices are connectedin-line on management level. I.e. with extended management connections*between two devices.To enable relative addressing, no address has to be specified in the device. Inother words, you can leave the cms2Address attribute at its default value, being 0.Relative addressingRemark* An extended management connection is realised with a crossed cable betweenthe control connectors of the two Telindus devices. You also have to set the ctrl-PortProtocol attribute to the value management.absoluteThis type of addressing is meant for a network topology where the devices are notconnected in-line on management level. I.e. when there is a digital multipointdevice present (e.g. the Orchid DM).To enable absolute addressing, an address has to be specified in the device. Dothis using the cms2Address attribute. The absolute addressing range goes from 1 upto 65535. Refer to crocusShdsl/management/cms2Address on page 235.Absolute addressing

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 161User manualStep-by-step configuration6.12.3 Selecting the purpose of the control connectorcrocusShdsl/management/ctrlPortProtocolDefault:consoleRange: management / consoleThe setting of the ctrlPortProtocol attribute depends on what you connect tothe control connector of the Crocus SHDSL. This is explained in the following table:ValuemanagementconsoleDescriptionSelect this value if you want to connect the control connector of the Crocus SHDSLto …·• a management concentrator (e.g. the Orchid 1003 LAN or Telindus 1035Orchid) for management purposes.·• the control connector of another Telindus device using a crossed cable (i.e.back-to-back) in order to create an extended management link. For more informationon extended management links, refer to Relative addressing onpage 160 and Forwarding management information on page 162).When connecting the control connector of the Crocus SHDSL to a COM port ofyour computer, you can still open a TMA session on the Crocus SHDSL. However,you can not open a CLI or ATWIN sessionSelect this value if you want to connect the control connector of the Crocus SHDSLto a COM port of your computer in order to manage the Crocus SHDSL locallyusing TMA, CLI or ATWIN.Pay attention:• When managing a remote Crocus Router Interface (2M or 10M) module with a Crocus SHDSL CV,following settings can be used:- console: can be used in any case- management: can only be used when the Crocus Router Interface (2M or 10M) module has an absoluteaddress.• When managing a remote Crocus Router Interface (2M or 10M) module with a Crocus SHDSL TT,the ctrlPortProtocol attribute must always be set to management.

162 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.12.4 Forwarding management data to the line and control connectorcrocusShdsl/forwardTmaToCtrlPortDefault:enabledRange: disabled / enabledEnables or disables propagation of management information to the controlport. This allows you to cascade management information through the control port towards another Telindusdevice.The forwardTmaToCtrlPort attribute is only present on the TT.crocusShdsl/forwardTmaToLineEnables or disables propagation of management information to the line.Default:enabledRange: disabled / enabledIf forwardTmaToLine is enabled, management data is sent over the line via a dedicated management channeltowards the remote Crocus SHDSL. To determine which management data is forwarded over theline, refer to crocusShdsl/line/management on page 205.If forwardTmaToLine is disabled, O10 management data can still be passed over the line: disabling forwardTmaToLineis not enough to avoid management loops.Forwarding management informationThe management system has been designed to provide access not only to the local Crocus SHDSL, butalso to all remote Crocus SHDSLs or other Telindus devices in a network.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 163User manualStep-by-step configuration• If the attribute forwardTmaToLine is enabled on Crocus SHDSL 1, then management information can bepropagated over the line (via a dedicated management channel) from Crocus SHDSL 1 in site A toCrocus SHDSL 2 in site B.• If the attribute forwardTmaToCtrlPort is enabled on Crocus SHDSL 2 and if the control connector of CrocusSHDSL 2 is connected with a crossed cable (i.e. back-to-back) to the control connector of CrocusSHDSL 3, then the management information can also be propagated to Crocus SHDSL 3.• If the attribute forwardTmaToLine is enabled on Crocus SHDSL 3, then the management information caneven be propagated to the remote of Crocus SHDSL 3.• Etceteras.

164 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.12.5 Configuring the management data on the linecrocusShdsl/line/managementDefault:o10-PathManagementRange: enumerated, see belowUse the management attribute to determine whether and which managementdata is forwarded over the line (also refer to crocusShdsl/forwardTmaToLine on page 191 to enable or disablepropagation of management information to the line).The management attribute has the following possible values:Valuetransparento10ManagementpathManagemento10-PathManagementDescriptionNo management data is forwarded over the SHDSL line. The data is passed transparentlyover the line.This forwards the proprietary Telindus O10 protocol over the SHDSL line. Thisallows you to manage the remote SHDSL device (and possibly other Telindusdevices connected to the SHDSL device).This forwards path management information over the SHDSL line. This allows youto manage complete paths instead of managing individual devices (i.e. elements).Formore information on path management, refer to the TMA Path Managementmanual.This forwards both the proprietary Telindus O10 protocol as the path managementinformation over the SHDSL line.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 165User manualStep-by-step configuration6.12.6 Configuring the management data on a G703 interfacecrocusShdsl/g703/saBitsThis attribute is only present on a G703 Nx64k interface.Use the saBits attribute to determine whether and which management data is inserted in the SA-bits. Ifmanagement data is inserted in the SA-bits, then it is inserted in SA registers SA5, SA7 and SA8. SA4is used as a control register and contains bandwidth information.The saBits attribute has the following possible values:Default:PathManagementRange: enumerated, see belowValuetransparento10ManagementpathManagementFor more information on path management, refer to the Path Management manual.o10-PathManagementDescriptionNo management data is inserted in the SA-bits. The SA-bits are passed transparently.This inserts the proprietary Telindus O10 protocol in the SA-bits. This allows youto forward management data over the G703 interface in a similar way as you canover the line or the control port. This allows more flexibility in managing your networkof Telindus devices.This inserts path management information in the SA-bits. This allows you to managecomplete paths instead of managing individual devices (i.e. elements).This insert both the proprietary Telindus O10 protocol as the path managementinformation in the SA-bits.Note that forwarding management data over the G703 interface can be very slow. The speed liesbetween 200 and 2400 bps.

166 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.12.7 Configuring the internal DMM functionAlso refer to 6.12.1 - Rules of thumb and remarks concerning management on page 159 for importantrules of thumb regarding management.crocusShdslCv/management/internalDmmThis attribute is only present on a CV.Use the internalDmm attribute on the Card Version to enable or disable the flow of management databetween modem A and modem B. The following example tries to clarify this.ExampleDefault:disabledRange: enabled / disabledThe following table shows how the internalDmm attribute influences the accessibility of the Telindusdevices in the set-up above:internalDmmdisabledenabledDescriptionThe PC running TMA can only reach Crocus SHDSL TT 1, Crocus SHDSL CVmodem A and router interface A.The PC running TMA can reach any device through the control port of CrocusSHDSL TT 1. You can even reach modem B of the Crocus SHDSL CV, includingits router interface and remote counterpart.Note again that it is best to …·• set the ctrlPortProtocol attribute to management.·• use absolute addressing.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 167User manualStep-by-step configuration6.12.8 Example - management over the line and the control port

168 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationIn the network depicted on the previous page, the control ports of the modems that reside in the samesite are connected to each other. By doing so (and by setting the appropriate attributes as seen on theprevious page), the management data can pass from one device to another, not only over the line butalso over the control port.Special points of interest in this network are:• You have to enable internalDmm on CV 1, because the management data has to be able to pass frommodem B to modem A. By doing so, you are able to forward management data over the …- line to TT 3,- control port to CV 2 (on a CV the control port is "linked" to modem A).• You have to enable internalDmm on CV 2, because the management data has to be able to pass frommodem A to modem B. By doing so, you are able to forward management data over the line to bothCV 3 modem A and B.• You have to disable internalDmm on CV 3, else you have two possible paths towards the managementsystem for CV 3. E.g. if you would enable internalDmm, then modem A could contact the managementsystem …- either over the line and then through CV 2 modem A etc.- or through CV 3 modem B, over the line and then through CV2 modem B etc.In this case, you might get unexpected results. Therefore, make sure there is only one path towardsthe management system!• You have to enable internalDmm on CV 4, because the management data has to be able to pass frommodem A to modem B. By doing so, you are able to forward management data over the line to bothCV 5 modem A and B.• You have to disable internalDmm on CV 5, else you have two possible paths towards the managementsystem for CV 5. Make sure there is only one path towards the management system!

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 169User manualStep-by-step configuration6.12.9 Example - management over the line and the E1 interface

170 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configurationIn the network depicted on the previous page, the E1 interfaces of the modems that reside in the samesite are connected to each other. By doing so (and by setting the appropriate attributes as seen on theprevious page), the management data can pass from one device to another, not only over the line butalso over the E1 interface.Special points of interest in this network are:• On TT 2 and TT 4, you have to set the saBits to o10Management or o10-pathManagement. By doing so,you are able to forward management data over the E1 interface connection between TT 2 and TT 4.On TT 3, however, you have to set the saBits to transparent, because on CV 1 internalDmm is enabled.Else you have two possible paths towards the management system for CV 1 and all modems afterCV 1:- one path through TT 3,- one path through TT4.In this case, you might get unexpected results. Therefore, make sure there is only one path towards themanagement system!• You have to enable internalDmm on CV 1, because the management data has to be able to pass frommodem B to modem A. By doing so, you are able to forward management data over the …- line to TT 3,- E1 interface connection between CV 1 modem A and CV 2 modem A.• On modem A of both CV 1 and CV 2, you have to set the saBits to o10Management or o10-pathManagement.By doing so, you are able to forward management data over the E1 interface connection betweenmodem A of CV 1 and CV 2. On modem B of both CV 1 and CV 2, however, you have to set the saBitsto transparent, because on CV 1 and CV 2 internalDmm is enabled. Else you have two possible pathstowards the management system. Make sure there is only one path towards the management system!• You have to enable internalDmm on CV 2, because the management data has to be able to pass frommodem A to modem B. By doing so, you are able to forward management data over the line to bothCV 3 modem A and B.• You have to disable internalDmm on CV 3, because else you have two possible paths towards the managementsystem for CV 3. E.g. if you would enable internalDmm, then modem A could contact the managementsystem …- either over the line and then through CV 2 modem A etc.- or through CV 3 modem B, over the line and then through CV2 modem B etc.In this case, you might get unexpected results. Therefore, make sure there is only one path towards themanagement system!• Etceteras.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 171User manualStep-by-step configuration6.13 Configuring remote power operationIf you want to use remote power operation, then this has to be enabled on the Crocus SHDSL itself. Referto 2.8 - Remote power operation on page 32.In order to enable remote power operation on the Crocus SHDSL itself, proceed as follows:StepAction1 In the Crocus SHDSL containment tree, select the linePair[ ] object and click on the rightmouse button.⇒A pop-up window appears.2 In the pop-up window, select Add Child → pwrSource.⇒The pwrSource object is added under the linePair[ ] object.In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version, you can add the pwrSource objectunder the object linePair[1], linePair[2] or both. Remote power is only enabled on thoseline pairs for which you added an object.3 In the pwrSource object, the pwrSource attribute is set to enabled by default.So as soon as the pwrSource object has been added, the remote power is available on theline.If you want to disable remote power operation, then set this attribute to disabled.

172 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.14 Configuring passwordsThis section shows you how to create a (list of) password(s) with associated access level in the securitytable. It also explains how to correct the security table in case of error or in case you forgot your password.Furthermore, this section shows you how to enter the passwords in the different maintenancetools.The following gives an overview of this section:• 6.14.1 - Adding passwords to the security table on page 173• 6.14.2 - Entering passwords in the different management tools on page 173

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 173User manualStep-by-step configuration6.14.1 Adding passwords to the security tableIn order to avoid unauthorised access to the Crocus SHDSL and the network you can create a list ofpasswords with associated access levels in the security table. Do this using the security attribute. Referto crocusShdsl/security on page 190.6.14.2 Entering passwords in the different management toolsNow that you created a (list of) password(s) in the Crocus SHDSL, you have to enter these passwordsevery time you want to access the Crocus SHDSL with one of the maintenance or management tools.The following table explains how to enter passwords in the different maintenance or management tools:Maintenance or managementtoolTMATMA CLI, TMA ElementManagement 1and TMA for HPOpenView 1CLIATWINWeb InterfaceSNMP 1TMLHow to enter the password?Enter the password in the Connect… window.Use the application TmaUserConf.exe to create a TMA user and assign apassword to this user. The password should correspond with a passwordconfigured in the device.Refer to the manual of TMA CLI, TMA Element Management or TMA for HPOpenView for more information.You are prompted to enter the password when the session starts.You are prompted to enter the password when the CLI session starts. Thenyou can start an ATWIN session.You are prompted to enter the password when the session starts.Define the password as community string. If no passwords are defined, thenyou can use any string as community string.Enter the password after the destination file name. Separate password andfile name by a ‘?’.Example: tml –fsourcefile@destinationfile?pwd(T)FTP 1Enter the password after the destination file name. Separate password andfile name by a ‘?’.Example: put sourcefile destinationfile?pwd1. Only possible through a management concentrator.• If no passwords are created, everybody has complete access.• If you define at least one password, it is impossible to access the Crocus SHDSL with TMA if you donot enter the correct password.• If you create a list of passwords, you should create at least one with write and security access. If not,you will be unable to make configuration and password changes after activation of the new configuration.

174 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.15 Executing configuration actionsThis section shows you how to execute actions on the configuration. The following gives an overview ofthis section:• 6.15.1 - What are the different configuration types? on page 175• 6.15.2 - Activating the configuration on page 176• 6.15.3 - Loading the default configuration on page 176• 6.15.4 - Loading the default configuration using a DIP switch on page 177

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 175User manualStep-by-step configuration6.15.1 What are the different configuration types?This section explains the different configuration types that are present in the Crocus SHDSL.Which are the configuration types?Four types of configuration are present in the Crocus SHDSL:• the non-active configuration• the active configuration• the default configuration.Explaining the configuration typesWhen you configure the Crocus SHDSL, the following happens:Phase Action Result1 Connect the computer running the maintenancetool to the Crocus SHDSL.The non-active configuration is displayedon the screen.2 Modify the non-active configuration. The modifications have no immediate influenceon the active configuration currentlyused by the Crocus SHDSL.3 Complete the modifications on the nonactiveconfiguration.4 In case of …• TMA, click on the TMA button Send allattributes to device: .The non-active configuration has to be activated.The non-active configuration becomes theactive configuration.• any other maintenance tool than thegraphical user interface based TMA(e.g. ATWIN, CLI, Web Interface, Easy-Connect terminal, TMA CLI), then executethe Activate Configuration action.Which are the configuration actions?You can execute the following actions on the configuration:• crocusShdsl/Activate Configuration on page 192• crocusShdsl/Load Default Configuration on page 192• crocusShdsl/Load Saved Configuration on page 193• crocusShdsl/Cold Boot on page 193

176 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.15.2 Activating the configurationAs explained in section 6.15.1 - What are the different configuration types? on page 175, when you finishedconfiguring the Crocus SHDSL you have to activate the configuration changes you made.In case of …• TMA, click on the TMA button Send all attributes to device: .• any other maintenance tool than the graphical user interface based TMA (e.g. ATWIN, CLI, WebInterface, EasyConnect terminal, TMA CLI), then execute the Activate Configuration action.6.15.3 Loading the default configurationIf you install the Crocus SHDSL for the first time, all configuration attributes have their default values. Ifthe Crocus SHDSL has already been configured but you want to start from scratch, then you can revertto the default configuration.You can load the default configuration using the Load Default Configuration …• action. Refer to crocusShdsl/Load Default Configuration on page 192.• DIP switch. Refer to 6.15.4 - Loading the default configuration using a DIP switch on page 177.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 177User manualStep-by-step configuration6.15.4 Loading the default configuration using a DIP switchThe following procedure shows how to load the default configuration using the Load Default ConfigurationDIP switch on the Crocus SHDSL PCB:StepAction1 Disconnect the Crocus SHDSL from the power supply. In case of a Crocus SHDSL TT,open the housing as described in 3.1 - DIP switches and straps on page 46.2 In case of a Crocus SHDSL …• TT: set DIP switch bank DS1 position 3 to off.• CV modem A: set DIP switch bank DS1 position 3 to off.• CV modem B: set DIP switch bank DS1 position 4 to off.To locate this DIP switch bank and for the DIP switch setting procedure, refer to 3 - DIPswitches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL on page 453 Reconnect the power supply to the Crocus SHDSL.⇒The Crocus SHDSL reboots and loads the default configuration.4 Activate the loaded default configuration:1. Open a management session (e.g. TMA, ATWIN, …) on the Crocus SHDSL. Refer to4.1 - Starting TMA on the Crocus SHDSL on page 58.2. Execute the Activate Configuration action.5 Again, disconnect the Crocus SHDSL from the power supply.6 Reset the appropriate DIP switch to on (see step 2).7 In case of a Crocus SHDSL TT, properly replace the cover as described in 3.1.4 - ChangingDIP switch and strap settings of the TT on page 50 and reconnect the power supply.In case of a Crocus SHDSL CV, gently slide the CV into the CN4 card nest again asdescribed in 3.2.3 - Changing DIP switch and strap settings of the CV on page 55⇒The Crocus SHDSL reboots in normal operation mode.

178 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration6.16 Troubleshooting the Crocus SHDSLIf you experience trouble when installing, configuring or operating the Crocus SHDSL, then check thefollowing:CheckpowerconnectionsDescriptionIs the Crocus SHDSL powered properly?Are all the necessary cables connected to the Crocus SHDSL? Are they connectedto the correct connectors of the Crocus SHDSL? Are they connected properly? Didyou use the correct cables (straight, crossed, …)?Refer to 2.6 - Connecting the Crocus SHDSL Table Top on page 20 and 2.7 - Connectingthe Crocus SHDSL Card Version on page 26.other devicesLEDsmessagesstatusperformancealarmsAre the devices that are connected to the Crocus SHDSL working properly (arethey powered, are they operational, …)?What do the LEDs of the Crocus SHDSL indicate? Do they indicate a fault condition?Refer to 2.10 - Front panel LED indicators on page 39What messages are displayed in the messages table? This table displays informativeand error messages.Refer to crocusShdsl/messages on page 246What do the status attributes of the Crocus SHDSL indicate? What is the status ofthe different interfaces (up, down, testing, …)?Refer to 8 - Status attributes on page 239.What do the performance attributes of the Crocus SHDSL indicate? What is theperformance of the different interfaces (does the data pass the interface, is theinterface up or down, when did it go up or down, …)?Refer to 9 - Performance attributes on page 291.What do the alarm attributes of the Crocus SHDSL indicate? What is the alarm statusof the different interfaces (link down, errors, …)?Refer to 10 - Alarm attributes on page 313.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6 179User manualStep-by-step configuration6.17 Crocus SHDSL compatibility with other SHDSL devicesThe Crocus SHDSL can be used in combination with other (Telindus) SHDSL devices. The document“Interoperability for Telindus SHDSL products” (PDF) gives an overview of the interoperability.

180 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 6User manualStep-by-step configuration

Crocus SHDSL 181Reference manualReference manual

182 Crocus SHDSLReference manual

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 183Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7 Configuration attributes.This chapter discusses the configuration attributes of the Crocus SHDSL. The following gives an overviewof this chapter.• 7.1 - Configuration attribute overview on page 184• 7.2 - General configuration attributes on page 189• 7.3 - Line configuration attributes on page 194• 7.4 - Line pair configuration attributes on page 208• 7.5 - Remote power configuration attributes on page 210• 7.6 - DTE Interface configuration attributes on page 212• 7.7 - Management configuration attributes on page 234

184 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.1 Configuration attribute overview> crocusShdslsysNamesysContactsysLocationsecurityforwardTmaToCtrlPort 1forwardTmaToLinealarmMaskalarmLevelremoteAlarmMask 1alarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 2Action: Activate ConfigurationAction: Load Saved ConfigurationAction: Load Default ConfigurationAction: Cold Boot1. TT only2. CV only

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 185Reference manualConfiguration attributes.>> linechannelregiontimingModemode 3minLinePairSpeedretrainstartupMargintestDurationasymmetricPsdeocChanneltxEocMessages 3eocHandlingnumExpectedRepeaterslinkAlarmThresholdsmanagementnamealarmMaskalarmLevelremoteAlarmMask 1alarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 2repeaterAlarmMaskrepeaterAlarmLevelrepeaterLinePairAlarmMaskrepeaterLinePairAlarmLevelendAlarmMaskendAlarmLevelendLinePairAlarmMaskendLinePairAlarmLevel>>> linePair[ ] 4alarmMaskalarmLevelremoteAlarmMask 1alarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 2>>>> pwrSource 2+5pwrSourcealarmMaskalarmLevelalarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 23. 2P version only4. in case of a 2P version, two linePair objects are present: linePair[1] and linePair[2]5. not present by default, has to be added

186 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.>> rs530, v35, v36 6rtscontrolctsdelaynametestsspeedrdlDetectclockingtransmitSampleClockalarmMaskalarmLevelremoteAlarmMask 1speed2P 3serialModealarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 2>> x21 6namespeedspeed2P 3clockingtransmitSampleClockxSignalrdlDetectalarmMaskalarmLevelremoteAlarmMask 1alarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 26. only present when the corresponding interface is used

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 187Reference manualConfiguration attributes.>> g703 6nameframing 7timeSlots 7clockingcodingcrc4Insertion 7aisDetectionsqThresholdsqTimejitterAttenuationsaBits 7rdlDetecttests 7alarmMaskalarmLevelremoteAlarmMask 1alarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 2>> dualPort 6namerdlDetectmultiplexingMode>>> g703nameframingtimeSlotsclockingstationClockFallBackfallbackClockingcodingcrc4InsertionaisDetectionsqThresholdsqTimejitterAttenuationsaBitstestsalarmMaskalarmLevelremoteAlarmMask 1alarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 27. G703 Nx64 only

188 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.>>> rs530namespeedspeed2P 3clockingtransmitSampleClockrtsControlctsDelayx21ConversiontestsalarmMaskalarmLevelremoteAlarmMask 1alarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 2>> bridge 6namespeedspeed2P 3clockingtransmitSampleClocklanFilterrdlDetectalarmMaskalarmLevelremoteAlarmMask 1alarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 2>> router 6namespeedspeed2P 3clockingtransmitSampleClockrdlDetectalarmMaskalarmLevelremoteAlarmMask 1alarmContactHighMask 2alarmContactLowMask 2>> managementcms2AddressconsoleNoTrafficTimeOutctrlPortProtocolinternalDmm

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 189Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.2 General configuration attributesThis section describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl/sysName on page 190• crocusShdsl/sysContact on page 190• crocusShdsl/sysLocation on page 190• crocusShdsl/security on page 190• crocusShdsl/forwardTmaToCtrlPort on page 191• crocusShdsl/forwardTmaToLine on page 191• crocusShdsl/ on page 191This section describes the following actions:• crocusShdsl/Activate Configuration on page 192• crocusShdsl/Load Default Configuration on page 192• crocusShdsl/Load Saved Configuration on page 193• crocusShdsl/Cold Boot on page 193

190 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/sysNameThis is a field where you can assign a name to the Crocus SHDSL. The fieldhas a limit of 64 characters.This is a SNMP MIB2 parameter.Default:Range: 0 … 64 characterscrocusShdsl/sysContactDefault:Range: 0 … 64 charactersThis is a field where you can fill in the name of a contact person togetherwith information on how to contact this person. The field has a limit of 64 characters.This is a SNMP MIB2 parameter.crocusShdsl/sysLocationThis is a field where you can fill in the physical location of the CrocusSHDSL. The field has a limit of 64 characters.This is a SNMP MIB2 parameter.Default:Range: 0 … 64 characterscrocusShdsl/securityDefault:Range: table, see belowIn order to avoid unauthorised access to the network and the CrocusSHDSL, you can create a list of passwords with associated access levels. The security attribute containsthe following elements:ElementpasswordDescriptionThe password is a string of maximum 10 characters.Default:Range: 0 … 10 charactersaccessRightsThis attribute represents the access levels assignedto a password. It is a bit string whereof each bit correspondsto an access level. The different access levelsare:·• readAccess• writeAccess·• securityAccess• fileSystemAccess• testAccessDefault:11111Range: bit string, see below

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 191Reference manualConfiguration attributes.The following table shows, for each access level, what you can or can not do:AccesslevelReadattributesChangeattributesRead securityattributes 1Changesecurityattributes 1Executeactions 2Access filesystemreadAccess yes no no no no nowriteAccess yes yes no no yes nosecurityAccess yes yes yes yes yes nofileSystemAccessno no no no no yestestAccess yes 3no no no yes 4no1. The Crocus SHDSLhas the following security attributes:crocusShdsl/sysNamecrocusShdsl/security2. Actions are e.g. Cold Boot, testActivation, retrain, etc.3. It is possible to see status and performance attributes of the line object that are applicable tomodem tests (AL, DL, RDL, ...).4. It is possible to execute actions applicable to modem tests (AL, DL, RDL, ...).crocusShdsl/forwardTmaToCtrlPortDefault:enabledRange: enabled / disabledEnables or disables propagation of management information to the controlport. This allows you to cascade management information through the control port towards another Telindusdevice.The forwardTmaToCtrlPort attribute is only present on the TT.crocusShdsl/forwardTmaToLineEnables or disables propagation of management information to the line.Default:enabledRange: enabled / disabledIf forwardTmaToLine is enabled, management data is sent over the line via a dedicated management channeltowards the remote remote Crocus SHDSL. To determine which management data is forwarded overthe line, refer to crocusShdsl/line/management on page 205.If forwardTmaToLine is disabled, O10 managment data can still be passed over the line : disabling forwardTmaToLineis not enough to avoid management loops.For more information, refer to 6.12.4 - Forwarding management data to the line and control connectoron page 162.crocusShdsl/For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask, alarmLevel, remoteAlarmMask, alarmContactHighMask,alarmContactLowMask and on the alarms in general, refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarmattributes on page 317.For more information on the alarms of the crocusShdsl object, refer to 10.3 - General alarms onpage 325.

192 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/Activate ConfigurationIf you execute this action, the editable non-active configuration becomes the active configuration.When use this action?If you configure the Crocus SHDSL using …• any other maintenance tool than the graphical user interface based TMA (e.g. ATWIN, CLI, WebInterface, EasyConnect terminal, TMA CLI), then execute the Activate Configuration action to activatethe configuration after you finished configuring the Crocus SHDSL or after you executed the LoadSaved Configuration or Load Default Configuration action.• TMA, then do not just execute the Activate Configuration action to activate the configuration after you finishedconfiguring the Crocus SHDSL, but use the TMA button Send all attributes to deviceinstead. You can, however, execute the Activate Configuration action after you executed the Load SavedConfiguration or Load Default Configuration action.crocusShdsl/Load Default ConfigurationIf you execute this action, the non-active configuration is overwritten by the default configuration.When use this action?If you install the Crocus SHDSL for the first time, all configuration attributes have their default values. Ifthe Crocus SHDSL has already been configured but you want to start from scratch, then use this actionto revert to the default configuration.In case of TMA, click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from deviceConfiguration action to see the new non-active configuration.after executing the Load Default

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 193Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/Load Saved ConfigurationIf you execute this action, the non-active configuration is overwritten by the active configuration currentlyused by the Crocus SHDSL.When use this action?If you are in the progress of modifying the non-active configuration but made some mistakes, then usethis action to revert to the active configuration.In case of TMA, click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from deviceConfiguration action to see the new non-active configuration.after executing the Load DefaultcrocusShdsl/Cold BootIf you execute this action, the Crocus SHDSL reboots. As a result, the Crocus SHDSL …• performs a self-test.• checks the software.• reads the saved configuration and restarts program execution.When use this action?Use this action, for instance, to activate new application software.If a Cold Boot is performed on a Crocus SHDSL CV Twin, both modem A and B reboot.

194 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.3 Line configuration attributesThis section describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/channel on page 195• crocusShdsl/line/region on page 195• crocusShdsl/line/timingMode on page 196• crocusShdsl/line/mode on page 197• crocusShdsl/line/minLinePairSpeed on page 198• crocusShdsl/line/retrain on page 198• crocusShdsl/line/startupMargin on page 201• crocusShdsl/line/testDuration on page 201• crocusShdsl/line/asymmetricPsd on page 201• crocusShdsl/line/eocChannel on page 202• crocusShdsl/line/txEocMessages on page 202• crocusShdsl/line/eocHandling on page 202• crocusShdsl/line/numExpectedRepeaters on page 202• crocusShdsl/line/linkAlarmThresholds on page 203• crocusShdsl/line/management on page 205• crocusShdsl/line/name on page 205• crocusShdsl/line/dualPairMode on page 206• crocusShdsl/line/ on page 207

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 195Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/channelUse the channel attribute to define which modem is the master (central) andwhich the slave (remote) during the synchronisation procedure of themodems.Default:remote for TT / centralfor CVRange: remote / centralThe default channel setting of a TT is remote, while that of a CV is central. Therefore there will never bea synchronisation problem when a CV and a TT are used in a regular set-up, the CV at the backboneside and the TT at the customer side.• If two TTs are used at each end of the data link, make sure to change the channel attribute of one ofthe TTs into central.• If two CVs are used at each end of the data link, make sure to change the channel attribute of one ofthe CVs into remote.crocusShdsl/line/regionUse the region attribute to set the S-HDSL standard. The region attribute hasthe following values:Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowValueannexAannexBautoDescriptionThe American S-HDSL standard is used.The European S-HDSL standard is used.The S-HDSL standard is selected automatically.

196 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/timingModeUse the timingMode attribute to set the timing mode. It influences the relationshipbetween the line clock and the user interface clock.Use the timingMode attribute to set the timing mode.The Crocus SHDSL has two clock sources:• one takes care of the clocking on the SHDSL line.• one takes care of the clocking on the modular user interface.Using the timingMode attribute you can define whether these two clocks run independent from each other(i.e. plesiochronous mode) or whether they are "coupled" with each other (i.e. synchronous mode).The timingMode attribute has the following values:Default:pleisiochronousRange: pleisiochronous / synchronousValueplesiochronoussynchronousDescriptionIn this mode each SHDSL frame has 0 or 4 stuffing bits to compensate clock deviationstowards the user interface clock. In this mode, all possible clocking modescan be selected.In this mode the SHDSL frame does not have stuffing bits to compensate clockdeviations towards the user interface clock. In this case only internal and slavereceive clocking is allowed. What is more, internal clocking is only allowed at oneside of the link (e.g. the central side) and slave receive clocking at the other side(e.g. the remote side).Synchronous mode is the typical timing mode in DSLAM setups.• In case of a G703 Nx64k interface, if you set the framing attribute to framed, then the Crocus SHDSLalways operates in plesiochronous mode regardless of the setting of the timingMode attribute.• You always have to work in the same timing mode at both sides of the link. In other words:- central: synchronous - remote: synchronous → allowed- central: plesiochronous - remote: plesiochronous → allowed- central: synchronous - remote: plesiochronous or vice versa → not allowed• For compatibility with other SHDSL devices, setting this attribute to the correct value might be essential.Refer to 6.17 - Crocus SHDSL compatibility with other SHDSL devices on page 179

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 197Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/modeThis attribute is only present on a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version. Usethe mode attribute to select between single pair or dual pair operation.Default:dualPairRange: singlePair / dualPairWhen the mode attribute is changed, the Crocus SHDSL reboots. In case of a Crocus SHDSL CV Twin,when the mode attribute of 1 modem is changed, both modems will reboot.When you change the mode attribute, then make sure that you use the correct speed attribute to set theuser speed:If the mode attribute is set to …singlePair,dualPair,then use the attribute …speed to configure the user speed.speed2P to configure the user speed.

198 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/minLinePairSpeedUse the minLinePairSpeed attribute to determine what the minimum speed onthe line pair has to be when the Crocus SHDSL trains.For more information on the minimum line pair speed, refer to 6.7 - Configuringthe minimum line speed on page 137.Default:Range: 192kbps up to2048kbps (in steps of64kbps)crocusShdsl/line/retrainUse the retrain attribute to determine when the Crocus SHDSL shouldretrain.Default:-Range: structure, see belowThe retrain criteriaThe following criteria determine when to retrain:Criterionno SHDSL framesynchronisationSHDSL frameCRC errorthresholdexceededsignal to noisetoo lowDescriptionWhen the Crocus SHDSL cannot synchronise on the SHDSL framing, it retrains.SHDSL framing sends 166 blocks per second over the line, independently of thespeed. Each block has a CRC check. When a certain percentage of frames has aCRC error, the Crocus SHDSL retrains.When the signal to noise ratio becomes too low during a certain period of time, theCrocus SHDSL retrains.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 199Reference manualConfiguration attributes.Configuring the retrain criteriaThe retrain structure contains the following elements:ElementenabledDescriptionUse this element to enable (yes) or disable (no) retraining.So when selecting no, the Crocus SHDSL willnever retrain (even not when the line is disconnected).Default:yesRange: -errorPersistence-TimeUse this element to set the period, in seconds, duringwhich each criterion is measured. If within this periodthe predefined criterion value is equalled orexceeded, the Crocus SHDSL retrains.Default:10Range: -1 … 30The errorPersistenceTime functions as a moving window, so it ‘s always the last seconds,equal to the errorPersistenceTime, that are used to calculate the average.errorThresholdDefault:10Range: 1 … 300Use this element to set the amount of CRC errors, permille, at which the Crocus SHDSL should retrain. Ifthe amount of CRC errors exceeds this value (measuredduring the errorPersistenceTime), then the Crocus SHDSL retrains.RemarkThe errored SHDSL frames can be monitored using the performance attribute crocusShdsl/line/linePair[]/performance/codeViolations.snrThresholdUse this element to set the signal to noise ratio, in dB, Default:23which has to be maintained. If the measured signal to Range: 20 … 25noise ratio drops below this value (measured duringthe errorPersistenceTime), then the Crocus SHDSL retrains.If you configured the Crocus SHDSL in …• a fixed speed, then the Crocus SHDSL tries to retrain again at this fixed speed.If the retrain is successful, then the Crocus SHDSL operates at this fixed speedagain. If the retrain is not successful, then the Crocus SHDSL retrains again. Ifthe line conditions are so bad that the fixed speed can no longer be attained,then the Crocus SHDSL keeps retraining.• auto speed, then the Crocus SHDSL initially tries to retrain at the speed it wastrained before. If this does not work, then it tries to train on a lower speed.RemarkThe snrThreshold is only taken into account as a retrain criterion after the line hasbeen in data state for 2 minutes.

200 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.ElementstepupMarginDescriptionUse this element to enable or disable the step-upretrain mechanism.If you set the stepupMargin to a value other than disabled, then the Crocus SHDSLretrains at a higher speed (because of the improved line conditions) when the currentsignal to noise ratio of the line exceeds the sum of …• the signal to noise ratio at the moment the line entered the data state (i.e.shortly after a successful training cycle)+• the stepupMargin value.Default:disabledRange: 3 … 15The result of this sum can be seen in the status attribute stepupThreshold.RemarkNote that the stepupMargin element is only considered when both the central andremote Crocus SHDSL are in auto speed mode.ExampleSuppose in the retrain structure you set the …• enabled element to yes.• snrThreshold element to 25 (dB).• stepupMargin element to 3 (dB).Suppose that at the moment the line entered the data state the measured signal to noise ratio was 27dB. In that case the stepupThreshold value is 27 dB + 3 dB = 30 dB.Now, if the signal to noise ratio …• drops below 25 dB (i.e. the value set using the snrThreshold attribute), then the Crocus SHDSL retrainsat a lower speed (because of the deteriorated line conditions).• exceeds 27 dB (i.e. the stepupThreshold value), then the Crocus SHDSL retrains at a higher speed(because of the improved line conditions).

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 201Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/startupMarginDefault:2dBRange: enumerated, see belowUse the startupMargin attribute to define for which signal to noise margin a linespeed is selected during the ITU-T G.994.1 auto speed negotiation. The startupMargin attribute is only relevantin case both central and remote Crocus SHDSL are set to auto speed mode.The higher the startupMargin, the lower the selected line speed but the more stable the line will be. ThestartupMargin attribute has the following values: disabled, 0dB, 1dB, 2dB, 3dB, 4dB, 5dB, 6dB, 7dB, 8dB,9dB, 10dB. When you set the startupMargin to disabled, the signal to noise margin is not considered duringthe ITU-T G.994.1 auto speed negotiation. I.e. the complete speed range is available.crocusShdsl/line/testDurationDefault:00000d 00h 03m 00sRange: 00000d 00h 00m 01s-Use the testDuration attribute to set the time-out period of diagnostic tests.00000d 18h 12m 15sIt is possible to perform diagnostic tests on the Crocus SHDSL (refer toChapter 13 - Diagnostic tests on page 359). However, these tests cause an interruption of the normaldata transfer. Some tests even cause a contact loss between the management system and the remoteCrocus SHDSL. Therefore, tests are automatically terminated after a time-out period which is specifiedwith the testDuration attribute.The time-out ranges from 00000d 00h 00m 01s up to 00000d 18h 12m 15s. Entering 00000d 00h 00m 00s disablesthe time-out period (i.e. diagnostic tests are not terminated after a time-out period).crocusShdsl/line/asymmetricPsdDefault:disabledRange: enabled / disabledUse the asymmetricPsd attribute to enable or disable the asymmetrical PowerSpectral Density. This feature, described in the SHDSL standard, increases the transmit power for thefixed speeds …• 768 kbps and 1536 kbps in case of Annex A.• 2048 kbps and 2304 kbps in case of Annex B.To enable asymmetrical PSD, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Select the speed for which you want to enable asymmetrical PSD using the speed(2P)attribute:·• 768 kbps or 1536 kbps in case of Annex A.·• 2048 kbps or 2304 kbps in case of Annex B.2 Select the correct regional standard using the region attribute:·• Annex A in case of a speed of 768 kbps or 1536 kbps.·• Annex B in case of a speed of 2048 kbps or 2304 kbps.3 Enable asymmetrical PSD by setting the asymmetricPsd attribute to enabled.If asymmetricPsd is enabled then the device on which the channel attribute is set to "remote" will even havea slightly higher transmit power, than the device on which the channel attribute is set to "central". WhenasymmetricPsd is enabled, you should be able to cover a slightly higher distance at the given speeds.

202 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/eocChannelDefault:itu-G.991.2Range: proprietary / itu-Use the eocChannel attribute to determine how the checksum of EmbeddedG.991.2Operations Channel (EOC) messages is calculated. Make sure that on boththe central and the remote device the eocChannel attribute is set to the same value.The eocChannel attribute has the following values:Valueproprietaryitu-G.991.2DescriptionThe checksum is calculated using a proprietary method.The checksum is calculated using the G.SHDSL standard method.crocusShdsl/line/txEocMessagesDefault:bothPairsRange: pair1 / bothPairsThis attribute is only present on a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version. Usethe txEocMessages attribute to send EOC messages on both line pair 1 and 2 (bothPairs) or on line pair 1only (pair1).crocusShdsl/line/eocHandlingDefault:noneRange: enumerated, see belowSHDSL devices can communicate with each other through the EmbeddedOperations Channel (EOC). Use the eocHandling attribute to define the handling of the EOC messages.For more information on EOC handling, refer to 6.2 - Configuring EOC handling on page 83.crocusShdsl/line/numExpectedRepeatersDefault:0Range: 0 … 8Use the numExpectedRepeaters attribute to set the number of Crocus SHDSLRepeaters that the Crocus SHDSL can expect to find on the SHDSL line. If the actual number of repeatersdoes not match the number you entered in the numExpectedRepeaters attribute, then the invalidNumRepeatersalarm is raised.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 203Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/linkAlarmThresholdsDefault:-Range: structure, see belowUse the linkAlarmThresholds attribute to set the alarm threshold values of themost important line parameters. If this predefined threshold value is exceeded, then a correspondingalarm is generated.The linkAlarmThresholds structure contains the following elements:ElementlineAttenuationDescriptionUse this element to set the alarm threshold value of the line attenuation in dB. Ifthe line attenuation …• exceeds this value during at least 10 seconds, then the lineAttenuation alarmis raised.• drops below this value during at least 10 seconds, then the lineAttenuationalarm is cleared.RemarkNote that if you set the eocHandling attribute to alarmConfiguration, then the centralSHDSL device forces the remote SHDSL device and any intermediary repeater touse the link alarm thresholds lineAttenuation and signalNoise as configured on the centraldevice. In other words, the settings of the lineAttenuation and signalNoise on thecentral device overrule those of the remote device and repeaters.signalNoiseUse this element to set the alarm threshold value of the signal noise in dB. If thesignal noise …• exceeds this value during at least 10 seconds, then the signalNoise alarm israised.• drops below this value during at least 10 seconds, then the signalNoise alarm iscleared.RemarkNote that if you set the eocHandling attribute to alarmConfiguration, then the central 1SHDSL device forces the remote 2 SHDSL device and any intermediary repeaterto use the link alarm thresholds lineAttenuation and signalNoise as configured on thecentral device. In other words, the settings of the lineAttenuation and signalNoise onthe central device overrule those of the remote device and repeaters.

204 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.ElementerrSecRatio-ExceededsevErrSecRatio-ExceededbBErrRatio-ExceededDescriptionUse this element to set the alarm threshold value of the errored seconds ratio. Theerrored seconds ratio is the ratio of errored seconds to total seconds during a 2hour time interval. So if the errored seconds ratio …• exceeds this value within a 2 hour period 3 , then the errSecRatioExceeded alarm israised.• drops below this value within a 2 hour period, then the errSecRatioExceeded alarmis cleared.Use this element to set the alarm threshold value of the severely errored secondsratio. The severely errored seconds ratio is the ratio of severely errored secondsto total seconds during a 2 hour time interval. So if the severely errored secondsratio …• exceeds this value within a 2 hour period4, then the sevErrSecRatioExceeded alarmis raised.• drops below this value within a 2 hour period, then the sevErrSecRatioExceededalarm is cleared.Use this element to set the alarm threshold value of the background block errorratio. The background block error ratio is the ratio of background block errors tototal blocks during a 2 hour time interval. The count of total blocks excludes allblocks during severely errored seconds. So if the background block error ratio …• exceeds this value within a 2 hour period4, then the bBErrRatioExceeded alarm israised.• drops below this value within a 2 hour period, then the bBErrRatioExceeded alarmis cleared.1. The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.2. The remote device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to remote.3. The 2 hour periods run synchronous with the 2 hour periods of the line/h2Line performanceattribute. Because alarms are raised or cleared within 2 hour periods, there is a delay in thealarm status. For example, suppose that in the first minute of a 2 hour period the errSecRatioExceededvalue is exceeded, then the errSecRatioExceeded alarm is raised. The alarm stays on forthe remainder of the 2 hour period. The alarm is only cleared if also in the next 2 hour periodthe errSecRatioExceeded value is not exceeded.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 205Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/managementDefault:o10-PathManagementRange: enumerated, see belowUse the management attribute to determine whether and which managementdata is forwarded over the line (also refer to crocusShdsl/forwardTmaToLine on page 191 to enable or disablepropagation of management information to the line).The management attribute has the following possible values:Valuetransparento10ManagementpathManagemento10-PathManagementDescriptionNo management data is forwarded over the SHDSL line. The data is passed transparentlyover the line.This forwards the proprietary Telindus O10 protocol over the SHDSL line. Thisallows you to manage the remote SHDSL device (and possibly other Telindusdevices connected to the SHDSL device).This forwards path management information over the SHDSL line. This allows youto manage complete paths instead of managing individual devices (i.e. elements).Formore information on path management, refer to the TMA Path Managementmanual.This forwards both the proprietary Telindus O10 protocol as the path managementinformation over the SHDSL line.crocusShdsl/line/nameUse the name attribute to assign a name to the line.Default:Range: 0 ... 24 characters

206 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/dualPairModeThis attribute is only present on the Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version.Default:enhancedRange: standard/enhancedIf the mode attribute is set to dualPair, then use the dualPairMode attribute to set the dual pair operationmode. The dualPairMode attribute has the following possible values:ValuestandardenhancedDescriptionThe dual pair SHDSL line operates strictly as described in the SHDSL standard. Ifthe Crocus SHDSL is connected to a remote device that operates strictly accordingto the SHDSL standard, then select the standard value.The dual pair SHDSL line operates slightly different than described in the SHDSLstandard (some enhancements are present). If you select the enhanced value, thenit is possible that you experience problems when connecting to third party SHDSLdevices. In that case, select the standard value.If you have two Crocus SHDSLs connected to each other in a point-to-point set-up, then make sure thatyou set the dualPairMode attribute to the same value at both sides!

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 207Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/Use the alarm related configuration attributes to configure the alarm behaviour of …• the line object (use alarmMask, alarmLevel, remoteAlarmMask, alarmContactHighMask and alarmContactLowMask).• the repeater object (use repeaterAlarmMask, repeaterAlarmLevel, repeaterLinePairAlarmMask and repeaterLinePairAlarmLevel).• the end object (use endAlarmMask, endAlarmLevel, endLinePairAlarmMask and endLinePairAlarmLevel).For more information on …• the alarm configuration attributes and on the alarms in general, refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarmattributes on page 317.• the alarms of the line object, refer to 10.4 - Line alarms on page 328.• the alarms of the repeater object, refer to 10.7 - Repeater and end alarms on page 335.• the alarms of the end object, refer to 10.7 - Repeater and end alarms on page 335.

208 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.4 Line pair configuration attributesThis section describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/ on page 209In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P, two linePair objects are present: linePair [1] and linePair [2].

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 209Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask, alarmLevel, remoteAlarmMask, alarmContactHighMask,alarmContactLowMask and on the alarms in general, refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarmattributes on page 317.For more information on the alarms of the linePair[ ] object, refer to 10.5 - Line pair alarms on page 330.

210 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.5 Remote power configuration attributesThis describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/pwrSource/pwrSource on page 211• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/pwrSource/ on page 211

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 211Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/pwrSource/pwrSourceUse the pwrSource attribute to disable or enable remote power operation.Default:enabledRange: disabled / enabledFor more information on remote powering, refer to 2.8 - Remote power operation on page 32.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/pwrSource/For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask, alarmLevel, alarmContactHighMask, alarm-ContactLowMask and on the alarms in general, refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarm attributes on page 317.For more information on the alarms of the pwrSource object, refer to 10.6 - Remote power alarms onpage 333.

212 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.6 DTE Interface configuration attributesThis section discusses the configuration attributes of the different DTE interfaces. Because some of theinterface configuration attributes are present on every interface, they are discussed in a general section.All other sections discuss the interface specific attributes.The following gives an overview of this section:• 7.6.1 - RS530, V35 and V36 interface configuration attributes on page 213• 7.6.2 - X21 interface configuration attributes on page 217• 7.6.3 - G703 interface configuration attributes on page 220• 7.6.4 - Dual Port G703-Serial interface configuration attributes on page 225• 7.6.5 - Bridge interface configuration attributes on page 228• 7.6.6 - Router interface configuration attributes on page 231

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 213Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.6.1 RS530, V35 and V36 interface configuration attributesThis section describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl//rtsControl on page 214• crocusShdsl//ctsDelay on page 214• -crocusShdsl//tests on page 215• crocusShdsl//name on page 215• crocusShdsl//speed on page 215• crocusShdsl//speed2P on page 215• crocusShdsl//clocking on page 216• crocusShdsl//transmitSampleClock on page 216• crocusShdsl//rdlDetect on page 216• crocusShdsl/serialMode on page 216• crocusShdsl// on page 216

214 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl//rtsControlUse the rtsControl attribute to define which device will activate the RTS signal.Default:internalRange: external/internalNormal operation requires the RTS signal (circuit 105) to be active before the Crocus SHDSL activatesits data transfer state, as indicated by the CTS signal (circuit 106). Therefore, make sure the RTS signalis activated either by the application or by the Crocus SHDSL.If RTS control is set to…the RTS signal is activatedby…Use this setting in case…external the application. the application has to be in commandof the RTS signal.internal the Crocus SHDSL. the application is not able toactivate the RTS signal.crocusShdsl//ctsDelayUse the cTSDelay attribute to define the delay between the active edge of theincoming RTS signal and the active edge of the outgoing CTS signal.The delays that can be selected are: 0 ms, 4 ms, 16 ms and 64 ms.Default:0 msRange: enumerated, see belowIf RTS control isset to…externalinternalthen…a delay is provided between:• the moment the active edge of the RTS signal comes in• the moment the active edge of the outgoing CTS signal is generated.no delay is provided. The CTS signal is always on.Between the moment the RTS signal drops and the moment the CTS signal drops, no delay is provided.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 215Reference manualConfiguration attributes.-crocusShdsl//testsUse the tests attribute to enable or disable the interface tests.The interface tests of the Crocus SHDSL are useful to trace possible problems. These interface testsare initiated by the application via the interface. If these tests are not supported by the application, it ispossible that an undesired test is activated resulting in a disturbance of the data transfer. Therefore, theyare disabled by default.The available interface tests are:• interfaceAl: interface Analogue Loop• interfaceRdl: interface Remote Digital LoopDefault:disabledRange: enabled / disabledFor more information on these tests, refer to Chapter 13 - Diagnostic tests on page 359.crocusShdsl//nameUse the name attribute to assign an administrative name to the DTE interface.Default:Range: 0 … 64 characterscrocusShdsl//speedUse the speed attribute to set the speed of the DTE interface.For more information, refer to 6.6 - Configuring the user speed on page 132.Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowcrocusShdsl//speed2PDefault:autoRange: enumerated, see belowThis attribute is only present on a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version. Usethe speed2P attribute to set the speed of the DTE interface in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (if it is truly in2 pair operation).Important remark• In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version, set the speed2P attribute of either the central or remoteCrocus SHDSL to auto, but not of both. Else the 2 line pairs could train at a different speed which isnot allowed.• In case you use a G703 interface in one Crocus SHDSL and a serial interface in the other CrocusSHDSL, then the auto speed only works when more than 2 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 1pair version) or 4 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version) are selected.• If both the central 8 and remote 9 Crocus SHDSL are configured in external clocking mode and anexternal clock signal is present, then it is the central Crocus SHDSL modem who determines thespeed on which the line trains.For more information, refer to 6.6 - Configuring the user speed on page 132.8. The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.9. The remote device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to remote.

216 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl//clockingUse the clocking attribute to select a clocking mode.For more information, refer to 6.5 - Configuring the clocking mode on page 108.Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowcrocusShdsl//transmitSampleClockUse the transmitSampleClock attribute to set the transmit sample clock to normalor invert.Default:normalRange: invert / normalIn case the clocking mode is set to an alternative mode, then inverting the sample clock may solve thepossible problem of too long delays on the transmit data in comparison to the transmit clock.crocusShdsl//rdlDetectWhen set to disabled, this attribute prevents that a digital loop can be performedby a remote Crocus SHDSL on the local Crocus SHDSL.Default:enabledRange: disabled / enabledWhen rdlDetect is disabled, and a remote Crocus SHDSL initiates an RDL test, the local Crocus SHDSLwill not go in digital loop. However, the DTE interface of the remote Crocus SHDSL will be clamped anddata transfer is interrupted.crocusShdsl/serialModeThe serial interface signals support different serial interface types.Use the serialMode attribute to select the serial interface type. Possible values are:Default:rs530Range: enumerated, see belowValuers530rs530aDescriptionThe serial interface type is rs530.The serial interface type is rs530a.v35 The serial interface type is v35.v35Interimv36-v10v36-v11The serial interface type is v35Interim.The serial interface type is v36-v10.The serial interface type is v36-v11.x21 The serial interface type is x21.x21NotTerminatedrs232The serial interface type is x21NotTerminated.The serial interface type is rs232 (also referred to as V.24).crocusShdsl//For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask, alarmLevel, remoteAlarmMask, alarmContactHighMask,alarmContactLowMask and on the alarms in general, refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarmattributes on page 317.For more information on the alarms of the object, refer to 10.8 - Interface alarms onpage 339.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 217Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.6.2 X21 interface configuration attributesThis section describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl/x21/xSignal on page 218• crocusShdsl/x21/name on page 218• crocusShdsl/x21/speed on page 218• crocusShdsl/x21/speed2P on page 219• crocusShdsl/x21/clocking on page 219• crocusShdsl/x21/transmitSampleClock on page 219• crocusShdsl/x21/rdlDetect on page 219• crocusShdsl/x21/ on page 219

218 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/x21/xSignalUse this attribute to determine whether the X clock is taken into account ornot.Default:inUseRange: ignore / inUseIf the X clock is … and it is … in your set-up, then set the xSignal attribute to…present,present,not present,used (i.e. the clocking mode isset to external or external loopback)not used (i.e. the clocking modeis set to internal or slavereceive)inUse.ignore to make sure that the Xclock signal is not used.ignore to make sure that possibleinterference does not give thefalse impression that an X clocksignal is present.crocusShdsl/x21/nameUse the name attribute to assign an administrative name to the DTE interface.Default:Range: 0 … 64 characterscrocusShdsl/x21/speedUse the speed attribute to set the speed of the DTE interface.For more information, refer to 6.6 - Configuring the user speed on page 132.Default:autoRange: enumerated, see below

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 219Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/x21/speed2PDefault:autoRange: enumerated, see belowThis attribute is only present on a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version. Usethe speed2P attribute to set the speed of the DTE interface in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (if it is truly in2 pair operation).Important remark• In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version, set the speed2P attribute of either the central orremote Crocus SHDSL to auto, but not of both. Else the 2 line pairs could train at a different speedwhich is not allowed.• In case you use a G703 interface in one Crocus SHDSL and a serial interface is the other CrocusSHDSL, then the auto speed only works when more than 2 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 1pair version) or 4 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version) are selected.• If both the central 10 and remote 11 Crocus SHDSL are configured in external clocking mode and anexternal clock signal is present, then it is the central Crocus SHDSL modem who determines thespeed on which the line trains.For more information, refer to 6.6 - Configuring the user speed on page 132.crocusShdsl/x21/clockingUse the clocking attribute to select a clocking mode.For more information, refer to 6.5 - Configuring the clocking mode on page 108.Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowcrocusShdsl/x21/transmitSampleClockUse the transmitSampleClock attribute to set the transmit sample clock to normalor invert.Default:normalRange: invert / normalIn case the clocking mode is set to an alternative mode, then inverting the sample clock may solve thepossible problem of too long delays on the transmit data in comparison to the transmit clock.crocusShdsl/x21/rdlDetectWhen set to disabled, this attribute prevents that a digital loop can be performedby a remote Crocus SHDSL on the local Crocus SHDSL.Default:enabledRange: disabled / enabledWhen rdlDetect is disabled, and a remote Crocus SHDSL initiates an RDL test, the local Crocus SHDSLwill not go in digital loop. However, the DTE interface of the remote Crocus SHDSL will be clamped anddata transfer is interrupted.crocusShdsl/x21/For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask, alarmLevel, remoteAlarmMask, alarmContactHighMask,alarmContactLowMask and on the alarms in general, refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarmattributes on page 317.For more information on the alarms of the object, refer to 10.8 - Interface alarms onpage 339.10.The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.11.The remote device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to remote.

220 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.6.3 G703 interface configuration attributesThis section describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl/g703/framing on page 221• crocusShdsl/g703/timeSlots on page 221• crocusShdsl/g703/coding on page 221• crocusShdsl/g703/crc4Insertion on page 222• crocusShdsl/g703/aisDetection on page 222• crocusShdsl/g703/sqThreshold on page 222• crocusShdsl/g703/sqTime on page 222• crocusShdsl/g703/jitterAttenuation on page 222• crocusShdsl/g703/saBits on page 223• crocusShdsl/g703/tests on page 223• crocusShdsl/g703/name on page 223• crocusShdsl/g703/clocking on page 224• crocusShdsl/g703/rdlDetect on page 224• crocusShdsl/g703/ on page 224

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 221Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/g703/framingThis attribute is only present on a G703 Nx64k interface.Use the framing attribute to select between unframed or framed mode:Default:unframedRange: framed / unframedValueunframedframedDescriptionIn unframed (or transparent) mode, a 2 Mbps data stream is sent transparentlyover the line.In framed (G.704 framing) mode, up to 32 time slots each containing a 64 kbpsdata stream can be sent over the line. Each 64 kbps time slot can be enabled ordisabled.For more information, refer to 6.8 - Configuring framing and time slots on page 143.crocusShdsl/g703/timeSlotsThis attribute is only present on a G703 Nx64k interface.Use the timeSlots attribute to enable or disable the individual 64 kbps time slots in the framed data stream.Important remark• The use of time slot 0 is not supported.• In case you use a G703 interface in one Crocus SHDSL and a serial interface is the other CrocusSHDSL, then the auto speed only works when more than 2 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 1pair version) or 4 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version) are selected.For more information, refer to 6.8 - Configuring framing and time slots on page 143.Default:ts0=1, other ts=0Range: enumerated, see belowcrocusShdsl/g703/codingUse the coding attribute to set the G703 interface encoding mode. Possiblevalues are:Default:hdb3Range: ami / hdb3Valueamihdb3DescriptionAlternate Mark Inversion is selected. This is a bipolar code with no zero substitution.High Density Bipolar 3 is selected. This is a modified bipolar code.With HDB3encoding, more than three consecutive zeroes occurring in the data are replacedby a substitution word. This to ensure a high pulse density. Therefore, data linksusing the HDB3 code can carry data patterns with a low 1 density. Most of theG703 applications use HDB3 encoding.

222 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/g703/crc4InsertionThis attribute is only present on a G703 Nx64k interface.Use the crc4Insertion attribute to determine whether the CRC-4 (cyclic redundancy check) is recalculatedbefore sending it to the interface. The CRC is used to check the data integrity on the G.703 connection.The crc4Insertion attribute has the following possible values:Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowValueautodisabledenabledDescriptionIn auto mode, CRC-4 insertion is …• disabled if the data is unframed,• enabled if the data is G.704 framed.CRC-4 insertion is disabled.CRC-4 insertion is enabled.crocusShdsl/g703/aisDetectionUse this attribute to enable or disable the detection of the Alarm Indication Signal.Default:enabledRange: enabled / disabledcrocusShdsl/g703/sqThresholdUse this attribute to set the signal quality threshold. This is the number oferrored seconds for which a signal quality alarm is generated.If the sqThreshold value, i.e. the number of errored seconds, is exceeded within the sqTime, then a signalquality (sq) alarm is generated. For example, if 10 (default) or more errored seconds occur within 1minute (default), then a signal quality alarm is generated.The sqThreshold value ranges from 0 up to 65535.Default:10Range: 0 … 65535crocusShdsl/g703/sqTimeUse this attribute to set the signal quality time. This is the period (in days,hours, minutes and seconds) during which the signal quality threshold ismeasured.If the sqThreshold value, i.e. the number of errored seconds, is exceeded within the sqTime, then a signalquality (sq) alarm is generated. For example, if 10 (default) or more errored seconds occur within 1minute (default), then a signal quality alarm is generated.The sqTime value ranges from 00000d 00h 00m 00s up to 24855d 03h 14m 07s.Default:00000d 00h 01m 00sRange: 00000d 00h 00m 00s -24855d 03h 14m 07scrocusShdsl/g703/jitterAttenuationDefault:32 bitsRange: 128 bits / 32 bitsUse the jitterAttenuation attribute to set the buffer depth of the jitter attenuator.The jitter attenuator of the Crocus SHDSL attenuates the clock and data jitter.The values of the jitterAttenuation attribute are 32 bits and 128 bits. You may wish to limit the buffer size to32 bits in applications where throughput delay is critical.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 223Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/g703/saBitsThis attribute is only present on a G703 Nx64k interface.Use the saBits attribute to determine whether and which management data is inserted in the SA-bits. Ifmanagement data is inserted in the SA-bits, then it is inserted in SA registers SA5, SA7 and SA8. SA4is used as a control register and contains bandwidth information.The saBits attribute has the following possible values:Default:pathManagementRange: enumerated, see belowValuetransparento10ManagementpathManagemento10-PathManagementDescriptionNo management data is inserted in the SA-bits. The SA-bits are passed transparently.This inserts the proprietary Telindus O10 protocol in the SA-bits. This allows youto forward management data over the G703 interface in a similar way as you canover the line or the control port. This allows more flexibility in managing your networkof Telindus devices.This inserts path management information in the SA-bits. This allows you to managecomplete paths instead of managing individual devices (i.e. elements).Formore information on path management, refer to the Path Management manual.This insert both the proprietary Telindus O10 protocol as the path managementinformation in the SA-bits.Note that forwarding management data over the G703 interface can be very slow. The speed liesbetween 200 and 2400 bps.crocusShdsl/g703/testsThis attribute is only present on a G703 Nx64k interface.Use the tests attribute to enable or disable the interface tests.The interface tests of the Crocus SHDSL are useful to trace possible problems. These interface testsare initiated by the application via the interface. If these tests are not supported by the application, it ispossible that an undesired test is activated resulting in a disturbance of the data transfer. Therefore, theyare disabled by default.The available interface tests are:• interfaceAl: interface Analogue Loop• interfaceRdl: interface Remote Digital LoopDefault:disabledRange: enabled / disabledFor more information on these tests, refer to Chapter 13 - Diagnostic tests on page 359.crocusShdsl/g703/nameUse the name attribute to assign an administrative name to the DTE interface.Default:Range: 0 … 24 characters

224 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/g703/clockingUse the clocking attribute to select a clocking mode.For more information, refer to 6.5 - Configuring the clocking mode on page 108.Default:externalRange: external / internalcrocusShdsl/g703/rdlDetectWhen set to disabled, this attribute prevents that a digital loop can be performedby a remote Crocus SHDSL on the local Crocus SHDSL.Default:enabledRange: disabled / enabledWhen rdlDetect is disabled, and a remote Crocus SHDSL initiates an RDL test, the local Crocus SHDSLwill not go in digital loop. However, the DTE interface of the remote Crocus SHDSL will be clamped anddata transfer is interrupted.crocusShdsl/g703/For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask, alarmLevel, remoteAlarmMask, alarmContactHighMask,alarmContactLowMask and on the alarms in general, refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarmattributes on page 317.For more information on the alarms of the object, refer to 10.8 - Interface alarms onpage 339.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 225Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.6.4 Dual Port G703-Serial interface configuration attributesThis section describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl/dualPort/multiplexingMode on page 226• crocusShdsl/dualPort/g703/stationClockFallback on page 226• crocusShdsl/dualPort/g703/fallbackClocking on page 226• crocusShdsl/dualPort/rs530/x21Conversion on page 227This section lists the configuration attributes that are specific for the Dual Port G703-Serial interface. Allother attributes of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface are the same as those of the G703 (Nx64k) andRS530 interface. Therefore, for more information on these attributes, refer to …• 7.6.1 - RS530, V35 and V36 interface configuration attributes on page 213• 7.6.3 - G703 interface configuration attributes on page 220.There are also some specific remarks concerning clocking, framing, speed and time slot selection on theDual Port G703-Serial interface. For more information on …• clocking, refer to 6.5.8 - Special points of interest concerning clocking on some interfaces onpage 119.• framing, refer to 6.9 - Configuring the user speed and time slots on the Dual Port G703-Serial interfaceon page 147.• speed and time slot selection, refer to 6.9 - Configuring the user speed and time slots on the DualPort G703-Serial interface on page 147.

226 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/dualPort/multiplexingModeUse the multiplexingMode attribute to determine whether you use both theG703 and serial interface or the G703 interface only.The multiplexingMode attribute has the following possible values:Default:multiplexedRange: enumerated, see belowValuemultiplexedg703OnlyDescriptionThe Dual Port G703-Serial interface multiplexes two data streams using Time DivisionMultiplexing:• one stream form the G703 interface,• one stream from the serial interface.Only the data stream from the G703 interface is taken. In this case, the Dual PortG703-Serial interface acts as a regular G703 Nx64k interface. The opposite, i.e.the serial interface only, is not possible.RemarkIf on the G703 part of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface you set the framingattribute to unframed, then the Dual Port G703-Serial interface always works inG703 only mode, independently of the setting of the multiplexingMode attribute.crocusShdsl/dualPort/g703/stationClockFallbackDefault:internalRange: external / internalUse the stationClockFallback attribute to determine to which clocking mode theCrocus SHDSL has to fall back in case you configured the Crocus SHDSL in station clock mode but thestation clock signal is no longer present. You can use this attribute to insure that even when the stationclock signal drops, only one master clock is present in the set-up.The stationClockFallback attribute has the following possible values:ValueinternalexternalDescriptionThe clocking mode falls back to internal clock mode in case the station clock signalis no longer present.The clocking mode falls back to external clock mode in case the station clock signalis no longer present.crocusShdsl/dualPort/g703/fallbackClockingDefault:internalRange: slaveReceive / internalUse the fallbackClocking attribute to determine to which clocking mode theCrocus SHDSL has to fall back in case you configured the Crocus SHDSL in external clock mode butthe external clock signal is no longer present. You can use this attribute to insure that even when theexternal clock signal drops, only one master clock is present in the set-up.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 227Reference manualConfiguration attributes.The fallbackClocking attribute has the following possible values:ValueinternalslaveReceiveDescriptionThe clocking mode falls back to internal clock mode in case the external clock signalis no longer present.The clocking mode falls back to slave receive clock mode in case the externalclock signal is no longer present.crocusShdsl/dualPort/rs530/x21ConversionUse the x21Conversion attribute to determine whether you use the Dual PortG703-Serial interface as X.21 interface (enabled) or not (disabled).Default:disabledRange: enabled / disabledYou can set the straps of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface in such a way that it operates in RS-530,RS-530A, V.35, V.36 or X.21 mode. When you select another operation mode, you also have to use thecorrect interface conversion cable. What is more, in case you set the Dual Port G703-Serial interface toX.21 mode you also have to set the x21Conversion attribute enabled. This to insure correct operation whenusing the Dual Port G703-Serial interface as X.21 interface.For more information on setting the Dual Port G703-Serial interface in an other mode and for more informationon the interface conversion cables, refer to the manual of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface.

228 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.6.5 Bridge interface configuration attributesThis describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl/bridge/IanFilter on page 229• crocusShdsl/bridge/name on page 229• crocusShdsl/bridge/speed on page 229• crocusShdsl/bridge/speed2P on page 229• crocusShdsl>/bridge/clocking on page 230• crocusShdsl/bridge/transmitSampleClock on page 230• crocusShdsl/bridge/rdlDetect on page 230• crocusShdsl/bridge/ on page 230

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 229Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/bridge/IanFilterUse the lanFilter attribute to enable or disable the filter functionality of thebridge. The lanFilter attribute can be set to:Default:enabledRange: disabled / enabledValueenableddisabledDescriptionThe bridge acts as a filter.Refer to Example of a bridge set-up on page 157. Data coming from network 1, willonly be let through by the bridge if this data has a destination outside network 1 orif it has a broadcast or multicast address. This means the bridge filters the dataand decreases the traffic on the serial line.The bridge acts as a repeater.Refer to Example of a bridge set-up on page 157. All the data which originatesfrom network 1 will be let through to network 2. Even if the data is not destined forthat network.crocusShdsl/bridge/nameUse the name attribute to assign an administrative name to the DTE interface.Default:Range: 0 … 64 characterscrocusShdsl/bridge/speedUse the speed attribute to set the speed of the DTE interface.For more information, refer to 6.6 - Configuring the user speed on page 132.Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowcrocusShdsl/bridge/speed2PDefault:autoRange: enumerated, see belowThis attribute is only present on a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version. Usethe speed2P attribute to set the speed of the DTE interface in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (if it is truly in2 pair operation).Important remark• In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version, set the speed2P attribute of either the central orremote Crocus SHDSL to auto, but not of both. Else the 2 line pairs could train at a different speedwhich is not allowed.• In case you use a G703 interface in one Crocus SHDSL and a serial interface is the other CrocusSHDSL, then the auto speed only works when more than 2 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 1pair version) or 4 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version) are selected.• If both the central 12 and remote 13 Crocus SHDSL are configured in external clocking mode and anexternal clock signal is present, then it is the central Crocus SHDSL modem who determines thespeed on which the line trains.For more information, refer to 6.6 - Configuring the user speed on page 132.12.The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.13.The remote device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to remote.

230 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl>/bridge/clockingUse the clocking attribute to select a clocking mode.For more information, refer to 6.5 - Configuring the clocking mode on page 108.Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowcrocusShdsl/bridge/transmitSampleClockUse the transmitSampleClock attribute to set the transmit sample clock to normalor invert.Default:normalRange: invert / normalIn case the clocking mode is set to an alternative mode, then inverting the sample clock may solve thepossible problem of too long delays on the transmit data in comparison to the transmit clock.crocusShdsl/bridge/rdlDetectWhen set to disabled, this attribute prevents that a digital loop can be performedby a remote Crocus SHDSL on the local Crocus SHDSL.Default:enabledRange: disabled / enabledWhen rdlDetect is disabled, and a remote Crocus SHDSL initiates an RDL test, the local Crocus SHDSLwill not go in digital loop. However, the DTE interface of the remote Crocus SHDSL will be clamped anddata transfer is interrupted.crocusShdsl/bridge/For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask, alarmLevel, remoteAlarmMask, alarmContactHighMask,alarmContactLowMask and on the alarms in general, refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarmattributes on page 317.For more information on the alarms of the object, refer to 10.8 - Interface alarms onpage 339.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 231Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.6.6 Router interface configuration attributesThis describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl/router/name on page 232• crocusShdsl/router/speed on page 232• crocusShdsl/router/speed2P on page 232• crocusShdsl/router/clocking on page 232• crocusShdsl/router/transmitSampleClock on page 232• crocusShdsl/router/rdlDetect on page 233• crocusShdsl/router/ on page 233

232 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/router/nameUse the name attribute to assign an administrative name to the DTE interface.Default:Range: 0 … 64 characterscrocusShdsl/router/speedUse the speed attribute to set the speed of the DTE interface.For more information, refer to 6.6 - Configuring the user speed on page 132.Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowcrocusShdsl/router/speed2PDefault:autoRange: enumerated, see belowThis attribute is only present on a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version. Usethe speed2P attribute to set the speed of the DTE interface in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (if it is truly in2 pair operation).Important remark• In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version, set the speed2P attribute of either the central orremote Crocus SHDSL to auto, but not of both. Else the 2 line pairs could train at a different speedwhich is not allowed.• In case you use a G703 interface in one Crocus SHDSL and a serial interface is the other CrocusSHDSL, then the auto speed only works when more than 2 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 1pair version) or 4 time slots (in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version) are selected.• If both the central 14 and remote 15 Crocus SHDSL are configured in external clocking mode and anexternal clock signal is present, then it is the central Crocus SHDSL modem who determines thespeed on which the line trains.For more information, refer to 6.6 - Configuring the user speed on page 132.crocusShdsl/router/clockingUse the clocking attribute to select a clocking mode.For more information, refer to 6.5 - Configuring the clocking mode on page 108.Default:autoRange: enumerated, see belowcrocusShdsl/router/transmitSampleClockUse the transmitSampleClock attribute to set the transmit sample clock to normalor invert.Default:normalRange: invert / normalIn case the clocking mode is set to an alternative mode, then inverting the sample clock may solve thepossible problem of too long delays on the transmit data in comparison to the transmit clock.14.The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.15.The remote device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to remote.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 233Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/router/rdlDetectWhen set to disabled, this attribute prevents that a digital loop can be performedby a remote Crocus SHDSL on the local Crocus SHDSL.Default:enabledRange: disabled / enabledWhen rdlDetect is disabled, and a remote Crocus SHDSL initiates an RDL test, the local Crocus SHDSLwill not go in digital loop. However, the DTE interface of the remote Crocus SHDSL will be clamped anddata transfer is interrupted.crocusShdsl/router/For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask, alarmLevel, remoteAlarmMask, alarmContactHighMask,alarmContactLowMask and on the alarms in general, refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarmattributes on page 317.For more information on the alarms of the object, refer to 10.8 - Interface alarms onpage 339.

234 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.7.7 Management configuration attributesThis section describes the following configuration attributes:• crocusShdsl/management/cms2Address on page 235• crocusShdsl/management/consoleNoTrafficTimeOut on page 235• crocusShdsl/management/ctrlPortProtocol on page 236• crocusShdsl/management/internalDmm on page 237Also refer to 6.12.1 - Rules of thumb and remarks concerning management on page 159 for importantrules of thumb regading management.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 235Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/management/cms2AddressDefault:0Range: 1 … 65535Use the cms2Address attribute to configure an absolute address in the CrocusSHDSL. The absolute addressing range goes from 1 up to 65535. This address can then be used to connectwith TMA. Refer to 4.1 - Starting TMA on the Crocus SHDSL on page 58.If you want to connect with TMA using relative addressing, you do not have to configure anything. In thatcase you can leave the cms2Address attribute at its default value, being 0.Refer to 6.12.2 - Using relative or absolute addressing on page 160 for more information on relative andabsolute addressing.crocusShdsl/management/consoleNoTrafficTimeOutYou can open a TMA, CLI or ATWIN session on the Crocus SHDSL throughthe control connector. These sessions close automatically if there is no userinteraction during a certain time-out period. This time-out period can be set with the consoleNoTrafficTimeOutattribute.The purpose of such a timer is to protect the Crocus SHDSL against unauthorised access in case thelast user did not close his session.The consoleNoTrafficTimeOut value ranges from 00000d 00h 00m 00s up to 24855d 03h 14m 07s.Default:00000d 00h 30m00sRange: 00000d 00h 30m …24855d 03h 14m 07s

236 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/management/ctrlPortProtocolDefault:consoleRange: management / consoleThe setting of the ctrlPortProtocol attribute depends on what you connect tothe control connector of the Crocus SHDSL. This is explained in the following table:ValuemanagementconsoleDescriptionSelect this value if you want to connect the control connector of the Crocus SHDSLto …• a management concentrator (e.g. the Orchid 1003 LAN or Telindus 1035Orchid) for management purposes.• the control connector of another Telindus device using a crossed cable (i.e.back-to-back) in order to create an extended management link. For more informationon extended management links, refer to Relative addressing onpage 160 and Forwarding management information on page 162).When connecting the control connector of the Crocus SHDSL to a COM port ofyour computer, you can still open a TMA session on the Crocus SHDSL. However,you can not open a CLI or ATWIN session.Select this value if you want to connect the control connector of the Crocus SHDSLto a COM port of your computer in order to manage the Crocus SHDSL locallyusing TMA, CLI or ATWIN.Pay attention:• When managing a remote Crocus Router Interface (2M or 10M) module with a Crocus SHDSL CV,following settings can be used:- console: can be used in any case- management: can only be used when the Crocus Router Interface (2M or 10M) module has an absoluteaddress.• When managing a remote Crocus Router Interface (2M or 10M) module with a Crocus SHDSL TT,the ctrlPortProtocol attribute must always be set to management.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7 237Reference manualConfiguration attributes.crocusShdsl/management/internalDmmThis attribute is only present on a CV.Use the internalDmm attribute on the Card Version to enable or disable the flow of management databetween modem A and modem B. The following example tries to clarify this.ExampleDefault:disabledRange: enabled / disabledThe following table shows how the internalDmm attribute influences the accessibility of the Telindusdevices in the set-up above:internalDmmdisabledenabledDescriptionThe PC running TMA can only reach Crocus SHDSL TT 1, Crocus SHDSL CVmodem A and router interface A.The PC running TMA can reach any device through the control port of CrocusSHDSL TT 1. You can even reach modem B of the Crocus SHDSL CV, includingits router interface and remote counterpart.Note again that it is best to …• set the ctrlPortProtocol attribute to management.• use absolute addressing.

238 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 7Reference manualConfiguration attributes.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 239Reference manualStatus attributes8 Status attributesThis chapter discusses the status attributes of the Crocus SHDSL. The following gives an overview ofthis chapter.• 8.1 - Status attribute overview on page 240• 8.2 - General status attributes on page 245• 8.3 - Line status attributes on page 249• 8.4 - Line pair status attributes on page 258• 8.5 - Remote power status attributes on page 261• 8.6 - Repeater and end status attributes on page 263• 8.7 - DTE Interface status attributes on page 268• 8.8 - Management status attributes on page 286• 8.9 - Operating system status attributes on page 288

240 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes8.1 Status attribute overview> crocusShdslsysDescrsysObjectIDsysUpTimesysServicesmessagesdeviceIdconfigurationSavingbootVersionloaderVersionflash1VersionAction: Cold Boot>> lineifDescrifTypeifSpeedifOperStatusminLinePairSpeedmaxLinePairSpeedframerTypetestTypetestOriginatortestStatusmaxSpeedSearchmaxSpeedResulterrorCountregionasymmetricPsdlinePairsSwapped 1numDiscoveredRepeaterseocAlarmThresholdsAction: testActivationAction: clearErrorCounterAction: maximumSpeedSearch1. 2P version only

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 241Reference manualStatus attributes>>> linePair[ ] 2ifSpeedifOperStatusstatustimeSinceLastRetraintransmitPowerlineAttenuationsignalNoisestepupThresholdactualBitRate>>>> PowerSource[ ] 3versionstatus>> repeater[ ] 4vendorIdvendorModelvendorSerialvendorSoftVersioneocSoftVersionshdslVersioneocStateeocAlarmThresholdsAction: loopbackActivation>>> networkLinePair[ ] 2lineAttenuationsignalNoise>>> customerLinePair[ ] 2lineAttenuationsignalNoise>> end 4vendorIdvendorModelvendorSerialvendorSoftVersioneocSoftVersionshdslVersioneocStateeocAlarmThresholds2. in case of a 2P version, two linePair objects are present: linePair[1] and linePair[2].3. not present by default, has to be added (CV only).4. not present by default, is added automatically when setting the line/eocHandling attribute.

242 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes>>> linePair[ ] 2lineAttenuationsignalNoise>> rs530, v35, v36 5txdItu103rxdItu104rtsItu105ctsItu106dsrItuT107dcdItu109rdlItu140alItu141tiItu142ifDescrifTypeifSpeedifClockingremIfClockingextClockSourceifOperStatus>> x21 5txdItu103rxdItu104indicatorifDescrifTypeifSpeedifClockingremIfClockingextClockSourceifOperStatus>> g703 5timeslots 6txdItu103rxdItu104losaislfa 6rai 6ifDescrifTypeifSpeedifClockingifOperStatus5. only present when the corresponding interface is used6. G703 Nx64 only

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 243Reference manualStatus attributes>> dualPort 5>>> g703timeSlotstxdItu103rxdItu104losaislfa 6rai 6ifDescrifTypeifSpeedifClockingifOperStatus>>> rs530txdItu103rxdItu104rtsItu105ctsItu106dsrItuT107dcdItu109rdlItu140alItu141tiItu142ifDescrifTypeifSpeedifClockingifOperStatus>> bridge 5wanTxdwanRxdifDescrifTypeifSpeedifClockingremIfClockingifOperStatus

244 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes>> router 5wanTxdwanRxdifDescrifTypeifSpeedifClockingremIfClockingifOperStatus>> managementcardSlotNumber 7cardNestNumber 7modemPosition 7>> operatingSystemtaskInfo7. CV only

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 245Reference manualStatus attributes8.2 General status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl/sysDescr on page 246• crocusShdsl/sysObjectID on page 246• crocusShdsl/sysUpTime on page 246• crocusShdsl/sysServices on page 246• crocusShdsl/messages on page 246• crocusShdsl/deviceId on page 247• crocusShdsl/configurationSaving on page 247• crocusShdsl/bootVersion on page 247• crocusShdsl/loaderVersion on page 247• crocusShdsl/flash1Version on page 248This section describes the following actions:• crocusShdsl/Cold Boot on page 248

246 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/sysDescrThis is a textual description of the device. This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.Example: Telindus Crocus SHDSL TT V35 T1234/00100 01/01/00 12:00. In this example the following parametersare visible:• Telindus Crocus SHDSL is the modem type• TT is the modem version• V35 is the interface type• T1234/00100 is the application software code and version• 01/01/00 12:00 is the application software release date and time.crocusShdsl/sysObjectIDThis is the SNMP identification string. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.Example: 1.3.6.1.4.1.776.22.crocusShdsl/sysUpTimeThis is the elapsed time since last power-on or cold boot of the Crocus SHDSL.Example: 00005d 02h 42m 15s, which means 5 days, 2 hours, 42 minutes and 15 seconds.crocusShdsl/sysServicesThis is the SNMP service identification. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.crocusShdsl/messagesThis table displays informative and error messages, e.g. Reconfigured, Cold Boot, … The messages tabledisplays maximum 20 messages.If no TMA, CLI or ATWIN session is established through the control connector, then the messages arealso sent to the control connector. This means that if you open a terminal emulation session on the controlconnector, you can monitor these messages. If you hit the ENTER key, the messages stop and youget a password prompt (CLI mode).

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 247Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/deviceIdThis displays a unique code. This code is programmed into the Crocus SHDSLbefore it leaves the factory.You can use this code for inventory purposes.crocusShdsl/configurationSavingThis attribute indicates when the Crocus SHDSL is writing its (new) configuration to the flash memory.ValuebusydoneDescriptionThe Crocus SHDSL is busy writing its configuration to the flash memory. Duringthis state, do not power-down or reboot the Crocus SHDSL else the new configurationwill be lost.The Crocus SHDSL has finished writing its configuration to the flash memory.crocusShdsl/bootVersionThis displays the code and version of the boot software currently used in the Crocus SHDSL. For moreinformation on boot software, refer to 12.1 - What is boot, loader and application software? on page 348.Example: Txxxx/xxxxx 01/01/00 12:00. In this example the following parameters are visible:• Txxxx is the boot software code for this device• /xxxxx is the boot software version• 01/01/00 is the boot software release date• 12:00 is the boot software release time.crocusShdsl/loaderVersionThis displays the code and version of the loader software currently used in the Crocus SHDSL. For moreinformation on loader software, refer to 12.1 - What is boot, loader and application software? onpage 348.Example: Txxxx/xxxxx 01/01/00 12:00. In this example the following parameters are visible:• Txxxx is the loader software code for this device• /xxxxx is the loader software version• 01/01/00 is the loader software release date• 12:00 is the loader software release time.

248 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/flash1VersionThis displays the code and version of the application software, also called firmware, currently used in theCrocus SHDSL. For more information on application software, refer to 12.1 - What is boot, loader andapplication software? on page 348.Example: Txxxx/xxxxx 01/01/00 12:00. In this example the following parameters are visible:• Txxxx is the application software code for this device• /xxxxx is the application software version• 01/01/00 is the application software release date• 12:00 is the application software release time.crocusShdsl/Cold BootThis action will reboot the Crocus SHDSL while the power stays up (the Crocus SHDSL also reboots ifit is powered down and up again).

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 249Reference manualStatus attributes8.3 Line status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/ifDescr on page 250• crocusShdsl/line/ifType on page 250• crocusShdsl/line/ifSpeed on page 250• crocusShdsl/line/ifOperStatus on page 250• crocusShdsl/line/minLinePairSpeed on page 250• crocusShdsl/line/maxLinePairSpeed on page 251• crocusShdsl/line/framerType on page 252• crocusShdsl/line/testType on page 252• crocusShdsl/line/testOriginator on page 253• crocusShdsl/line/testStatus on page 253• crocusShdsl/line/maxSpeedSearch on page 254• crocusShdsl/line/maxSpeedResult on page 254• crocusShdsl/line/errorCount on page 255• crocusShdsl/line/region on page 255• crocusShdsl/line/asymmetricPsd on page 255• crocusShdsl/line/linePairsSwapped on page 255• crocusShdsl/line/numDiscoveredRepeaters on page 255• crocusShdsl/line/eocAlarmThresholds on page 256This section describes the following actions:• crocusShdsl/line/testActivation on page 256• crocusShdsl/line/clearErrorCounter on page 256• crocusShdsl/line/maximumSpeedSearch on page 257

250 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/ifDescrThis attribute displays the interface description. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.The ifDescr value for the line object is line.crocusShdsl/line/ifTypeThis attribute displays the interface type. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.The ifType value for the line object is other.crocusShdsl/line/ifSpeedThis attribute displays the current line speed in bits per second (bps), e.g. 2048000.crocusShdsl/line/ifOperStatusThis attribute displays the current operation status of the line. Possible operation status values are:ValueupdowntestingDescriptionThe line is up, data transfer is possible.The line is down, data transfer is not possible.A test is active. For more information on type, originator and status of the test referto the line status attributes testType, testOriginator and testStatus.crocusShdsl/line/minLinePairSpeedThis attribute displays the minimum line pair speed. The value depends on how the user speed and/orthe minimum line pair speed are configured. Refer to What do the minLinePairSpeed and maxLinePairSpeedstatus attributes display? on page 251 for more information.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 251Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/maxLinePairSpeedThis attribute displays the maximum line pair speed. The value depends on how the user speed and/orthe minimum line pair speed are configured. Refer to What do the minLinePairSpeed and maxLinePairSpeedstatus attributes display? for more information.What do the minLinePairSpeed and maxLinePairSpeed status attributes display?What is configured?user speed(fixed)user speed(auto)user speed(fixed) + linespeedDescriptionIn case you configure a fixed user speed (i.e. you set the configuration attributespeed(2P) to a fixed value), then the line trains at the fixed user speed.So in thiscase, the status attribute minLinePairSpeed displays a speed that is equal to the fixeduser speed (or half the fixed user speed in case of a 2P version). What is more,the status attributes minLinePairSpeed and maxLinePairSpeed display the same speed.In case you configure an auto user speed (i.e. you set the configuration attributespeed(2P) to auto), then during the training cycle the lowest and highest possible linespeed is determined. Then the line trains at the highest possible speed and thisbecomes the user speed.So in this case, the status attribute minLinePairSpeed displaysthe lowest possible speed that could be achieved on the line pair(s) duringthe training cycle. The status attribute maxLinePairSpeed displays the highest possiblespeed that could be achieved on the line pair(s) during the training cycle.In case you configure a fixed user speed (i.e. you set the configuration attributespeed(2P) to a fixed value) and a minimum line pair speed (using the configurationattribute minLinePairSpeed) and the user speed is lower than the line speed, then theline trains at the configured line speed.So in this case, the status attribute min-LinePairSpeed displays a speed that is equal to the configured minimum line pairspeed. What is more, the status attributes minLinePairSpeed and maxLinePairSpeed displaythe same speed.RemarkNote that this only applies when the configured user speed is lower than the configuredline speed. In case the configured user speed is higher than the configuredline speed, the user speed (fixed) situation applies. See above.user speed(auto) + linespeedIn case you configure an auto user speed (i.e. you set the configuration attributespeed(2P) to auto) and a minimum line pair speed (using the configuration attributeminLinePairSpeed), then during the training cycle the lowest (which is the minimumline pair speed) and highest possible line speed is determined. Then the line trainsat the highest possible speed and this becomes the user speed.So in this case, thestatus attribute minLinePairSpeed displays a speed that is equal to the configuredminimum line pair speed. The status attribute maxLinePairSpeed displays the highestpossible speed that could be achieved on the line pair(s) during the training cycle.

252 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/framerTypeThis attribute displays which type of framing is used on the SHDSL line: Nx64 or slotted E1.The line of the Crocus SHDSL can operate in two modes: Nx64 or slotted E1. These modes are notdirectly user configurable (i.e. there is no attribute with which you can select these modes), but dependingon which interface is used, which user/line speed is chosen, etc. the Crocus SHDSL will select oneof these modes.ModeNx64slotted E1DescriptionIn this mode the data on the SHDSL line is a continuous bit stream with a speedof N x 64 kbps, where N ranges from 1 up to 36 (or from 2 up to 72 in case of aCrocus SHDSL 2 pair version). So the line speed ranges from 64 kbps up to 2304kbps (or 128 kbps up to 4608 kbps in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version).In this mode the data on the SHDSL line is put in N x 64 kbps time slots (similar toframed data on a G.703 interface), where N ranges from 3 up to 32 (or from 6 upto 64 in case of a Crocus SHDSL 2 pair version). So the line speed ranges from192 kbps up to 2048 kbps (or 384 kbps up to 4096 kbps in case of a CrocusSHDSL 2 pair version).crocusShdsl/line/testTypeThis attribute displays which test is currently active. The possible indications are:ValuenoaldlrdletalEtrdlEtDescriptionNo test is active.An analogue loop is active.A digital loop is active.A remote digital loop is active.The error test pattern generator / detector is active.An analogue loop in combination with an error test is active.A remote digital loop in combination with an error test is active.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 253Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/testOriginatorThis attribute displays the origin of the active test. The possible indications are:ValuenmskeyboardinterfaceremoteunknownDescriptionThe test is initiated by the management system (e.g. TMA).The test is initiated by the keyboard or the EasyConnect via the test "window" ofthe Crocus SHDSL. Refer to 5.5 - The test window on page 77.The test is initiated by the application, via the interface.The test is initiated by the remote Crocus SHDSL.There are two possibilities:• No test is running.• For some reason it is not possible to define the origin of the test.crocusShdsl/line/testStatusThis attribute displays the status of the active test. The possible indications are:ValueprogressingrunningendingunknownDescriptionThe test is starting.The test is running.The test is ending.There are two possibilities:• No test is running.• For some reason it is not possible to retrieve the status of the test.

254 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/maxSpeedSearchThis attribute shows the status of the maximumSpeedSearch action: refer to crocusShdsl/line/maximum-SpeedSearch on page 257. The possible indications are:ValueidleprogressingabortedcompletedDescriptionNo maximumSpeedSearch action has been performed.The maximumSpeedSearch action is running.The maximumSpeedSearch action stopped without result.The maximumSpeedSearch action is finished. The result is displayed in the maxSpeed-Result attribute.crocusShdsl/line/maxSpeedResultThis attribute displays the maximum speed that was achieved during the execution of the maximumSpeed-Search action: refer to crocusShdsl/line/maximumSpeedSearch on page 257.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 255Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/errorCountThis attribute displays the amount of detected errors since the start of an ET, AL-ET or RDL-ET test.Every time a new ET, AL-ET or RDL-ET is started, the errorCount attribute is reset to 0.crocusShdsl/line/regionThis attribute displays how you configured the region configuration attribute (annexA, annexB or auto).crocusShdsl/line/asymmetricPsdThis attribute displays whether asymmetric PSD is currently active or not.crocusShdsl/line/linePairsSwappedThis attribute is only present on the Crocus SHDSL 2P version.This attribute indicates whether the 2 line pairs have been swapped when connecting the central withthe remote device. Possible values are:ValueyesnounknownDescriptionThe line pairs are swapped.The line pairs are not swapped.The Crocus SHDSL is unable to determine whether the line pairs have beenswapped (e.g. because it is still training).crocusShdsl/line/numDiscoveredRepeatersThis attribute displays the number of Crocus SHDSL Repeaters that the Crocus SHDSL discovered onthe SHDSL line.

256 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/eocAlarmThresholdsThis attribute displays the value of the lineAttenuation and signalNoise elements as set in configurationattribute crocusShdsl/line/linkAlarmThresholds.However, when the configuration attribute crocusShdsl/line/eocHandling of the central device in the linkhas been set to alarmConfiguration, the central device will impose its values of lineAttenuation and signalNoiseelements on the other devices in the link, as described in 6.2.2 - The EOC handling attribute on page 85.The eocAlarmTresholds attribute will then display the values of the lineAttenuation and signalNoise elements ofthe central device in the link.The eocAlarmThresholds structure contains the following elements:• lineAttenuation• signalNoisecrocusShdsl/line/testActivationUse this action to perform a test on the Crocus SHDSL. These tests are useful to trace possible problems.Possible tests are: no, al, dl, rdl, et, alEt, rdlEt.To execute a test, proceed as follows:StepAction1 In the TMA window, select the object line and the group Performance or Status.2 In the action window of TMA, click the left mouse button on the field under the headingArgument Value.⇒A drop down box appears.3 In the drop down box, select the test you want to execute.4 Press the right mouse button and select Execute.For more information on these tests, refer to Chapter 13 - Diagnostic tests on page 359.crocusShdsl/line/clearErrorCounterUse this action to clear the value of the errorCount attribute. This could be useful, for example, to reset theerror counter after the unstable period (in which errors occur anyhow) shortly after the initiation of a test.Double click on the clearErrorCounter string to execute the action.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 257Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/maximumSpeedSearchUse this action to determine the highest possible line speed that can be achieved between the centraland remote Crocus SHDSL. Double click on the maximumSpeedSearch string to execute the action.When you execute this test, the following happens:PhaseAction1 The Crocus SHDSL interrupts the normal data transfer.2 Both local and remote Crocus SHDSL go to auto speed mode in order to determine thehighest possible line speed.Meanwhile, the status of the test can be monitored with themaxSpeedSearch attribute.3 When the test ends, the result is displayed by the maxSpeedResult attribute.4 The Crocus SHDSL resumes normal data transfer at the speed that was selected beforethe test.• The Crocus SHDSL has to be in data state (i.e. after a successful training sequence and when thedata connection is up) before you can execute the maximumSpeedSearch action.• While the maximumSpeedSearch action is running, no data transmission is possible.

258 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes8.4 Line pair status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/ifSpeed on page 259• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/ifOperStatus on page 259• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/status on page 259• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/timeSinceLastRetrain on page 259• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/transmitPower on page 260• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/lineAttenuation on page 260• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/signalNoise on page 260• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/stepupThreshold on page 260• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/actualBitRate on page 260In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P, two linePair objects are present: linePair [1] and linePair [2].

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 259Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/ifSpeedThis attribute displays the line pair speed, in bits per second (bps), when the line pair is in data state.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/ifOperStatusThis attribute displays the current operation status of the line. The possible indications are:ValueupdowntestingDescriptionThe line is up, data transfer is possible.The line is down, data transfer is not possible.A test is active. For more information on type, originator and status of the test referto the line status attributes testType, testOriginator and testStatus.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/statusThis attribute displays the bit-pump its training state machine stages. It shows the progress of the trainingsequence. The most important indications are:ValueidledataStateDescriptionNo data connection is present. This is the initial state.A data connection is present. The training sequence was successful and the bitpumpsare ready to transmit data.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/timeSinceLastRetrainThis attribute displays the time the line is in data state since the last retrain cycle.

260 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/transmitPowerThis attribute displays the current transmit power in dB, e.g. 7.5.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/lineAttenuationThis attribute displays the current line attenuation in dB, e.g. 11.0.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/signalNoiseThis attribute displays the current signal to noise ratio of the line in dB, e.g. 2.5.The status attributes transmitPower, lineAttenuation and signalNoise do not display meaningful informationwhen the line is in analogue loop (AL) or when it is not trained. These attributes are only relevant for atrained line.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/stepupThresholdThis attribute displays the step-up threshold in dB.If step-up retraining is enabled (i.e. the stepupMargin element in the line/retrain configuration structure is setto any value other than disabled), then the Crocus SHDSL will retrain at a higher speed if the measuredsignal to noise ratio exceeds the step-up threshold value.The stepupThreshold value =• the signal to noise ratio at the moment the line entered the data state (i.e. shortly after a successfultraining cycle)+• the stepupMargin value.Refer to crocusShdsl/line/retrain on page 198 for more information.If the stepupThreshold attribute displays 0.0, then this means that step-up retraining is disabled (i.e. thestepupMargin element in the line/retrain configuration is set to disabled).crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/actualBitRateThis attribute displays the maximum speed, in bits per second (bps), that could be negotiated on the linepair during the training sequence.The actualBitRate can be higher than the ifSpeed, eg. if the minLinePairSpeed is enabled.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 261Reference manualStatus attributes8.5 Remote power status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/pwrSource/status on page 262• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/pwrSource/version on page 262

262 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/pwrSource/statusThis attribute displays the status of the Remote Power Source module. The possible indications are:ValueactivehwFailedhwDisabledThe Remote Power source module …is active and operates normal.is defective.has been disabled by the dedicated hardware strap on the Remote Power sourcemodule. In this case it is not possible to enable remote powering via a managementtool.mgtDisabled has been disabled using the configuration attribute pwrSource. Refer to 7.5 -Remote power configuration attributes on page 210.noCurrentoverCurrentonly has to deliver a current smaller than 15 mA. This might indicate that:• the remote modem is fed by a power supply and therefore does not requireremote power over the line.• the remote modem is defective and therefore does not longer require supplycurrent.• the Remote Power source module is defective.• the line is interrupted.has to deliver a current higher than 60 mA. This might indicate that:• the remote modem is defective and a short circuit has occurred.• the Remote Power source module is defective.• the line is short circuited.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/pwrSource/versionThis attribute displays the version of the Remote Power source module its software.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 263Reference manualStatus attributes8.6 Repeater and end status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl/end/vendorId on page 264• crocusShdsl/end/vendorModel on page 264• crocusShdsl/end/vendorSerial on page 264• crocusShdsl/end/vendorSoftVersion on page 264• crocusShdsl/end/eocSoftVersion on page 265• crocusShdsl/end/shdslVersion on page 265• crocusShdsl/end/eocState on page 265• crocusShdsl/end/eocAlarmThresholds on page 266• crocusShdsl/end/linePair[ ]/lineAttenuation on page 267• crocusShdsl/end/linePair[ ]/signalNoise on page 267This section describes the following actions:• crocusShdsl/repeater/loopbackActivation on page 267• The repeater[ ] and the end[ ] objects are not present in the containment tree by default. They are addedautomatically when you configure the eocHandling attribute. Refer to 6.2 - Configuring EOC handlingon page 83.• Exactly which information is retrieved from the remote SHDSL device(s) through the EOC channeldepends on the setting of the eocHandling attribute. Refer to 6.2.4 - EOC retrieved information onpage 86.• The repeater[ ] and end objects contain the same attributes, therefore only the attributes of the endobject are listed here.• When the Crocus SHDSL is configured for 1 pair operation, the repeater[ ] and end[ ] objects networkLinePair[2]and customerLinePair[2] still appear in the containment tree (although 1 pair operation hasbeen configured).

264 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/end/vendorIdThis attribute is only retrieved in case the eocHandling attribute is set to discovery, inventory, info or alarmConfiguration.This attribute displays information about the vendor of the repeater or end device. The vendorId structurecontains the following elements:• countryCode E.g. 65295 for Belgium.• providerCode E.g. TLS_ for Telindus.• vendorSpecificcrocusShdsl/end/vendorModelThis attribute is only retrieved in case the eocHandling attribute is set to inventory, info or alarmConfiguration.This attribute displays the model of the repeater or end device. E.g. SHDSL TT 2P for a Crocus SHDSLTable Top 2 pair version.crocusShdsl/end/vendorSerialThis attribute is only retrieved in case the eocHandling attribute is set to inventory, info or alarmConfiguration.This attribute displays the serial number of the repeater or end device. For a Telindus devices this is thedeviceId attribute.crocusShdsl/end/vendorSoftVersionThis attribute is only retrieved in case the eocHandling attribute is set to inventory, info or alarmConfiguration.This attribute displays the version of the firmware used on the repeater or end device. For a Telindusdevice this is the part after "/" of the T-code string displayed in the flashVersion attribute.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 265Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/end/eocSoftVersionThis attribute is only retrieved in case the eocHandling attribute is set to discovery, inventory, info or alarmConfiguration.This attribute displays the EOC software version used on the repeater or end device.crocusShdsl/end/shdslVersionThis attribute is only retrieved in case the eocHandling attribute is set to discovery, inventory, info or alarmConfiguration.This attribute displays the SHDSL version used on the repeater or end device.crocusShdsl/end/eocStateThis attribute is only retrieved in case the eocHandling attribute is set to discovery, inventory, info or alarmConfiguration.This attribute displays the state of the EOC channel.Remark about the repeater object• While the modem is in loop condition (AL), the repeater cannot be reached. Therefore, the repeater/eocState attribute will show offline while an AL test is activated.• During a DL test, the eocState is not changed because the repeater can still be reached with EOC messages.

266 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/end/eocAlarmThresholdsThis attribute is only retrieved in case the eocHandling attribute is set to info or alarmConfiguration.What this attribute displays depends on the setting of the line/eocHandling attribute:If eocHandlingis set to …infoalarmConfigurationthen …the eocAlarmThresholds attribute displays the values as set in the line/linkAlarmThresholdsattribute on the remote 1 device or repeater.the eocAlarmThresholds attribute displays the values as set in the line/linkAlarmThresholdsattribute on the central 2 device.RemarkNote that the values are rounded off. E.g. when 28.6 dB is configured on the centralmodem, then 28 dB is shown on the remote device or repeater.1. The remote device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to remote.2. The central device is the device on which the channel attribute is set to central.The eocAlarmThresholds structure contains the following elements:• lineAttenuation• signalNoise

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 267Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/end/linePair[ ]/lineAttenuationThis attribute is only retrieved in case the eocHandling attribute is set to info or alarmConfiguration.This attribute displays the line attenuation, in dB, as it is measured on the line pair of the repeater or enddevice.crocusShdsl/end/linePair[ ]/signalNoiseThis attribute is only retrieved in case the eocHandling attribute is set to info or alarmConfiguration.This attribute displays the noise margin, in dB, as it is measured on the line pair of the repeater or enddevice.crocusShdsl/repeater/loopbackActivationThis action is only present in the repeater[ ] object.Use this action to set up a loop at the network side of the Crocus SHDSL Repeater:Set the loop by selecting the action argument value initiateNetworkLoopback and executing the action (double-clickthe loopbackActivation string). Stop the loop by selecting the action argument value clearAllMaintenanceStatesand executing the action (double-click the loopbackActivation string).Important remarks• You can only set up a loop at the network side of the Crocus SHDSL Repeater. Not at the customerside.• You can only start the loopbackActivation action on the central device. Not on the remote device.• You can only start the loopbackActivation action in case the line/eocHandling attribute is set to alarmConfiguration.• The loopbackActivation action argument value noAction does nothing. It is only present to have a defaultvalue..

268 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes8.7 DTE Interface status attributesThis section discusses the status attributes of the different DTE interfaces. Because some of the interfacestatus attributes are present on every interface, they are discussed in a general. All other sectionsdiscuss the interface specific attributes.The following gives an overview of this section:• 8.7.1 - RS530, V35 and V36 interface status attributes on page 269• 8.7.2 - X21 interface status attributes on page 274• 8.7.3 - G703 interface status attributes on page 278• 8.7.4 - Dual Port G703-Serial interface status attributes on page 282• 8.7.5 - Bridge and Router interface status attributes on page 283

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 269Reference manualStatus attributes8.7.1 RS530, V35 and V36 interface status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl//txdItu103 on page 270• crocusShdsl//rxdItu104 on page 270• crocusShdsl//rtsItu105 on page 270• crocusShdsl//ctsItu106 on page 270• crocusShdsl//dsrItu107 on page 270• crocusShdsl//dcdItu109 on page 270• crocusShdsl//rdlItu140 on page 270• crocusShdsl//alItu141 on page 270• crocusShdsl//tiItu142 on page 270• crocusShdsl//remIfClocking on page 271• crocusShdsl//extClockSource on page 271• crocusShdsl//ifDescr on page 271• crocusShdsl//ifType on page 272• crocusShdsl//ifSpeed on page 272• crocusShdsl//ifClocking on page 272• crocusShdsl//ifOperStatus on page 273

270 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl//txdItu103This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the transmit data signal (circuit 103). The txdItu103 attributeonly indicates the presence of the TxD signal, it does not monitor the real data signal.crocusShdsl//rxdItu104This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the receive data signal (circuit 104). The rxdItu104 attributeonly indicates the presence of the RxD signal, it does not monitor the real data signal.crocusShdsl//rtsItu105This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the request to send signal (circuit 105).crocusShdsl//ctsItu106This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the clear to send signal (circuit 106).crocusShdsl//dsrItu107This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the data set ready signal (circuit 107).crocusShdsl//dcdItu109This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the data carrier detect signal (circuit 109).crocusShdsl//rdlItu140This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the remote digital loop signal (circuit 140).crocusShdsl//alItu141This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the analogue loop signal (circuit 141).crocusShdsl//tiItu142This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the test indication signal (circuit 142).

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 271Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl//remIfClockingThis attribute displays the clocking mode which is actually used by the remote Crocus SHDSL, e.g. internalPreferred.This is not necessarily the clocking mode you configured. It can be a clocking mode that is selected bythe remote Crocus SHDSL because it was not possible to select the clocking mode of your choice (forexample, because the external clock signal is lost).crocusShdsl//extClockSourceThis attribute displays the external clock source. Note that this attribute only displays meaningful informationwhen the clocking mode is set to auto mode.The possible indications are:ValuenonetxClockrxClockdtenotDetectedDescriptionNo external clock signal was detected.The external clock signal is a transmit clock signal generated by the CrocusSHDSL and looped back by the DTE.The external clock signal is a transmit clock signal derived from the received linedata by the Crocus SHDSL and looped back by the DTE.The external clock signal is an external transmit clock signal generated by theDTE.The external clock source can not be determined. This value is also shown whenthe clocking mode is set to a fixed mode instead of auto mode.crocusShdsl//ifDescrThis attribute displays the DTE interface description. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.

272 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl//ifTypeThis attribute displays the DTE interface type. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.The following table shows the ifDescr and ifType attribute for each DTE interface.DTE interface ifDescr value ifType valueRS530 rs530 otherV35 v35 otherV36 v36 otherX21 x21 otherG703 g703 • other when the G703 interfaceis used in unframedmode• e1 when the G703 interfaceis used in framed modeBridge bridge ethernet-csmacdRouter router othercrocusShdsl//ifSpeedThis attribute displays the current DTE interface speed in bits per second (bps), e.g. 640000. When theDTE interface is down (ifOperStatus = down), the DTE interface speed is 0.crocusShdsl//ifClockingThis attribute displays the clocking mode which is actually used by the Crocus SHDSL, e.g. internalPreferred.This is not necessarily the clocking mode you configured. It can be a clocking mode that is selected bythe Crocus SHDSLbecause it was not possible to select the clocking mode of your choice (for example,because the external clock signal is lost).

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 273Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl//ifOperStatusThis attribute displays the current operational status of the DTE interface. This matches the unavailabilitycondition as defined in ITU-T recommendation G.826 (Annex A). The possible indications are:ValueupdownDescriptionThe DTE interface is up, data transfer is possible.The DTE interface is down, data transfer is not possible. For example, becausethere is no connection between the interface and the DTE.Remarks• In case of an RS530, V35 or V36 interface the ifOperStatus attribute behaviour is influenced by the settingof the rtsControl attribute. In case the rtsControl attribute is set to …- internal, then the ifOperStatus attribute value is always up.- external, then the ifOperStatus attribute follows the RTS signal coming from the application.• In case of a G703 interface the ifOperStatus attribute value is down if a Loss Of Signal (LOS) is detectedon the incoming signal (transmit data or TxD) or on the outgoing signal (receive data or RxD).• In case of a Bridge interface the ifSpeed attribute displays the speed on the LAN interface. In otherwords, when a LAN is connected (i.e. ifOperStatus = up) then the ifSpeed is always 10000000 bps,disregarding of the setting of the configuration attribute speed.• In case of a Router interface the ifSpeed and ifOperStatus attributes display the speed and operationalstatus between the Router interface and the Crocus SHDSL. This implies that as soon as you inserta Router interface in the Crocus SHDSL the crocusShdsl/router/ifOperStatus value becomes up, disregardingof the operational status of the Router interface itself. For that information you have to connectto the Router interface.

274 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes8.7.2 X21 interface status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl/x21/txdItu103 on page 275• crocusShdsl/x21/rxdItu104 on page 275• crocusShdsl/x21/indicator on page 275• crocusShdsl/x21/remIfClocking on page 275• crocusShdsl/x21/extClockSource on page 275• crocusShdsl/X21/ifDescr on page 276• crocusShdsl/X21/ifType on page 276• crocusShdsl/X21/ifSpeed on page 276• crocusShdsl/X21/ifClocking on page 276• crocusShdsl/X21/ifOperStatus on page 277

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 275Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/x21/txdItu103This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the transmit data signal (circuit 103). The txdItu103 attributeonly indicates the presence of the TxD signal, it does not monitor the real data signal.crocusShdsl/x21/rxdItu104This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the receive data signal (circuit 104). The rxdItu104 attributeonly indicates the presence of the RxD signal, it does not monitor the real data signal.crocusShdsl/x21/indicatorThis attribute displays the status (on / off) of the indicator signal.crocusShdsl/x21/remIfClockingThis attribute displays the clocking mode which is actually used by the remote Crocus SHDSL, e.g. internalPreferred.This is not necessarily the clocking mode you configured. It can be a clocking mode that is selected bythe remote Crocus SHDSL because it was not possible to select the clocking mode of your choice (forexample, because the external clock signal is lost).crocusShdsl/x21/extClockSourceThis attribute displays the external clock source. Note that this attribute only displays meaningful informationwhen the clocking mode is set to auto mode.The possible indications are:ValuenonetxClockrxClockdtenotDetectedDescriptionNo external clock signal was detected.The external clock signal is a transmit clock signal generated by the CrocusSHDSL and looped back by the DTE.The external clock signal is a transmit clock signal derived from the received linedata by the Crocus SHDSL and looped back by the DTE.The external clock signal is an external transmit clock signal generated by theDTE.The external clock source can not be determined. This value is also shown whenthe clocking mode is set to a fixed mode instead of auto mode.

276 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/X21/ifDescrThis attribute displays the DTE interface description. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.crocusShdsl/X21/ifTypeThis attribute displays the DTE interface type. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.The following table shows the ifDescr and ifType attribute for the X21 interface.DTE interface ifDescr value ifType valueX21 x21 othercrocusShdsl/X21/ifSpeedThis attribute displays the current DTE interface speed in bits per second (bps), e.g. 640000. When theDTE interface is down (ifOperStatus = down), the DTE interface speed is 0.crocusShdsl/X21/ifClockingThis attribute displays the clocking mode which is actually used by the Crocus SHDSL, e.g. internalPreferred.This is not necessarily the clocking mode you configured. It can be a clocking mode that is selected bythe Crocus SHDSL because it was not possible to select the clocking mode of your choice (for example,because the external clock signal is lost).

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 277Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/X21/ifOperStatusThis attribute displays the current operational status of the DTE interface. The possible indications are:ValueupdownDescriptionThe DTE interface is up, data transfer is possible.The DTE interface is down, data transfer is not possible. For example, becausethere is no connection between the interface and the DTE.Remarks• In case of an RS530, V35 or V36 interfaces the ifOperStatus attribute behaviour is influenced by thesetting of the rtsControl attribute. In case the rtsControl attribute is set to …- internal, then the ifOperStatus attribute value is always up.- external, then the ifOperStatus attribute follows the RTS signal coming from the application.• In case of a G703 interface the ifOperStatus attribute value is down if a Loss Of Signal (LOS) is detectedon the incoming signal (transmit data or TxD) or on the outgoing signal (receive data or RxD).• In case of a Bridge interface the ifSpeed attribute displays the speed on the LAN interface. In otherwords, when a LAN is connected (i.e. ifOperStatus = up) then the ifSpeed is always 10000000 bps,disregarding of the setting of the configuration attribute speed.• In case of a Router interface the ifSpeed and ifOperStatus attributes display the speed and operationalstatus between the Router interface and the Crocus SHDSL. This implies that as soon as you inserta Router interface in the Crocus SHDSL the crocusShdsl/router/ifOperStatus value becomes up, disregardingof the operational status of the Router interface itself. For that information you have to connectto the Router interface.

278 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes8.7.3 G703 interface status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl/g703/timeSlots on page 279• crocusShdsl/g703/txdItu103 on page 279• crocusShdsl/g703/rxdItu104 on page 279• crocusShdsl/g703/los on page 279• crocusShdsl/g703/ais on page 279• crocusShdsl/g703/lfa on page 279• crocusShdsl/g703/rai on page 279• crocusShdsl/g703/ifDescr on page 279• crocusShdsl/g703/ifType on page 279• crocusShdsl/g703/ifSpeed on page 280• crocusShdsl/g703/ifClocking on page 280• crocusShdsl/g703/ifOperStatus on page 281

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 279Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/g703/timeSlotsThis attribute is only present on the G703 Nx64k interface.This attribute displays the time slots that are being used. This is especially useful in case you set theframing attribute to auto. Refer to 6.8.1 - Selecting unframed or framed mode on page 144.crocusShdsl/g703/txdItu103This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the transmit data signal. The txdItu103 attribute only indicatesthe presence of the TxD signal, it does not monitor the real data signal.crocusShdsl/g703/rxdItu104This attribute displays the status (on / off) of the receive data signal. The rxdItu104 attribute only indicatesthe presence of the RxD signal, it does not monitor the real data signal.crocusShdsl/g703/losThis attribute displays (on / off) whether a Loss Of Signal has been detected. LOS is on when the incomingdata is no longer present. E.g. the connection from the application towards the Crocus SHDSLisinterrupted.crocusShdsl/g703/aisThis attribute displays (on / off) whether an Alarm Indication Signal has been detected. AIS is on whenthe AIS signal (also called all ones) is detected on the incoming data. E.g. the application detected aproblem and communicates this to the Crocus SHDSL.crocusShdsl/g703/lfaThis attribute is only present on the G703 Nx64k interface.This attribute displays (on / off) whether a Loss of Frame Alignment has been detected. LFA is on whenthe Frame Alignment Signal (FAS), which is present in time slot 0 of the G.704 framed data, is notdetected after a certain period.crocusShdsl/g703/raiThis attribute is only present on the G703 Nx64k interface.This attribute displays (on / off) whether a Remote Alarm Indication signal has been detected. RAI is onwhen the RAI signal is detected on the incoming data. RAI means the far-end equipment has a problemwith the signal it is receiving from the local equipment.crocusShdsl/g703/ifDescrThis attribute displays the DTE interface description. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.crocusShdsl/g703/ifTypeThis attribute displays the DTE interface type. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.

280 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributesThe following table shows the default ifDescr and ifType attribute for each DTE interface.DTE interface ifDescr value ifType valueRS530 rs530 otherV35 v35 otherV36 v36 otherX21 x21 otherBridge bridge ethernet-csmacdRouter router othercrocusShdsl/g703/ifSpeedThis attribute displays the current DTE interface speed in bits per second (bps), e.g. 640000. When theDTE interface is down (ifOperStatus = down), the DTE interface speed is 0.crocusShdsl/g703/ifClockingThis attribute displays the clocking mode which is actually used by the Crocus SHDSL, e.g. internalPreferred.This is not necessarily the clocking mode you configured. It can be a clocking mode that is selected bythe Crocus SHDSL because it was not possible to select the clocking mode of your choice (for example,because the external clock signal is lost).

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 281Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/g703/ifOperStatusThis attribute displays the current operational status of the DTE interface. The possible indications are:ValueupdownDescriptionThe DTE interface is up, data transfer is possible.The DTE interface is down, data transfer is not possible. For example, becausethere is no connection between the interface and the DTE.Remarks• In case of an RS530, V35 or V36 interfaces the ifOperStatus attribute behaviour is influenced by thesetting of the rtsControl attribute. In case the rtsControl attribute is set to …- internal, then the ifOperStatus attribute value is always up.- external, then the ifOperStatus attribute follows the RTS signal coming from the application.• In case of a G703 interface the ifOperStatus attribute value is down if a Loss Of Signal (LOS) is detectedon the incoming signal (transmit data or TxD) or on the outgoing signal (receive data or RxD).• In case of a Bridge interface the ifSpeed attribute displays the speed on the LAN interface. In otherwords, when a LAN is connected (i.e. ifOperStatus = up) then the ifSpeed is always 10000000 bps,disregarding of the setting of the configuration attribute speed.• In case of a Router interface the ifSpeed and ifOperStatus attributes display the speed and operationalstatus between the Router interface and the Crocus SHDSL. This implies that as soon as you inserta Router interface in the Crocus SHDSL the crocusShdsl/router/ifOperStatus value becomes up, disregardingof the operational status of the Router interface itself. For that information you have to connectto the Router interface.

282 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes8.7.4 Dual Port G703-Serial interface status attributesThe status attributes of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface are the same those of the G703 (Nx64k) andRS530 interface. Therefore, for more information on these attributes, refer to …• 8.7.1 - RS530, V35 and V36 interface status attributes on page 269,• 8.7.3 - G703 interface status attributes on page 278.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 283Reference manualStatus attributes8.7.5 Bridge and Router interface status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl//wanTxd on page 284• crocusShdsl//wanRxd on page 284• crocusShdsl//remIfClocking on page 284• crocusShdsl//ifDescr on page 284• crocusShdsl//ifType on page 284• crocusShdsl//ifSpeed on page 285• crocusShdsl//ifClocking on page 285• crocusShdsl//ifOperStatus on page 285

284 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl//wanTxdThis attribute displays the status (on / off) of the WAN TxD (wide area network transmit data) signal, afterencapsulation of the user data on the Bridge or Router interface.crocusShdsl//wanRxdThis attribute displays the status (on / off) of the WAN RxD (wide area network receive data) signal,before extraction of the user data on the Bridge or Router interface.crocusShdsl//remIfClockingThis attribute displays the clocking mode which is actually used by the remote Crocus SHDSL, e.g. internalPreferred.This is not necessarily the clocking mode you configured. It can be a clocking mode that is selected bythe remote Crocus SHDSL because it was not possible to select the clocking mode of your choice (forexample, because the external clock signal is lost).crocusShdsl//ifDescrThis attribute displays the DTE interface description. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.crocusShdsl//ifTypeThis attribute displays the DTE interface type. It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter.The following table shows the ifDescr and ifType attribute for each DTE interface.DTE interface ifDescr value ifType valueRS530 rs530 otherV35 v35 otherV36 v36 otherX21 x21 otherG703 g703 • other when the G703 interfaceis used in unframedmode• e1 when the G703 interfaceis used in framed modeBridge bridge ethernet-csmacdRouter router other

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 285Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl//ifSpeedThis attribute displays the current DTE interface speed in bits per second (bps), e.g. 640000. When theDTE interface is down (ifOperStatus = down), the DTE interface speed is 0.crocusShdsl//ifClockingThis attribute displays the clocking mode which is actually used by the Crocus SHDSL, e.g. internalPreferred.This is not necessarily the clocking mode you configured. It can be a clocking mode that is selected bythe Crocus SHDSL because it was not possible to select the clocking mode of your choice (for example,because the external clock signal is lost).crocusShdsl//ifOperStatusThis attribute displays the current operational status of the DTE interface. The possible indications are:ValueupdownDescriptionThe DTE interface is up, data transfer is possible.The DTE interface is down, data transfer is not possible. For example, becausethere is no connection between the interface and the DTE.Remarks• In case of an RS530, V35 or V36 interfaces the ifOperStatus attribute behaviour is influenced by thesetting of the rtsControl attribute. In case the rtsControl attribute is set to …- internal, then the ifOperStatus attribute value is always up.- external, then the ifOperStatus attribute follows the RTS signal coming from the application.• In case of a G703 interface the ifOperStatus attribute value is down if a Loss Of Signal (LOS) is detectedon the incoming signal (transmit data or TxD) or on the outgoing signal (receive data or RxD).• In case of a Bridge interface the ifSpeed attribute displays the speed on the LAN interface. In otherwords, when a LAN is connected (i.e. ifOperStatus = up) then the ifSpeed is always 10000000 bps,disregarding of the setting of the configuration attribute speed.• In case of a Router interface the ifSpeed and ifOperStatus attributes display the speed and operationalstatus between the Router interface and the Crocus SHDSL. This implies that as soon as you inserta Router interface in the Crocus SHDSL the crocusShdsl/router/ifOperStatus value becomes up, disregardingof the operational status of the Router interface itself. For that information you have to connectto the Router interface.

286 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes8.8 Management status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl/management/cardSlotNumber on page 287• crocusShdsl/management/cardNestNumber on page 287• crocusShdsl/management/modemPosition on page 287The following attributes are only present on a Crocus SHDSL Card Version, not on a Table Top.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 287Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/management/cardSlotNumberThis attribute displays in which slot of the CN4 card nest the Crocus SHDSL is situated.It is possible to manage the Crocus SHDSL with a management concentrator (e.g. the Orchid 1003 LANor Telindus 1035 Orchid). In that case, the Crocus SHDSL its position in the CN4 card nest has to beknown so that the management concentrator can address the Crocus SHDSL.crocusShdsl/management/cardNestNumberThis attribute displays the CN4 card nest address.It is possible to manage the Crocus SHDSL with a management concentrator (e.g. the Orchid 1003 LANor Telindus 1035 Orchid). In that case, the address of the CN4 card nest has to be known so that themanagement concentrator can address the Crocus SHDSL.The CN4 card nest address can be set with DIP switches at the back of the card nest. For more information,refer to the CN4 manual.crocusShdsl/management/modemPositionThis attribute displays the position of the modem (A or B) on the Card Version.It is possible to manage the Crocus SHDSL with a management concentrator (e.g. the Orchid 1003 LANor Telindus 1035 Orchid). In that case, the position of the modem on the card has to be known so thatthe management concentrator can address that particular modem.

288 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes8.9 Operating system status attributesThis section describes the following status attributes:• crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/taskInfo on page 289

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8 289Reference manualStatus attributescrocusShdsl/operatingSystem/taskInfoThe taskInfo table displays status information about the operating system. The table contains the followingattributes:AttributetaskNametaskStatusload30s (%)load5m (%)runningInMedium(%)runningInHigh (%)programCounterDescriptionName of the task.Current status. The task can have the following status values:• awake: This task is actually running.• asleep: This task is waiting on an event.• inactive: This task slot is not active, i.e. no task has been assigned to this slot.This is the load on the processor during the last 30 seconds.This is the load on the processor during the last 5 minutes.Each task can be running with a low, medium or high priority. This element givesthe percentage of time this task is running with medium priority during the last 30seconds.Each task can be running with a low, medium or high priority. This element givesthe percentage of time this task is running with high priority during the last 30 seconds.The percentage of time this task is running with low priority can be calculatedusing the following formula:100% - runningInMedium (%) - runningInHigh (%).This is the current value of the program counter. The program counter is the memoryaddress for the current instruction of this task.

290 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 8Reference manualStatus attributes

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 291Reference manualPerformance attributes9 Performance attributesThis chapter discusses the performance attributes of the Crocus SHDSL. The following gives an overviewof this chapter.• 9.1 - Performance attribute overview on page 292• 9.2 - Introducing the performance attributes on page 295• 9.3 - Line performance attributes on page 298• 9.4 - Line pair performance attributes on page 301• 9.5 - Repeater and end performance attributes on page 304• 9.6 - G703 interface performance attributes on page 305• 9.7 - Dual Port G703-Serial interface performance attributes on page 309• 9.8 - Operating system performance attributes on page 310

292 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributes9.1 Performance attribute overview> crocusShdslAction: Cold Boot>> lineh2Lineh24Lined7LinelineerrorCountAction: retrainAction: testActivationAction: clearErrorCounter>>> linePair[ ] 1h2LineParametersh2Performanceh24LineParametersh24Performanced7LineParametersd7PerformancelineParametersperformance>> repeater[ ] 2h2Lineh24Lined7Lineline>>> networkLinePair[ ] 1h2LineParametersh2Performanceh24LineParametersh24Performanced7LineParametersd7PerformancelineParametersperformance1. in case of a 2P version, two linePair objects are present: linePair [1] and linePair [2]2. not present by default, is added automatically when setting the line/eocHandling attribute

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 293Reference manualPerformance attributes>>> customerLinePair[ ] 1h2LineParametersh2Performanceh24LineParametersh24Performanced7LineParametersd7PerformancelineParametersperformance>> end 2h2Lineh24Lined7Lineline>>> linePair[ ] 1h2LineParametersh2Performanceh24LineParametersh24Performanced7LineParametersd7PerformancelineParametersperformance>> g703 3h2G703Performanceh24G703Performanced7G703Performanceg703Performanceh2G826Performanceh24G826Performanced7G826Performanceg826Performance>> dualPort 3>>> g703h2G703Performanceh24G703Performanced7G703Performanceg703Performanceh2G826Performanceh24G826Performanced7G826Performanceg826Performance3. only present when the corresponding interface is used

294 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributes>> operatingSytemcurrUsedProcPowerfreeDataBufferstotalDataBufferslargestFreeBlockSizefreeBlockCountfreeMemorytotalMemoryusedProcPowertaskInfo

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 295Reference manualPerformance attributes9.2 Introducing the performance attributesPerformance information can be used for the following:• If network problems arise, information about the history of the communication link can be reviewedand analysed. These statistics can be useful to locate and solve the problem.• By collecting performance information, an operator can keep track of the global performance of thenetwork, e.g. network bottlenecks can be traced, etc.Before discussing the performance attributes of the Crocus SHDSL in detail, some general informationon the performance attributes of the Crocus SHDSL is given.The following gives an overview of this section:• 9.2.1 - Introducing the performance timing on page 296• 9.2.2 - Introducing the performance terms on page 297

296 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributes9.2.1 Introducing the performance timingThe following table explains the performance information timing.Performancetiming2 hours,24hours,7 dayssince bootDescriptionThe performance information is accumulated during a certain time span, called aperiod. After a period, the accumulated performance information is written into abuffer. Then a new period starts. An interval contains several periods:• To cover a 2 hours interval, 8 periods of 15 minutes are kept.• To cover a 24 hours interval, 12 periods of 2 hours are kept.• To cover a 7 days interval, 7 periods of 24 hours are kept.The buffer in which the information is stored, is a circular buffer. I.e. every period(15 minutes, 2 hours or 24 hours) the most recent measured and calculated valuesare added, and the oldest values are lost.In this case, the performance information is kept since the latest cold boot of theCrocus SHDSL. This can be considered as a performance information summary.The Crocus SHDSL does not contain a real-time clock, therefore time information is related to its internalclock. To allow you to situate the time intervals in the real time, the sysUpTime attribute is returned togetherwith the performance information. It reflects the time since the latest cold boot of the Crocus SHDSL.Only the available performance information is displayed. If the interrogation happens shortly after boot,no values are displayed. For example for the 24 hours intervals, the new performance information isavailable only when a complete time span (i.e. 2 hours) has elapsed.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 297Reference manualPerformance attributes9.2.2 Introducing the performance termsThe following table explains the performance information terms.TermsysUpTimemin, max, avrgcounttimeDescriptionReflects the time since the latest cold boot of the Crocus SHDSL.Display the minimum, maximum and average values calculated for the correspondingperiod.E.g. min-max-avrg value of the noise margin.Counts the number of times an event occurred during the correspondingperiod.E.g. the number of retrains.Indicates the duration of an event during the corresponding period.E.g. the timeduring which the line is up.

298 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributes9.3 Line performance attributesThis section describes the following performance attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/Line on page 299• crocusShdsl/line/line on page 299• crocusShdsl/line/errorCount on page 299This section describes the following actions:• crocusShdsl/line/retrain on page 300• crocusShdsl/line/testActivation on page 300• crocusShdsl/line/clearErrorCounter on page 300

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 299Reference manualPerformance attributescrocusShdsl/line/LineThis structured value displays the 2 hours, 24 hours and 7 days line performance. The Linestructured value elements are the following:ElementsysUpTimelinkDownCountlinkDownTimeFor the corresponding period, this value displays …the elapsed time since the last cold boot.the number of times the link went down.the total amount of time the link was down.crocusShdsl/line/lineThis structured value displays the line performance since the last cold boot. Except for sysUpTime, thestructured value elements are the same as for the Line attribute.crocusShdsl/line/errorCountThis attribute displays the amount of detected errors since the start of an ET, AL-ET or RDL-ET test.Every time a new ET, AL-ET or RDL-ET is started, the errorCount attribute is reset to 0.

300 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributescrocusShdsl/line/retrainUse this action to initiate a retrain cycle. Double click on the retrain string to execute the action.crocusShdsl/line/testActivationUse this action to perform a test on the Crocus SHDSL. These tests are useful to trace possible problems.Possible tests are: no, al, dl, rdl, et, alEt, rdlEt.To execute a test, proceed as follows:StepAction1 In the TMA window, select the object line and the group Performance or Status.2 In the action window of TMA, click the left mouse button on the field under the headingArgument Value.⇒A drop down box appears.3 In the drop down box, select the test you want to execute.4 Press the right mouse button and select Execute.For more information on these tests, refer to Chapter 13 - Diagnostic tests on page 359.crocusShdsl/line/clearErrorCounterUse this action to clear the value of the errorCount attribute. This could be useful, for example, to reset theerror counter after the unstable period (in which errors occur anyhow) shortly after the initiation of a test.Double click on the clearErrorCounter string to execute the action.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 301Reference manualPerformance attributes9.4 Line pair performance attributesThis section describes the following performance attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/LineParameters on page 302• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/lineParameters on page 302• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/Performance on page 303• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/performance on page 303In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P, two linePair objects are present: linePair [1] and linePair [2].

302 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributescrocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/LineParametersThis structured value displays the 2 hours, 24 hours and 7 days line pair parameters. The LineParameters structured value elements are the following:ElementsysUpTimelineAttenuationMin (dB)lineAttenuationMax (dB)lineAttenuationAvrg (dB)signalNoiseMin (dB)signalNoiseMax (dB)signalNoiseAvrg (dB)For the corresponding period, this value displays …the elapsed time since the last cold boot.the minimum line attenuation that was measured.the maximum line attenuation that was measured.the average line attenuation that was calculated.the minimum signal to noise ratio that was measured.the maximum signal to noise ratio that was measured.the average signal to noise ratio that was calculated.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/lineParametersThis structured value displays the line pair parameters since the last cold boot. Except for sysUpTime, thestructured value elements are the same as for the LineParameters attribute.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 303Reference manualPerformance attributescrocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/PerformanceThis structured value displays the 2 hours, 24 hours and 7 days line pair performance. The Performancestructured value elements are the following:AttributesysUpTimecodeViolationserrSecsevErrSecunavailableSecloswSecmoniSecFor the corresponding period, this attribute displays …the time since the latest cold boot.the number of errored SHDSL frames that was counted.the number of errored seconds that was counted.the number of severely errored seconds that was counted.the number of unavailable seconds that was counted.the number of lost synchronisation words that was counted.the number of monitored seconds.For the correct and unambiguous definition of code violations, errored and severely errored seconds,unavailability and lost sync words, refer to the recommendation G.826.crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/performanceThis structured value displays the line pair performance since the last cold boot. Except for sysUpTime,the structured value elements are the same as for the Performance attribute.

304 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributes9.5 Repeater and end performance attributes• The repeater[ ] and the end objects are not present in the containment tree by default. They are addedautomatically when you configure the eocHandling attribute. Refer to 6.2 - Configuring EOC handlingon page 83.• Exactly which information is retrieved from the remote SHDSL device(s) through the EOC channeldepends on the setting of the eocHandling attribute. Refer to 6.2.4 - EOC retrieved information onpage 86.• The performance information of the line and line pairs of the repeater and end device is only retrievedin case the eocHandling attribute is set to info or alarmConfiguration. Other than that, the repeater[ ] and endobjects contain the same performance attributes as the line object. Refer to …- 9.3 - Line performance attributes on page 298 for more information on the line attributes.- 9.4 - Line pair performance attributes on page 301 for more information on the line pair attributes.• When the Crocus SHDSL is configured for 1 pair operation, the repeater[ ] and end[ ] objects networkLinePair[2]and customerLinePair[2] still appear in the containment tree (although 1 pair operation hasbeen configured).Note that the sysUpTime in the performance attributes of the repeater[ ] and end objects is not the elapsedtime since the last cold boot, but the elapsed time since the creation of the repeater[ ] or end object.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 305Reference manualPerformance attributes9.6 G703 interface performance attributesThis section describes the following performance attributes:• crocusShdsl/g703/G703Performance on page 306• crocusShdsl/g703/g703Performance on page 306• crocusShdsl/g703/G826Performance on page 307• crocusShdsl/g703/g826Performance on page 307

306 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributescrocusShdsl/g703/G703PerformanceThis structured value displays the 2 hours, 24 hours and 7 days performance summary of the G703 interface.The G703Performance structured value elements are the following:ElementsysUpTimelosCountlosTimeaisCountaisTimelfaCountFor the corresponding period, this value displays …the elapsed time since the last cold boot.the number of times a Loss Of Signal condition occurred.the amount of time a Loss Of Signal condition was active.the number of times an Alarm Indication Signal condition occurred.the amount of time an Alarm Indication Signal condition was active.the number of times a Loss of Frame Alignment condition occurred. This is onlypresent on the G703 Nx64k interface.lfaTimethe amount of time a Loss of Frame Alignment condition was active. This is onlypresent on the G703 Nx64k interface.Also see G703 interface performance definitions.crocusShdsl/g703/g703PerformanceThis structured value displays the performance summary of the G703 interface since the last cold boot.Except for sysUpTime, the structured value elements are the same as for the G703Performanceattribute.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 307Reference manualPerformance attributescrocusShdsl/g703/G826PerformanceThis structured value displays the 2 hours, 24 hours and 7 days G.826 performance summary of theG703 interface. The G826Performance structured value elements are the following:ElementsysUpTimeerrBlockserrSecsevErrSecunavailCountunavailTimebBErrorsFor the corresponding period, this value displays …the elapsed time since the last cold boot.the number of errored blocks that was counted.the number of errored seconds that was counted.the number of severely errored seconds that was counted.the number of times the interface was down (i.e. unavailable, as defined in ITU-Trecommendation G.826 Annex A).the amount of time the interface was down.the number of background block errors that was counted.Also see G703 interface performance definitions.crocusShdsl/g703/g826PerformanceThis structured value displays the G.826 performance summary of the G703 interface since the last coldboot. Except for sysUpTime, the structured value elements are the same as for the G826Performance attribute.

308 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributesG703 interface performance definitionsThe following table lists some of the definitions that are used in the ITU-T recommendations that applyon the G703 interface. They are listed here for completeness only. For more detailed information, referto the recommendations themselves.TermdefectErrored Block(EB)Errored Second(ES)Severely ErroredSecond (SES)unavailabilityDefinitionA defect is one of the following conditions:• Loss Of Signal (LOS, defined in G.775).• Alarm Indication Signal (AIS, defined in G.775).• Loss of Frame Alignment (LFA, defined in G.706).A data frame that contains one or more errors. In case of G.704 framing a frameis time slot 0 up to time slot 31.A 1 second period where at least 1 EB or defect occurred.A 1 second period where equal to or more than 30% EBs occur or at least 1 defect.The measurement of EBs depends on the operation mode:• Framed without CRC-4: the error detection occurs based on the detectedFrame Alignment Signal (FAS) bit errors; 28 FAS bit errors per second matchesa Bit Error Rate (BER) of 10-3 or more.• Framed with CRC-4: the error detection occurs based on CRC-4.Matches a period of 10 or more consecutive SESs. Refer to G.826 Annex A for acomplete definition.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 309Reference manualPerformance attributes9.7 Dual Port G703-Serial interface performance attributesThe performance attributes of the Dual Port G703-Serial interface are the same those of the G703(Nx64k) interface. Refer to 9.6 - G703 interface performance attributes on page 305.

310 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributes9.8 Operating system performance attributesThis section describes the following performance attributes:• crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/currUsedProcPower on page 311• crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/freeDataBuffers on page 311• crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/totalDataBuffers on page 311• crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/largestFreeBlockSize on page 311• crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/freeBlockCount on page 311• crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/freeMemory on page 311• crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/totalMemory on page 311• crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/usedProcPower on page 312• crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/taskInfo on page 312

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9 311Reference manualPerformance attributescrocusShdsl/operatingSystem/currUsedProcPowerThis is the amount of processing power used during the last 650 milliseconds, expressed as a percentageof the total available processing power.crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/freeDataBuffersThe processor uses buffers for storing the packets during processing and/or queuing. Each buffer has a256 byte size, headers included. This attribute is the number of data buffers currently not in use andavailable for e.g. incoming data.crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/totalDataBuffersThis is the total number of available data buffers.crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/largestFreeBlockSizeThe processor uses RAM memory for storing internal information and buffering (see totalDataBuffers). Thedifferent tasks allocate RAM memory on request. Tasks may also free memory again. In this way thetotal RAM memory becomes fragmented. This attribute gives the size of the largest contiguous freememory block expressed in bytes.crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/freeBlockCountThis is the number of free contiguous memory blocks.crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/freeMemoryThis is the total free memory expressed in bytes.crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/totalMemoryThis is the total RAM memory expressed in bytes.

312 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 9Reference manualPerformance attributescrocusShdsl/operatingSystem/usedProcPowerThis table lists the used processing power for the 11 most recent 30 seconds intervals. The processingpower is expressed as a percentage of the total processing power. Each entry in the attribute used-ProcPower is composed of the following attributes:ValuesysUpTimeminimumPP (%)averagePP (%)maximumPP (%)DescriptionDisplays the elapsed time since the last cold boot. The next values are forthe 30 seconds period before this relative time stamp.This is the minimum percentage of processing power in use during the last30 seconds.This is the average percentage of processing power in use during the last30 seconds.This is the maximum percentage of processing power in use during the last30 seconds.crocusShdsl/operatingSystem/taskInfoThis attribute contains status information concerning the different tasks running on the processor. It is atable grouping up to 31 task slots, which is the maximum number of parallel tasks running on the processor'soperating system.This attribute contains the same information as taskInfo in the status group (refer to 8.9 - Operating systemstatus attributes on page 288).

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 313Reference manualAlarm attributes10 Alarm attributesThis chapter discusses the alarm attributes of the Crocus SHDSL. The following gives an overview ofthis chapter.• 10.1 - Alarm attribute overview on page 314• 10.2 - Introducing the alarm attributes on page 317• 10.3 - General alarms on page 325• 10.4 - Line alarms on page 328• 10.5 - Line pair alarms on page 330• 10.6 - Remote power alarms on page 333• 10.7 - Repeater and end alarms on page 335• 10.8 - Interface alarms on page 339

314 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributes10.1 Alarm attribute overview> crocusShdsltotalAlarmLevelalarmInfonotRespondingalarmSyncLossconfigChangedaccessremoteAlarmunknownStatepowerSupply1CvFail 1powerSupply2CvFail 1powerSupply48VFail 1remotePowerFail 1coldBootwarmBootlocalPowerFailcodeConsistencyFailconfigConsistencyFailAction: Cold Boot>> linealarmInfolinkDowntestActiveinvalidNumRepeatersremotePowerFail>>> linePair[ ] 2alarmInfolinkDownlineAttenuationsignalNoiseerrSecRatioExceededsevErrSecRatioExceededbBErrRatioExceeded>>>> pwrSource 3alarmInfoharwareFailmanuallyDisabledmanagementDisablednoCurrentoverCurrent1. CV only2. in case of a 2P version, two linePair objects are present: linePair [1] and linePair [2]3. not present by default, has to be added

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 315Reference manualAlarm attributes>> repeater[ ] 4alarmInfolinkDown>>> networkLinePair[ ] 2alarmInfolinkDownlineAttenuationsignalNoiseerrSecRatioExceededsevErrSecRatioExceededbBErrRatioExceeded>>> customerLinePair[ ] 2alarmInfolinkDownlineAttenuationsignalNoiseerrSecRatioExceededsevErrSecRatioExceededbBErrRatioExceeded>> end 4alarmInfolinkDown>>> linePair[ ] 2alarmInfolinkDownlineAttenuationsignalNoiseerrSecRatioExceededsevErrSecRatioExceededbBErrRatioExceeded>> rs530, v35, v36 5alarmInfolinkDownlossOfTimingbackupTiming4. not present by default, is added automatically when setting the line/eocHandling attribute5. only present when the corresponding interface is used

316 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributes>> g703 5alarmInfolinkDownaislfa 6rai 6sqlossOfTiming>> dualPort 5>>> g703alarmInfolinkDownaislfaraisqlossOfTiming>>> rs530alarmInfolinkDownlossOfTimingbackupTiming>> bridge, router 5alarmInfolinkDown6. G703 Nx64 only

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 317Reference manualAlarm attributes10.2 Introducing the alarm attributesBefore discussing the alarm attributes of the Crocus SHDSL in detail, some general information on thealarm attributes of the Crocus SHDSL is given.The following gives an overview of this section:• 10.2.1 - Configuration alarm attributes on page 318• 10.2.2 - General alarm attributes on page 322• 10.2.3 - Alarm signalling on page 324

318 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributes10.2.1 Configuration alarm attributesThis section explains the attributes that allow you to configure the alarm behaviour of the Crocus SHDSL.These configuration alarm attributes are:• crocusShdsl/…/alarmMask on page 319• crocusShdsl/…/alarmLevel on page 319• crocusShdsl/…/remoteAlarmMask on page 321• crocusShdsl/…/alarmContactHighMask on page 321• crocusShdsl/…/alarmContactLowMask on page 321

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 319Reference manualAlarm attributescrocusShdsl/…/alarmMaskUse this attribute to mask or unmask the alarms of an object. This determines whether an active alarm …• is forwarded to the central management system (e.g. TMA Element Management or HP OpenView)or not.• causes a change of colour in the subsystem picture (refer to Chapter 11 - TMA subsystem picture ofthe Crocus SHDSL on page 343).The alarms in the alarmMask attribute have the following values:ValueenableddisabledIs the active alarm being forwarded to the central management system?Does the active alarm cause a change of colour in the subsystem picture?Yes. So the alarm is unmasked.No. So the alarm is masked.Alarms are always seen in the alarmInfo alarm attribute of an object, regardless of the masking of thealarm. I.e. even if an alarm is set to disabled in the alarmMask of an object, if the alarm condition is fulfilledthen the alarm will be set to on in the alarmInfo of that object. However, because this alarm is disabled itwill not be sent to the central management system.Only the most important alarms are unmasked (i.e. enabled) by default. All other alarms are masked (i.e.disabled).crocusShdsl/…/alarmLevelUse this attribute to assign a priority level to each alarm of the corresponding object. The alarm levelrange goes from 0 to 254, where 0 is the lowest and 254 is the highest priority level.The alarmLevel of an unmasked, active alarm is sent to the totalAlarmLevel of the top object crocusShdsl.

320 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributes

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 321Reference manualAlarm attributescrocusShdsl/…/remoteAlarmMaskThis attribute is present on the TT only.The remoteAlarmMask attribute enables or disables for each alarm of the corresponding object, whether:• a visual indication is generated (blinking error LED).• an alarm is sent to the remote Crocus SHDSL.By default, all the alarms in the remoteAlarmMask are set to disabled.crocusShdsl/…/alarmContactHighMaskThis attribute is present on the CV only.The alarmContactHighMask attribute enables or disables for each alarm of the corresponding object,whether:• a visual indication is generated (blinking error LED).• an alarm is sent to the remote Crocus SHDSL.• the high alarm contacts of the CN4 card nest are driven.By default, all the alarms in the alarmContactHighMask are set to disabled.crocusShdsl/…/alarmContactLowMaskThis attribute is present on the CV only.The alarmContactLowMask attribute enables or disables for each alarm of the corresponding object,whether:• a visual indication is generated (blinking error LED).• an alarm is sent to the remote Crocus SHDSL.• the low alarm contacts of the CN4 card nest are driven.By default, all the alarms in the alarmContactLowMask are set to disabled.Using the remote alarm and the high and low alarm contacts of the CN4 card nest, you could performalarm signalling. For more information, refer to 10.2.3 - Alarm signalling on page 324.

322 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributes10.2.2 General alarm attributesThis section describes the following alarm attributes:• crocusShdsl/totalAlarmLevel on page 323• crocusShdsl/…/alarmInfo on page 323

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 323Reference manualAlarm attributescrocusShdsl/totalAlarmLevelThis attribute is only present in the top object of the containment tree of the Crocus SHDSL, crocusShdsl.It displays the priority level of an unmasked, active alarm. When several alarms are generated at thesame time, the highest priority level is shown. If the alarm levels are set in a structured manner, one lookat the totalAlarmLevel attribute enables the operator to make a quick estimation of the problem.The value of the totalAlarmLevel attribute is also communicated to the central management system (e.g.TMA Element Management or HP OpenView) where it determines the colour of the icon. This colour isan indication of the severity of the alarm.crocusShdsl/…/alarmInfoThe alarmInfo contains the actual alarm information of the corresponding object. This information isupdated each time there is a change in the status of an alarm within this object.The alarmInfo attributes are:AttributediscriminatorcurrentAlarmspreviousAlarmsalarmMaskalarmLevelDisplays for the corresponding object …the total number of alarm status changes in this object since the last cold boot.the current alarm status of this object.the previous alarm status of this object.the alarmMask as configured in the Configuration group.the alarmLevel as configured in the Configuration group.

324 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributes10.2.3 Alarm signallingIf you do not have a central management system, you could perform alarm signalling with the alarm contactsof the CN4 card nest.ExampleSuppose the following situation:• On a remote Crocus SHDSL TT the configChanged alarm of the Crocus SHDSL object is set to enabled inthe remoteAlarmMask. In other words: crocusShdsl/remoteAlarmMask/configChanged = enabled.• On a central Crocus SHDSL CV the remoteAlarm of the top object is set to enabled in the alarmContactHighMask.In other words: crocusShdsl/alarmContactHighMask/remoteAlarm = enabled.• The high alarm contacts of the CN4 card nest are connected in a circuit with a light bulb.Now the following happens:Phase Situation Result1 Someone changes the configuration of theCrocus SHDSL TT.2 On the Crocus SHDSL TT the configChangedalarm is enabled in the remoteAlarmMask.3 On the Crocus SHDSL CV the remoteAlarmis enabled in the alarmContactHighMask.4 The high alarm contacts of the CN4 cardnest close.On the Crocus SHDSL TT the configChangedalarm becomes active.A remote alarm is sent to the CrocusSHDSL CV.The high alarm contacts of the CN4 cardnest close.The light bulb lights up.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 325Reference manualAlarm attributes10.3 General alarmsThis section describes the following alarm attributes:• crocusShdsl/alarmInfo on page 326This section describes the following action:• crocusShdsl/Cold Boot on page 327Refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarm attributes on page 317 for the general alarm attributes.

326 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributescrocusShdsl/alarmInfoThe different alarms related to the crocusShdsl object together with their explanation and theirdefault alarmMask and alarmLevel value are given in the following table:The alarm … is generated … Default valuealarmMaskalarmLevelnotRespondingwhen the Crocus SHDSL does not respondon the polling session of the managementconcentrator.enabled 4alarmSyncLoss when the internal alarm buffer overflows. enabled 4configChangedaccessremoteAlarmunknownStatepowerSupply1CvFail(CV only)powerSupply2CvFail(CV only)when the configuration of the CrocusSHDSL is changed.when a management session is started onthe Crocus SHDSL itself. This alarm is notactivated when the management session isestablished through a management concentrator.ExampleThe alarm …• is activated in case of a TMA, TMA CLI,terminal (CLI or ATWIN) or EasyConnectsession via the control connector ofthe Crocus SHDSL.• is not activated in case of any managementsession (TMA, terminal, Telnet,HTTP, etc.) established through a managementconcentrator on the CrocusSHDSL.when the remote Crocus SHDSL is in alarmcondition.each time a new Crocus SHDSL is addedto the network and before the managementconcentrator has completed a first successfulpolling session.when the upper power supply in the CN4card nest is not present or fails.This alarmexists on the CV only.when the lower power supply in the CN4card nest is not present or fails.This alarm exists on the CV only.disabled 1disabled 1disabled 0disabled 0disabled 3disabled 3

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 327Reference manualAlarm attributesThe alarm … is generated … Default valuealarmMaskalarmLevelpowerSupply48VFail(CV only)remotePowerFail(CV only)coldBootwarmBootcodeConsistencyFailconfigConsistencyFailwhen the directly connected -48 Vdc on theCN4 card nest is no longer present. Thismeans that the 115/230 Vac back-uppower supply has taken over.This alarm exists on the CV only.when the remote Crocus SHDSL is nolonger powered. The remote power failmechanism on the Crocus SHDSL complieswith the G.SHDSL standard.This alarm exists on the CV only.when the Crocus SHDSL performs a coldboot.when the Crocus SHDSL performs a warmboot.when the software consistency imposed bythe management concentrator on the CrocusSHDSL fails. For example, because ofa loss of contact.On the management concentrator, checkthe status attribute nmsgroup/softConsistencyStatusto determine the problem.when the configuration consistencyimposed by the management concentratoron the Crocus SHDSL fails. For example,because of a loss of contact.On the managementconcentrator, check the statusattributes nmsgroup/objectTable/configState andconfigDiag to determine the problem.disabled 3disabled 3disabled 1disabled 1disabled 1disabled 1crocusShdsl/Cold BootThis action will reboot the Crocus SHDSL while the power stays up (the Crocus SHDSL also reboots ifit is powered down and up again).

328 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributes10.4 Line alarmsThis section describes the following alarm attribute:• crocusShdsl/line/alarmInfo on page 329Refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarm attributes on page 317 for the general alarm attributes.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 329Reference manualAlarm attributescrocusShdsl/line/alarmInfoThe different alarms related to the line object together with their explanation and their default alarmMaskand alarmLevel value are given in the following table:The alarm … is generated … Default valuealarmMaskalarmLevellinkDowninvalidNumRepeaterswhen no data link towards the remote CrocusSHDSL is present.It does not necessarilymean that the line pair isdisconnected. If the line quality is so badthat data transfer is not possible, a linkDownalarm is generated.when the number of repeaters you enteredin the line/numExpectedRepeaters configurationattribute does not match the actual numberof repeaters discovered by the CrocusSHDSL.The actual number of repeatersdiscovered by the Crocus SHDSL can beseen in the line/numDiscoveredRepeaters statusattribute.enabled 3disabled 1testActive when a test is active. disabled 1remotePowerFail(CV only)when the remote Crocus SHDSL is nolonger powered . The remote power failmechanism on the Crocus SHDSL complieswith the G.SHDSL standard.Thisalarm exists on the CV only.disabled 3

330 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributes10.5 Line pair alarmsThis section describes the following alarm attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/alarmInfo on page 331In case of a Crocus SHDSL 2P, two linePair objects are present: linePair [1] and linePair [2].Refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarm attributes on page 317 for the general alarm attributes.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 331Reference manualAlarm attributescrocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/alarmInfoThe different alarms related to the linePair[ ] object together with their explanation and their default alarm-Mask and alarmLevel value are given in the following table:The alarm … is generated … Default valuealarmMaskalarmLevellinkDownlineAttenuationwhen no data link towards the remote CrocusSHDSL is present.It does not necessarily mean that the linepair is disconnected. If the line quality is sobad that data transfer is not possible, a link-Down alarm is generated.when the line attenuation exceeds thevalue configured in the line/linkAlarmThresholdsconfiguration attribute for at least 10seconds. The alarm is cleared when theline attenuation drops below this value forat least 10 seconds.Note however that in case the line/eocHandlingconfiguration attribute is set to alarm-Configuration, the central SHDSL deviceforces the remote SHDSL device to use thelinkAlarmThresholds/lineAttenuation as configuredon the central device.For more information, refer to …• 6.2.2 - The EOC handling attribute onpage 85• 6.2.4 - EOC retrieved information onpage 86enabled 3disabled 1

332 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributesThe alarm … is generated … Default valuealarmMaskalarmLevelsignalNoiseerrSecRatioExceededsevErrSecRatioExceededbBErrRatioExceededwhen the signal noise exceeds the valueconfigured in the line/linkAlarmThresholds configurationattribute for at least 10 seconds.The alarm is cleared when the signal noisedrops below this value for at least 10 seconds.Note however that in case the line/eocHandlingconfiguration attribute is set to alarm-Configuration, the central SHDSL deviceforces the remote SHDSL device to use thelinkAlarmThresholds/signalNoise as configuredon the central device.For more information, refer to …• 6.2.2 - The EOC handling attribute onpage 85• 6.2.4 - EOC retrieved information onpage 86when the errored seconds ratio exceedsthe value configured in the line/linkAlarm-Thresholds configuration attribute within a 15minute period 1 . The alarm is cleared whenthe errored seconds ratio drops below thisvalue within a 15 minute period.when the severely errored seconds ratioexceeds the value configured in the line/linkAlarmThresholds configuration attributewithin a 15 minute period 1 . The alarm iscleared when the severely errored secondsratio drops below this value within a 15minute period.when the background block error ratioexceeds the value configured in the line/linkAlarmThresholds configuration attributewithin a 15 minute period 1 . The alarm iscleared when the background block errorratio drops below this value within a 15minute period.disabled 1disabled 1disabled 2disabled 11. The alarm is checked every 15 minute period, which run synchronous with the 2 hour periodsof the line/h2Line performance attribute. Because alarms are raised or cleared within 15 minuteperiods, there is a delay in the alarm status. For example, suppose that in the first minute of a15 minute period the errSeceeded value is exceeded, then the errSeceeded alarm is raised. Thealarm stays on for the remainder of the 15 minute period. The alarm is only cleared if also inthe next 15 minute period the errSeceeded value is not exceeded.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 333Reference manualAlarm attributes10.6 Remote power alarmsThis section describes the following alarm attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/pwrSource/alarmInfo on page 334Refer to 10.3 - General alarms on page 325 for the general alarm attributes.

334 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributescrocusShdsl/line/linePair[ ]/pwrSource/alarmInfoThe different alarms related to the pwrSource objects together with their explanation and their default alarm-Mask and alarmLevel value are given in the following table:The alarm… is generated… Default valuealarmMaskalarmLevelhardwareFailmanuallyDisabledoverCurrentwhen the Remote Power source module isdefective.when the Remote Power source modulehas been disabled by the dedicated hardwarestrap on the Remote Power sourcemodule PCB. In this case it is not possibleto enable remote powering via a managementtool.has to deliver a current higher than 60 mA.This might indicate that:• the remote modem is defective and ashort circuit has occurred.• the Remote Power source module isdefective.• the line is short circuited.enabled 3disabled 1enabled 2

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 335Reference manualAlarm attributes10.7 Repeater and end alarmsThis section describes the following alarm attributes:• crocusShdsl/end/linePair[ ]/alarmInfo on page 336• The repeater[ ] and the end objects are not present in the containment tree by default. They are addedautomatically when you configure the eocHandling attribute. Refer to 6.2 - Configuring EOC handlingon page 83• Exactly which information is retrieved from the remote SHDSL device(s) through the EOC channeldepends on the setting of the eocHandling attribute. Refer to 6.2.4 - EOC retrieved information onpage 86.• The repeater[ ] and end objects contain the same attributes, therefore only the attributes of the endobject are listed here.• When the Crocus SHDSL is configured for 1 pair operation, the repeater[ ] and end[ ] objects networkLinePair[2]and customerLinePair[2] still appear in the containment tree (although 1 pair operation hasbeen configured).

336 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributescrocusShdsl/end/linePair[ ]/alarmInfoThe different alarms related to the linePair[ ] object together with their explanation and their default alarm-Mask and alarmLevel value are given in the following table:lThe alarm … is generated … DefaultvaluealarmMaskalarmLevellinkDownlineAttenuationwhen no data link towards the remote CrocusSHDSL is present.It does not necessarily mean that the linepair is disconnected. If the line quality is sobad that data transfer is not possible, a link-Down alarm is generated.when the line attenuation exceeds thevalue configured in the line/linkAlarmThresholdsconfiguration attribute of the localdevice for at least 10 seconds. The alarm iscleared when the line attenuation dropsbelow this value for at least 10 seconds.Note however that in case the line/eocHandlingconfiguration attribute is set to alarm-Configuration, the central SHDSL deviceforces the remote SHDSL device and anyintermediary repeater to use the linkAlarm-Thresholds/lineAttenuation as configured on thecentral device.For more information, refer to …• 6.2.2 - The EOC handling attribute onpage 85• 6.2.4 - EOC retrieved information onpage 86enabled 3disabled 1

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 337Reference manualAlarm attributesThe alarm … is generated … DefaultvaluealarmMaskalarmLevelsignalNoiseerrSeceededsevErrSecRatio-ExceededbBErreededwhen the signal noise exceeds the valueconfigured in the line/linkAlarmThresholds configurationattribute of the local device for atleast 10 seconds. The alarm is clearedwhen the signal noise drops below thisvalue for at least 10 seconds.Note however that in case the line/eocHandlingconfiguration attribute is set to alarm-Configuration, the central SHDSL deviceforces the remote SHDSL device and anyintermediary repeater to use the linkAlarm-Thresholds/signalNoise as configured on thecentral device.For more information, refer to …• 6.2.2 - The EOC handling attribute onpage 85• 6.2.4 - EOC retrieved information onpage 86when the errored seconds ratio exceedsthe value configured in the line/linkAlarm-Thresholds configuration attribute of the localdevice within a 15 minute period 1 . Thealarm is cleared when the errored secondsratio drops below this value within a 15minute period.when the severely errored seconds ratioexceeds the value configured in the line/linkAlarmThresholds configuration attribute ofthe local device within a 15 minute period 1 .The alarm is cleared when the severelyerrored seconds ratio drops below thisvalue within a 15 minute period.when the background block error ratioexceeds the value configured in the line/linkAlarmThresholds configuration attribute ofthe local device within a 15 minute period 1 .The alarm is cleared when the backgroundblock error ratio drops below this valuewithin a 15 minute period.disabled 1disabled 1disabled 2disabled 1

338 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributes1. The alarm is checked every 15 minute period, which run synchronous with the 2 hour periodsof the line/h2Line performance attribute. Because alarms are raised or cleared within 15 minuteperiods, there is a delay in the alarm status. For example, suppose that in the first minute of a15 minute period the errSeceeded value is exceeded, then the errSeceeded alarm is raised. Thealarm stays on for the remainder of the 15 minute period. The alarm is only cleared if also inthe next 15 minute period the errSeceeded value is not exceeded.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 339Reference manualAlarm attributes10.8 Interface alarmsThis section describes the following alarm attributes:• crocusShdsl//alarmInfo on page 340Refer to 10.2 - Introducing the alarm attributes on page 317 for the general alarm attributes.

340 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributescrocusShdsl//alarmInfoThe different alarms related to the object together with their explanation and their defaultalarmMask and alarmLevel value are given in the following table:The alarm … is generated … Default valuealarmMaskalarmLevellinkDown(for RS530, V35, V36)linkDown(for X21)linkDown(for G703 and G703Nx64k)linkDown(for Bridge)linkDown(for Router)ais(G703 and G703Nx64k only)lfa(G703 Nx64k only)when no RTS signal is detected. I.e. theconnection between the Crocus SHDSLand the DTE is down.The linkDown alarm isonly generated if the attribute rtsControl isset to external. If the attribute rtsControl is setto internal, the linkDown alarm will never begenerated.when no valid C signal is detected. I.e. theconnection between the Crocus SHDSLand the DTE is down.when there is a loss of signal. I.e. the transmitdata is no longer present.when there is no connection with the LAN.I.e. the LAN is not connected or no validLAN signals are present.when there is no connection between therouter and the Crocus SHDSL. Becausethis connection is made by the interfaceconnector, it is highly unlikely that thisalarm will be generated. However, when itdoes occur it might indicate that the routerinterface is faulty.when an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) hasbeen detected in the incoming G703 transmitdata (the alarm signal needs to beactive for at least one sceond). It means theapplication has detected an error.when the Frame Alignment Signal (FAS),which is present in time slot 0 of the G.704framed data, is not detected after a certainperiod.This alarm is also generated whenthe attribute crc4Insertion is set to enabled,but no CRC is sent by the application. (Thisdoes not apply when the crc4Insertion is setto auto.)enabled 3enabled 3enabled 3enabled 3enabled 3disabled 2disabled 2

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10 341Reference manualAlarm attributesThe alarm … is generated … Default valuealarmMaskalarmLevelrai(G703 Nx64k only)sq(G703 and G703Nx64k only)lossOfTiming(not for Bridge andRouter)backupTiming(RS530, V35, V36, X21only)when a Remote Alarm Indication signal(RAI) has been detected in the incomingreceive data. RAI means the far-end equipmenthas a problem with the signal it isreceiving from the local equipment.when the sqThreshold value, i.e. the numberof errored seconds, is exceeded within thesqTime.For example, if 10 (default) or moreerrored seconds occur within 1 minute(default), then a signal quality alarm is generated.Referto the configuration attributessqThreshold and sqTime for more information.when an external clocking mode is configuredbut the external clock signal is notpresent. In that case the Crocus SHDSLswitches to internal clocking mode.when a preferred clocking mode is configuredbut the external clock signal is notpresent. In that case the Crocus SHDSLswitches to alternative clocking mode.disabled 2disabled 2enabled 3disabled 2

342 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 10Reference manualAlarm attributes

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 11 343User manualTMA subsystem picture of the Crocus SHDSL11 TMA subsystem picture of the Crocus SHDSLThe subsystem picture is a TMA tool which visualises the status information of the Crocus SHDSL. Thischapter explains how to display the subsystem picture, and how to interpret the visual indications. Thefollowing gives an overview of this chapter.• 11.1 - Displaying the subsystem picture on page 344• 11.2 - Subsystem picture elements on page 345Note that the figures in this chapter are those of a Crocus SHDSL. Although the subsystem picture ofthe CV has a different layout, the interpretation of the visual indications is the same.

344 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 11User manualTMA subsystem picture of the Crocus SHDSL11.1 Displaying the subsystem pictureTo display the subsystem picture of the Crocus SHDSL, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Open a TMA session on the Crocus SHDSL. Refer to 4.1 - Starting TMA on the CrocusSHDSL on page 58.2 In the TMA window, press on the subsystem picture button: .The subsystem picture is displayed:3 To close the subsystem picture, press .

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 11 345User manualTMA subsystem picture of the Crocus SHDSL11.2 Subsystem picture elementsThis section displays and labels the different elements of the subsystem picture. It also explains how thevisual indications should be interpreted.Below, the Crocus SHDSL subsystem picture is displayed.When TMA fails to upload the sub-system picture info (e.g. because TMA is disconnected), then theLEDs and connectors are greyed-out.

346 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 11User manualTMA subsystem picture of the Crocus SHDSLThe table below gives an overview of the subsystem picture elements and what they indicate:ElementLED indicatorsDescriptionThey reflect the actual status of the Crocus SHDSL. The LED indication on thesubsystem picture corresponds with the LED indication on the Crocus SHDSLitself. For more information on the interpretation of the LEDs, refer to 2.10 - Frontpanel LED indicators on page 39.DTE interfaceThis reflects the status of the DTE interface. The possible indications are:• none: If the DTE interface slot in the subsystem picture is blank, it means thatno DTE interface module was present at power-up.• green: No alarm of the object is active.• red: An (unmasked) alarm of the object is active.The layout of the connector also gives an indication of the type of DTE interfacewhich is currently used in the Crocus SHDSL.Remark• The colours of the DTE interface only change if the alarms related to the object are set to enabled in the alarmMask. For more information,refer to 10.2.1 - Configuration alarm attributes on page 318.• In case of a Router interface the LAN interface connector displays the operationalstatus between the Router interface and the Crocus SHDSL. This impliesthat as soon as you insert a Router interface in the Crocus SHDSL the LANinterface colours green, disregarding of the operational status of the Routerinterface itself. For that information you have to connect to the Router interface.lineThis reflects the status of the line. The possible indications are:• green outside: No (unmasked) alarm of the line object is active.• red outside: An (unmasked) alarm of the line object is active.• green inside: No (unmasked) alarm of the linePair object is active.• red inside: An (unmasked) alarm of the linePair object is active.The colours of the interfaces only change if the alarms related to the line and/orlinePair object are set to enabled in the alarmMask. For more information, refer to10.2.1 - Configuration alarm attributes on page 318.Example:If you want to avoid that the outside of the line connector turns red every time youexecute a test, set the alarm testActive in the alarmMask of the line object to disabled.Note that by doing so, you also disable the sending of the testActive alarm to thecentral management system (e.g. HP OpenView).

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12 347User manualSoftware download12 Software downloadThis chapter explains how to download new loader and application software (also called firmware) intothe flash memory of the Crocus SHDSL. The following gives an overview of this chapter.• 12.1 - What is boot, loader and application software? on page 348• 12.2 - Important download issues on page 352• 12.3 - Downloading with TMA on page 353• 12.4 - Downloading with TML on page 354• 12.5 - Downloading in loader mode on page 355• 12.6 - Downloading in boot mode on page 356• 12.7 - Downloading via a management concentrator on page 357

348 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12User manualSoftware download12.1 What is boot, loader and application software?This section explains the difference between boot, loader and application software. The following givesan overview of this section:• 12.1.1 - What is boot software? on page 349• 12.1.2 - What is loader software? on page 350• 12.1.3 - What is application software? on page 351

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12 349User manualSoftware download12.1.1 What is boot software?What is boot software?The boot software takes care of the start-up of the Crocus SHDSL. It is located on the lowest softwarelevel.Functionality in boot modeIn boot mode you can only download loader software to the Crocus SHDSL.The boot mode DIP switchYou can force the Crocus SHDSL in boot mode using a DIP switch. This is necessary in case you wantto download new loader software.How to identify the Crocus SHDSL runs in boot mode?When the Crocus SHDSL runs in boot mode …• the PWR LED is on• the RXD and TXD LED are in a random state• all other LEDs are off.

350 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12User manualSoftware download12.1.2 What is loader software?What is loader software?The loader software takes care of the download of application software to the Crocus SHDSL. It islocated on the middle software level.When you start a download of application software while in application mode, the Crocus SHDSL automaticallyfalls back to loader mode.Functionality in loader modeIn loader mode the Crocus SHDSL has limited functionality. In loader mode you can …• download application software to the local Crocus SHDSL• download application software over the line to a remote Crocus SHDSL.However, while in loader mode the Crocus SHDSL can not …• transfer data• be accessed with TMA• be configured.The loader mode DIP switchYou can force the Crocus SHDSL in loader mode using a DIP switch. This is necessary in case you wantto download new application software.How to identify the Crocus SHDSL runs in loader mode?When the Crocus SHDSL runs in loader mode …• the PWR LED is on• the TST LED is on.When the Crocus SHDSL switches from loader mode to application mode, the TST LED flashes 5 times.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12 351User manualSoftware download12.1.3 What is application software?What is application software?The application software, also called firmware, completely controls the Crocus SHDSL. It is located onthe highest software level.Functionality in application modeIn application mode the Crocus SHDSL has full functionality.

352 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12User manualSoftware download12.2 Important download issues• When downloading new application software, there is a software / hardware combination that has along service down time and one that has a short service down time (less than 3 minutes). To find outwhich is which, refer to 1.4 - Application software overview on page 8.• When you upgrade the application software of the Crocus SHDSL, do not power off the CrocusSHDSL until the TST LED stops blinking. Else the application software upgrade will fail.• When a Crocus SHDSL is managed by a management concentrator (i.e. it is present in the managementconcentrator its objectTable and being polled), it is no longer possible to download softwarethrough the Crocus SHDSL its control connector using TMA or TML. Instead, use the software distributionfeature of the management concentrator.• It is not possible to use the software distribution feature of a management concentrator to downloadloader software to a Crocus SHDSL.• When you download new loader software, you also have to download the application software again.• It is not possible to explicitly download software to modem B of a Crocus SHDSL CV Twin. Thisbecause a Crocus SHDSL CV Twin uses the same software for both modem A and B.However, it is possible to download software to a router interface inserted in modem B or to modemB its remote counterpart.• You can not download application code to a Crocus SHDSL through a G703 interface (using the SAbits,refer to 6.12.6 - Configuring the management data on a G703 interface on page 165). Thisbecause when you start the download, the Crocus SHDSL falls into loader mode. In this mode, theDTE interface is not supported (i.e. it is not running).

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12 353User manualSoftware download12.3 Downloading with TMATo download application software with TMA, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Establish a link between TMA and the Crocus SHDSL through the control connector.Refer to 4.1 - Starting TMA on the Crocus SHDSL on page 58.2 In the TMA window select Tools → Download…3 In the TMA - Download window, select the Options tab:·• Set the initial transfer speed to 9600 bps.·• If you set the maximum transfer speed to 115200 bps, the actual transfer speed willbe negotiated between the computer and the Crocus SHDSL and will be between9600 bps and 115200 bps.4 In the TMA - Download window, select the Configuration tab, and press Add…5 In the Remote filename window:1. Select the filename you want to download (Txxxxxxx.00).2. Type CONTROL in the Remote file field.3. Press Open.6 When the TMA - Download window reappears, press OK.⇒The Crocus SHDSL falls back to loader mode, then a DOS window opens andshows the download progress.

354 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12User manualSoftware download12.4 Downloading with TMLWhen downloading with TMA (as explained in the previous section), you actually evoke TML (TelindusMemory Loader) through TMA. You can also use TML without opening TMA.To download application software with TML, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Connect a serial port of your computer (e.g. COM1) through a straight DB9 male - femalecable with the control connector of your Crocus SHDSL as shown in the following figure:2 Open a DOS window on your computer.3 Go to the directory where the TML executable is located. Typically this isC:\Program Files\TMA.4 Place the software file you want to download in this directory.5 Type the following command to download:• application software: tml -c1 -v -f@CONTROLwhere …• tml is the executable (Telindus Memory Loader) to download files to the Telindusdevices through their control port• -c1 specifies the COM port of the computer connected to the Crocus SHDSL (in thisexample COM1)• -v returns graphical information on the download status• -f is the software file you want to download (e.g. T1212001.00)• CONTROL (in capitals!) specifies that the destination is a flash bank of the CrocusSHDSL.To see a list of all the possible TML options: type TML in your DOS windows and pressthe ENTER key.6 If you press the ENTER key, the software download begins.If you used the -v optiontogether with the TML command, a graphical bar shows the download progress.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12 355User manualSoftware download12.5 Downloading in loader modeWhen a download of application software has failed or when a flash memory error occurs, the CrocusSHDSL normally remains in loader mode. In other words, you can immediately retry to download theapplication software again.However, it may be possible that the application software becomes corrupt making the Crocus SHDSLinoperative and inaccessible to TMA. In that case, new application software can still be downloaded byforcing the Crocus SHDSL in loader mode using a DIP switch (refer to 3.1.2 - DIP switches of the TT onpage 48 and 3.2.2 - DIP switches of the CV on page 53.To download application software to a Crocus SHDSL in loader mode, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Disconnect the Crocus SHDSL from the power supply.2 Set DIP switch bank DS1 position 2 to off.To locate this DIP switch bank and for the DIP switch setting procedure, refer to 3 - DIPswitches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL on page 45.3 Reconnect the power supply to the Crocus SHDSL.⇒The Crocus SHDSL is now in loader mode.4 Now proceed as explained in 12.4 - Downloading with TML on page 354.5 When the download is finished, disconnect the Crocus SHDSL from the power supplyagain.6 Reset DIP switch bank DS1 position 2 to on.7 Reconnect the power supply to the Crocus SHDSL.

356 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12User manualSoftware download12.6 Downloading in boot modeWhen a download of loader software has failed or when a flash memory error occurs, it may be possiblethat the loader software becomes corrupt making the Crocus SHDSL inoperative and inaccessible toTMA. In that case, new loader software can still be downloaded by forcing the Crocus SHDSL in bootmode. This is done by means of the boot mode DIP switch:DIP switch name DS1 no. Setting Functionboot mode 1 on Normal operation.offStart up in boot mode.To download loader software to a Crocus SHDSL in boot mode, proceed as follows:StepAction1 Disconnect the Crocus SHDSL from the power supply.2 Set DIP switch bank DS1 position 1 to off.To locate this DIP switch bank and for the DIP switch setting procedure, refer to Chapter3 - DIP switches and straps of the Crocus SHDSL on page 45.3 Reconnect the power supply to the Crocus SHDSL.⇒The Crocus SHDSL is now in boot mode.4 Now proceed as explained in 12.4 - Downloading with TML on page 354.5 When the download is finished, disconnect the Crocus SHDSL from the power supplyagain.6 Reset DIP switch bank DS1 position 1 to on.7 Reconnect the power supply to the Crocus SHDSL.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12 357User manualSoftware download12.7 Downloading via a management concentratorIf many Crocus SHDSL Card Version modems need a software update, it is more efficient to use thesoftware distribution feature of the management concentrator (e.g. Orchid 1003 LAN or Telindus 1035Orchid). In that case, the software file that is present on the file system of the management concentratoris downloaded over the high speed bus to the Crocus SHDSL CV.Also the Crocus SHDSL CVs their remote counterparts (which are often Table Tops) can get a softwareupdate using the management concentrator its software distribution feature.For more information, refer to the manual of the management concentrator.

358 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 12User manualSoftware download

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13 359User manualDiagnostic tests13 Diagnostic testsThis chapter describes the diagnostic tests of the Crocus SHDSL. The following gives an overview ofthis chapter.• 13.1 - Introducing the diagnostic tests on page 360• 13.2 - Line tests on page 361• 13.3 - Interface tests on page 369• 13.4 - Repeater tests on page 370

360 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13User manualDiagnostic tests13.1 Introducing the diagnostic testsThis section gives some introductory notes on the diagnostic tests.Test originators and corresponding priority levelsThe following table shows the possible test originators and their priority level.Diagnostic tests can be generated by …the management system,the keyboard,the application via the interface,the remote Crocus SHDSL,(RDL test only)with the priority level …high.medium.low.low.ExamplePhase Action Result1 Start an interface test, for example AL. The AL test is started.2 Start a test in TMA, for example RDL. The AL test stops, and the RDL test starts.This because the interface test has a lowerpriority than the TMA test.3 Stop the TMA test. The interface test, in this case AL, isrestarted.Important remarks• Within the same priority level, the rule "first come, first served" applies.• The management system can stop a test started by any originator.• Depending how you start a test using the keyboard or the EasyConnect, the originator (and hencethe priority level) differs. If you start a test using the keyboard or the EasyConnect …- via the test "window" of the Crocus SHDSL (refer to 5.5 - The test window on page 77), then theoriginator is called keyboard.- by browsing the model using the testActivation action in the line object / status group (refer to 5.6 -The model browsing window on page 78), then the originator is called nms (network managementsystem).• During the execution of a test, no normal data communication is possible. In order to avoid that thetest would stay active for an indefinite time, and thus blocking the normal data transfer, a testDurationattribute is linked to the tests (refer to 7.3 - Line configuration attributes on page 194). This attributedetermines how long a test lasts.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13 361User manualDiagnostic tests13.2 Line testsThis section describes the diagnostic tests you can start on the line of the Crocus SHDSL. The followinggives an overview of this section:• 13.2.1 - The line test action on page 362• 13.2.2 - Error test on page 364• 13.2.3 - Analogue loop on page 365• 13.2.4 - Remote digital loop on page 366• 13.2.5 - Digital loop on page 368

362 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13User manualDiagnostic tests13.2.1 The line test actionThis section describes the following test attributes:• crocusShdsl/line/testActivation on page 363• crocusShdsl/line/testDuration on page 363

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13 363User manualDiagnostic testsThe location of the testActivation attribute in the Crocus SHDSL containment tree is:crocusShdsl/line/testActivationUse this action to perform a test on the Crocus SHDSL. These tests are usefulto trace possible problems. Possible tests are: no, al, dl, rdl, et, alEt, rdlEt.To execute a test, proceed as follows:(Status + Performance group)StepAction1 In the TMA window, select the object line and the group Performance or Status.2 In the action window of TMA, click the left mouse button on the field under the headingArgument Value.⇒A drop down box appears.3 In the drop down box, select the test you want to execute.4 Press the right mouse button and select Execute.crocusShdsl/line/testDurationUse the testDuration attribute to set the time-out period of diagnostic tests.Tests are automatically terminated after this time-out period.Default:00000d 00h 03m 00sRange: 00000d 00h 00m 01s -00000d 18h 12m 15sThe time-out ranges from 00000d 00h 00m 01s up to 00000d 18h 12m 15s. Entering 00000d 00h 00m 00s disablesthe time-out period (i.e. diagnostic tests are not terminated after a time-out period).

364 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13User manualDiagnostic tests13.2.2 Error testInitiating the ET test activates the internal error test pattern generator and detector. Possible errors whichare received by the detector are accumulated in an internal register. The amount of errors can be seenwith TMA, namely in the status attribute errorCount of the line object. The error LED on the front panel willalso light.When the central modem uses a Dual Port G703-Serial interface and the remote modem uses a differentinterface, then starting an ET test on the remote modem only gives erroneous results.How to use this test?Example:PhaseDescription1 Start an ET test on the local Crocus SHDSL.⇒A test pattern is sent down the line.2 Start an ET test on the remote Crocus SHDSL.⇒The detector of the remote Crocus SHDSL receives this test pattern, andlooks for possible errors in the pattern. The quantity of errors could be anindication of the line quality.Clocking during an ET testWhen an ET test is activated, the Crocus SHDSL switches to internal clocking mode.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13 365User manualDiagnostic tests13.2.3 Analogue loopInitiating the AL test establishes an analogue loop on the local Crocus SHDSL. This loop is compliant toloop 3 as described in the ITU-T recommendation V.54.The loop is situated immediately behind the analogue part of the local Crocus SHDSL, schematically representedas follows:How to use this test?Example:PhaseDescription1 Start an AL test on the local Crocus SHDSL.⇒An analogue loop is established on the local Crocus SHDSL.2 Send data with the application.⇒If this data is received again by the application, the connection between the DTEand the Crocus SHDSL is OK. If not, it is possible that there is a bad connectionbetween the DTE and the Crocus SHDSL.In combination with the ET test, the AL test can also be used as a self-test of the Crocus SHDSL.Clocking during an AL testThe following table shows what happens with the clocking on the Crocus SHDSL when an AL test is activated:If the Crocus SHDSL is in …internal clocking modeexternal clocking modeslave receive clocking modeand an AL test is activated, then it …remains in internal clocking mode.remains in external clocking mode.switches to internal clocking mode.

366 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13User manualDiagnostic tests13.2.4 Remote digital loopInitiating the RDL test establishes a digital loop on the remote Crocus SHDSL. This loop is compliant toloop 2 as described in the ITU-T recommendation V.54.The loop is situated immediately behind the digital part of the remote Crocus SHDSL, schematically representedas follows:Make sure that on the remote Crocus SHDSL the rdlDetect attribute is set to enabled (refer to 7.6 - DTEInterface configuration attributes on page 212). Else it is not possible to initiate an RDL test on theremote.How to use this test?Example:PhaseDescription1 Start an RDL-ET test on the local Crocus SHDSL.⇒A digital loop is established on the remote Crocus SHDSL and a test pattern is sentdown the line.2 Because the remote side is in a digital loop, the test pattern returns to the local CrocusSHDSL.3 The detector receives this test pattern, and can compare it with the original transmittedpattern.⇒The quantity of inconsistencies that might exist between the original and thereturned pattern could be an indication of the line quality.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13 367User manualDiagnostic testsClocking during an RDL testThe following table shows what happens with the clocking on the Crocus SHDSL when an RDL test isactivated:If the … Crocus SHDSL is in … and an RDL test is activated,then it ….local internal clocking mode remains in internal clockingmode.external clocking modeslave receive clocking moderemains in external clockingmode.switches to internal clockingmode.remote any clocking mode switches to slave receive clockingmode.

368 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13User manualDiagnostic tests13.2.5 Digital loopInitiating the DL test also establishes a digital loop, but on the local Crocus SHDSL itself. This loop iscompliant to loop 2 as described in the ITU-T recommendation V.54.The loop is situated immediately behind the digital part of the remote Crocus SHDSL, schematically representedas follows:How to use this test?With this test, you can verify the same things as with the remote digital loop. The only difference is thatthe loop is not made on the remote Crocus SHDSL (as with RDL), but on the local Crocus SHDSL. Thiscan be necessary when, for example, the remote Crocus SHDSL is unable to initiate a remote digitalloop test.Clocking during a DL testWhen a DL test is activated, the Crocus SHDSL switches to slave receive clocking mode.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13 369User manualDiagnostic tests13.3 Interface testsFor some DTE interfaces it is possible that the application (the DTE) initiates a test on the Crocus SHDSLvia the interface. The following table gives an overview of which tests are available on which interfaces.It also gives a short description of the available tests.Available testsAnalog loop (AL)Remote DigitalLoop (RDL)DescriptionFor …• RS530, V35 and V36 the activation of the AL test signal (circuit 141)• G703 Nx64k the sending of the Sa6 bit sequence 1111… initiates an analogue loop (loop 3) on the local Crocus SHDSL, in compliancewith ITU-T recommendation V.54. Refer to 13.2.3 - Analogue loop on page 365.For …• RS530, V35 and V36 the activation of the RDL test signal (circuit 140)• G703 Nx64k the sending of the Sa6 bit sequence 1010… initiates a digital loop (loop 2) on the remote Crocus SHDSL, in compliance withITU-T recommendation V.54. Refer to 13.2.4 - Remote digital loop on page 366.• Note that also these tests are automatically terminated after the time-out period as set using the test-Duration attribute.• The interface tests can be disabled via the tests attribute.

370 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13User manualDiagnostic tests13.4 Repeater testsThis section describes the following test attributes:• crocusShdsl/repeater/loopbackActivation on page 371• crocusShdsl/line/testDuration on page 371

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13 371User manualDiagnostic testsThe location of the loopbackActivation attribute in the Crocus SHDSL containment tree is:crocusShdsl/repeater/loopbackActivationUse this action to set up a loop at the network side of the Crocus SHDSLRepeater:(Status group)Set the loop by selecting the action argument value initiateNetworkLoopback and executing the action (double-clickthe loopbackActivation string). Stop the loop by selecting the action argument value clearAllMaintenanceStatesand executing the action (double-click the loopbackActivation string).Important remarks• You can only set up a loop at the network side of the Crocus SHDSL Repeater. Not at the customerside.• You can only start the loopbackActivation action on the central device. Not on the remote device.• You can only start the loopbackActivation action in case the line/eocHandling attribute is set to alarmConfiguration.• The loopbackActivation action argument value noAction does nothing. It is only present to have a defaultvalue.crocusShdsl/line/testDurationUse the testDuration attribute to set the time-out period of diagnostic tests.Tests are automatically terminated after this time-out period.Default:00000d 00h 03m 00sRange: 00000d 00h 00m 01s -00000d 18h 12m 15sThe time-out ranges from 00000d 00h 00m 01s up to 00000d 18h 12m 15s. Entering 00000d 00h 00m 00s disablesthe time-out period (i.e. diagnostic tests are not terminated after a time-out period).Note that the Crocus SHDSL Repeater rounds off these values. If you set the testDuration attribute to avalue under 1 minute, then this becomes 1 minute on the Crocus SHDSL Repeater. A value between 1and 2 minutes becomes 2 minutes on the Crocus SHDSL Repeater. Etc.

372 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 13User manualDiagnostic tests

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14 373User manualTechnical specifications14 Technical specificationsThis chapter gives the technical specifications of the Crocus SHDSL. The following gives an overview ofthis chapter.• 14.1 - Crocus SHDSL types on page 374• 14.2 - Line specifications on page 375• 14.3 - RJ45 - RJ12 adapter specifications on page 377• 14.4 - Maximum covered distance on a noise free line on page 378• 14.5 - G703 interface specifications on page 379• 14.6 - RS530 interface specifications on page 380• 14.7 - Management interface connectors on page 382• 14.8 - Control connector on page 383• 14.9 - Diagnostic tests on page 384• 14.10 - Power requirements on page 385• 14.11 - Thermal behaviour when providing remote power on page 386• 14.12 - Environmental compliance on page 387• 14.13 - Safety compliance on page 388• 14.14 - Over-voltage and over-current protection compliance on page 388• 14.15 - EMC compliance on page 388• 14.16 - Mechanical dimensions on page 388

374 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14User manualTechnical specifications14.1 Crocus SHDSL typesThe following Crocus SHDSL types exist:• desktop units (Table Top or TT):- separate 115/230Vac and -48Vdc versions- separate 1 pair and 2 pair versions• rack-mount units (Card Version or CV):- 1 pair version: 2 modems per card- 2 pair version: 1 modem per card

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14 375User manualTechnical specifications14.2 Line specifications• Single pair or two pair line access• Full duplex transmission• Connector: RJ45• Impedance: 135 ohm• Coding: TC PAM, compliant to ITU-T G.991.2 (G.SHDSL)• Line speeds:- 1 pair: N x 64 kbps (N = 1 … 36)- 2 pair: N x 128 kbps (N = 1 … 36)• Handshaking: compliant to G.994.1 (automatic speed negotiation) or fixed speed• Performance monitoring: compliant to G.826 (errored seconds, severely errored seconds, unavailabilityseconds)• Round trip delay: 0.6 msIn case of a G.703 Nx64k interface, the round trip delay ranges from 0.6 ms (unframed) over 0.8 ms(framed, all timeslots on) up to 3.1 ms (framed, 3 timeslots on).

376 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14User manualTechnical specifications• The following table shows the connector layout of the RJ45 line connector.Pin Signal Figure1 not used2 not used3 line 2 14 line 15 line 16 line 2 17 not used8 not used1. For a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version only

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14 377User manualTechnical specifications14.3 RJ45 - RJ12 adapter specificationsIf you have a line cable with an RJ12 connector, you first have to plug in the RJ45 to RJ12 adapter in theline connector of the Crocus SHDSL.The following table shows the connector layout of the RJ12 adapter connector.Pin Signal Figure1 not used2 line 2 13 line 14 line 15 line 2 16 not used1. For a Crocus SHDSL 2P (2 pair) version only

378 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14User manualTechnical specifications14.4 Maximum covered distance on a noise free lineCovered distance (km)Line speed (kbps)Wire diameter (mm)1P 2P 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1,164 128 11,0 15,1 21,5 22,5 27,2 34,6 39,3128 256 8,0 11,0 15,6 16,4 19,8 25,2 28,6256 512 8,2 11,3 16,0 16,8 20,3 25,8 29,3512 1024 7,2 9,9 14,0 14,7 17,8 22,7 25,71024 2048 5,5 7,6 10,7 11,3 13,6 17,3 19,61536 3072 4,0 5,5 7,8 8,2 9,9 12,6 14,32048 4096 4,2 5,8 8,2 8,6 10,4 13,2 152304 4608 4,0 5,5 7,8 8,2 9,9 12,6 14,3• These values are valid starting from Crocus SHDSL PCB revision 1.2 and firmware revision T2141/00800, T2145/00600 and T2136/01300 and higher.• If the Signal to Noise ratio is 23dB, this matches a noise margin of 0dB. A noise margin of minimum2dB is considered a minimum for an error ratio that matches at least 10E-7 (= S/N ratio of 25dB). Inperformance tests with noise, a noise margin of 6dB is usually taken (matching S/N ratio 29dB). Fromexperience, it can be concluded that a 27dB S/N ratio gives no errors, at 25dB errors are rare.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14 379User manualTechnical specifications14.5 G703 interface specificationsSome of the G703 interface specifications are related to the device it is used in (in this case the CrocusSHDSL). Therefore the G703 interface specifications are listed below:• Types: G703 and G703 Nx64k• Compliance: ITU-T G.703• Connector: 2 BNCs, 1 RJ45• Impedance: 75 or 120 ohm (strap selectable)• Coding: AMI or HDB3 (configurable)• Performance monitoring: compliant to G.826• Jitter and wander: compliant to G.823• Speed (G703): fixed 2 Mbps user and line speed• Speed (G703 Nx64k): fixed 2 Mbps user speed (for this interface, time slots have to be configuredinstead of a user speed). Line speeds up to 2 Mbps.• Framing (G703 Nx64k): framed or unframed (configurable), framing compliant to G.704• Time slots (G703 Nx64k):- 1 pair: N x 64 kbps (N = 1 … 32)- 2 pair: N x 128 kbps (N = 1 … 16)• CRC4 insertion (G703 Nx64k): enabled, disabled or automatic detection (configurable), frame alignmentand cyclic redundancy check compliant to ITU-T G.706• Defect detection: compliant to ITU-T G.775• The following table shows the connector layout of the RJ45 line connector.Pin Signal DCE Figure1 receive A (+) output2 receive B (-) output3 signal ground -4 transmit A (+) input5 transmit B (-) input6 signal ground -7 not used -8 not used -

380 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14User manualTechnical specifications14.6 RS530 interface specifications• Connector: 25 pins subD, female (DCE). The following figure shows the connector layout:• Connector compliance:- directly compliant with RS530, RS530A- compliant through adapter cable with V.35 or V.35 Interim, V.36, (RS449), X.21, V.24 (RS232)• Applicable standards ITU-T V.10, V.11• Cable to be used: shielded twisted pair• Operation modes: RS-530, RS-530A, V.35 Interim, V.36, X.21 or V.24 (configurable)• Speed:- 1 pair: up to 2304 kbps- 2 pair: up to 4608 kbps• Clocking: internal, external, slave receive, auto.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14 381User manualTechnical specifications• The following table shows the connector layout of the RS530 connector:Pin Signal Abbreviation DCE V10/V11/V28operation1 Shield - - -2 Transmit Data A TXD A In V.11/V.283 Received Data A RXD A Out V.11/V.285 Clear to Send A CTS A Out V.10/V.11/V.286 DCE Ready A DSR A Out V.10/V.11/V.287 Signal Ground SGND - -8 Received Line Signal Detector A DCD A Out V.10/V.11/V.289 Received Signal Element Timing B RXCLK B Out V.1110 Received Line Signal Detector B DCD B Out V.10/V.1111 External Signal Element Timing B EXTCLK B In V.1112 Transmit Signal Element Timing B TXCLK B Out V.1113 Clear To Send B CTS B Out V.10/V.1114 Transmit Data B TXD B In V.1115 Transmitted Signal Element Timing A TXCLK A Out V.11/V.2816 Received Data B RXD B Out V.1117 Received Signal Element Timing A RXCLK A Out V.11/V.2818 Local Loopback AL In V.10/V.2820 Data terminal Ready A DTR A In V.10/V.11/V.2821 Remote Loopback RDL In V.10/V.2822 DCE Ready B DSR B Out V.10/V.1123 Data terminal Ready B DTR B In V.10/V.1124 External Signal Element Timing A EXTCLK A In V.11/V.2825 Test Indicator TI Out V.10/V.28

382 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14User manualTechnical specifications14.7 Management interface connectorsThe possible management interface connectors are:Management interface connectorasynchronous through the controlconnectorConnector type9 pins subD (on the CrocusSHDSL)Speed9600 bps, 8+Nsynchronous through a managementconcentrator and thehigh speed busbackplane DIN (on the CN4 cardnest)800 kbpsFor all available management tools, refer to 1.7 - Maintenance and management tools connection possibilitieson page 12.

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14 383User manualTechnical specifications14.8 Control connectorThe control connector (sometimes also called control port) is a 9 pins subD connector that is labelledCTRL. The signals on this connector are V.24 / V.28 signals.The control connector layoutThe control connector has the following pin layout:Pin Signal DCE Figure1 not used -2 NMS RxD output3 NMS TxD input4 not used -5 GND -6 not used -7 not used -8 not used -9 not used -Table Top• The connection with the computer running TMA can be made with a straight 9 pins subD (Male/Female) cable or a regular 25/9 pins subD adapter cable.• The cable which is used to connect the TT with the 1035 Orchid LAN management concentrator canbe ordered at the distributor (code 149220).Card Version• The connection with the computer running TMA can be made with a straight 9 pins subD (Male/Female) cable or a regular 25/9 pins subD adapter cable.• The connection to the Orchid 1003 LAN management concentrator is made through the high speedbus of the CN4 card nest. Refer to the CN4 manual for more information.

384 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14User manualTechnical specifications14.9 Diagnostic testsThe following diagnostic test are available on the Crocus SHDSL:• Analogue Loop (AL)• Digital Loop (DL)• Remote Digital Loop (RDL)• Error Test (ET) (test pattern ITU 2E15-1)

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14 385User manualTechnical specifications14.10 Power requirementsThe power requirements for the different Crocus SHDSL types are as follows:PmaxInput powerVersion 230 Vac (85 à 265 Vac) 1-48 Vdc (-36 Vdc à -72 Vdc)Table Top 1P 9 W 4 WTable Top 2P 15 W 8 WCard Version 1P - 8 WCard Version 2P - 16 W1. Using the Friwo AC/DC adapter 230Vac → 9Vdc/1A, approx. 50% efficiency, sales code175590.

386 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14User manualTechnical specifications14.11 Thermal behaviour when providing remote powerThis section specifically refers to the Crocus SHDSL Card Verions that can be inserted in the CN4 rack,being the central part of the network (with a number of Crocus SHDSL TT ‘s at the remote side).When using remote power, certain limitations apply with regards to the number of Card Versions thatcan be inserted in the CN4, CN4-4 and CN4-2 rack. The following table gives an overview:RackLimitationsCN4-2 • Only 1 card allowed that provides remote power• This card must be inserted in the lowest of both slots where cooling ismore efficient.• DC or AC powering• In the top slot, it is allowed to insert a card, under the condition that itdoes not provide remote power• Ambient temperature must not be higher than 50 °CCN4-4 • Maximum 4 cards that provide remote power are allowed• DC or AC powering• AC powering with 300W PSU• AC power redundancy is allowed (if 2 AC PSU 's are present)• Ambient temperature must not be higher than 45 °C• natural cooling of the CN4-4 must be effective : the CN4-4 must be usedin an upright position, not lying flat on its sideCN4 • Maximum 12 cards that provide remote power are allowed• DC or AC powering• AC powering with 2 300W PSU 's.• No AC power redundancy allowed• Ambient temperature must not be higher than 40 °C• natural cooling of the CN4 must be effective

Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14 387User manualTechnical specifications14.12 Environmental compliance• Storage conditions: ETSI ETS 300 019-1-1 Class 1.1. In addition, the storage temperature has to bebetween -25 to +70°C• Transport conditions: ETSI ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3• Stationary use conditions: ETSI ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.2. In addition, the requirements belowapply:- relative humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing and ambient operational temperature -10 to 50°C,unless otherwise stated in 14.11 - Thermal behaviour when providing remote power on page 386• Maximum altitude: 3000m• International protection (IP) class of protection against solid and liquids: IP40

388 Crocus SHDSL Chapter 14User manualTechnical specifications14.13 Safety compliance• EN60950-1• Class 1 equipment for Table Tops with 115/230 Vac internal power supply.• Class 3 equipment for …- Table Tops with 115/230 Vac external power supply adapter- Table Tops with -48 Vdc internal power supply- Card Versions.14.14 Over-voltage and over-current protection complianceThe over-voltage and over-current protection complies with ITU-T K.44 and ETSI ETS 300 386-2 recommendations.14.15 EMC compliance• EN55022 B Emissions• EN55024 Immunity• EN61000-3-2 Harmonics• EN61000-3-3 Voltage fluctuations and flicker• EN61000-4-2 ESD• EN61000-4-3 Radiated immunity• EN61000-4-4 EFT/burst• EN61000-4-5 Surge• EN61000-4-6 Conducted immunity• EN61000-4-8 Power magnetic field immunity• EN61000-4-11 Voltage dips & drops• ENV50204 Radiated immunity against digital radio telephone14.16 Mechanical dimensionsThe mechanical dimensions are as follows:DimensionsTable Topheight (mm) 45width (mm) 220depth (mm)weight (kg)215 excl. interface235 incl. interface0.75 (excl. interface)

Crocus SHDSL 389AnnexAnnex

390 Crocus SHDSLAnnex

Crocus SHDSL Annex A: 391Annexproduct informationAnnex A: product informationThe following table displays the product information of the Crocus SHDSL basic units.Sales code Product name Description180055 Crocus SHDSL RJ45 TT BU VAC Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair, Basic Unit,no interface provided. Interface module availableas separate sales item. wide-range Vac(Replacement for code 170814)180056 Crocus SHDSL RJ45 TT BU 48VDC Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair, Basic Unit,no interface provided. Interface module availableas separate sales item. 48 Vdc (Replacement ofcode: 171284)180054 Crocus SHDSL +LCD RJ45 TT BU VAC Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair, Basic Unit,Keyboard and LCD for local programming, nointerface provided. Interface module available asseparate sales item. wide-range Vac(Replacement of code: 177936)180053 Crocus SHDSL 2P RJ45 TT BU VAC Crocus SHDSL table top on 2 line pairs for longerdistances or speeds up to 4Mbit/s, Basic Unit, nointerface provided. Interface module available asseparate sales item. wide-range Vac(Replacement for code 171975)171976 Crocus SHDSL 2P TT BU 48VDC Crocus SHDSL table top on 2 line pairs for longerdistances or speeds up to 4Mbit/s, Basic Unit, nointerface provided. Interface module available asseparate sales item. 48 Vdc177938 Crocus SHDSL 2P +LCD TT BU VAC Crocus SHDSL table top on 2 line pairs for longerdistances or speeds up to 4Mbit/s, Basic Unit,Keyboard and LCD for local programming, nointerface provided. Interface module available asseparate sales item. wide-range Vac (Onlymanufactured after order!)177939 Crocus SHDSL 2P +LCD TT BU 48VDC Crocus SHDSL table top on 2 line pairs for longerdistances or speeds up to 4Mbit/s, Basic Unit,Keyboard and LCD for local programming, nointerface provided. Interface module available asseparate sales item. 48 Vdc. (Only manufacturedafter order !)182598 Crocus SHDSL TT BU 24VDC Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair, Basic Unit,no interface provided. Interface module availableas separate sales item. 24Vdc powered.on request-check production182599 Crocus SHDSL 2P TT BU 24VDC Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair, Basic Unit,no interface provided. Interface module availableas separate sales item. 24Vdc poweredon request-check production193491 CROCUS SHDSL3 TWIN-CV BU Crocus SHDSL twin CV on 1 line pair, suitable forCN4. Can alternatively be used as single 2 linepair modem. Basic Unit, no interfaces provided.Interface modules (1 or 2 modules required)available as separate sales items. (Replacementof code: 180057193492 CROCUS SHDSL3 2P TWIN-CV BU Crocus SHDSL CV on 2 line pairs for longerdistances or speeds up to 4Mbit/s, suitable forCN4. Basic Unit, no interfaces provided. Interfacemodules available as separate sales items.(Replacement of code: 171977)

392 Crocus SHDSL Annex A:Annexproduct informationSales code Product name Description177937 CROCUS SHDSL +LCD TT BU 48VDC Replaced by item 180056. Crocus SHDSL tabletop on 1 line pair, Basic Unit, Keyboard and LCDfor local programming, no interface provided.Interface module available as separate salesitem. 48 Vdc (Only manufactured after order !)181080 CROCUS SHDSL TT G703 230VAC Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair with fixedG703 onboard interface. Includes European230VAC external power adapter178713 CROCUS SHDSL 2P TT G703 RP Crocus SHDSL table top on 2 line pairs with fixedG703 onboard interface. Remotely powered. Canlocally be powered directly with -48Vdc or via anexternal power plug, not included, on Vac.(Suitable power plug 175590 PWR-PLUG (EURVERSION) 230VAC >9VDC)178715 CROCUS SHDSL TT G703 RP Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair with fixedG703 onboard interface. Remotely powered. Canlocally be powered directly with -48Vdc or via anexternal power plug, not included, on Vac.(Suitable power plug 175590 PWR-PLUG (EURVERSION) 230VAC >9VDC)181081 CROCUS SHDSL TT G703 NPWR Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair with fixedG703 onboard interface. Delivered without poweradapter181082 CROCUS SHDSL TT RS530 230VAC Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair with fixedRS530 onboard interface (V35, V36 & X21through conversion cables, not included).Includes European 230VAC external poweradapter181083 CROCUS SHDSL TT RS530 NPWR Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair with fixedRS530 onboard interface (V35, V36 & X21through conversion cables, not included).Delivered without power adapter178716 CROCUS SHDSL TT RS530 RP Crocus SHDSL table top on 1 line pair with fixedRS530 onboard interface (V35, V36 & X21through conversion cables, not included).Remotely powered. Can locally be powereddirectly with -48Vdc or via an external power plug,not included, on Vac.178714 CROCUS SHDSL 2P TT RS530 RP Crocus SHDSL table top on 2 line pairs with fixedRS530 onboard interface (V35, V36 & X21through conversion cables, not included).Remotely powered. Can locally be powereddirectly with -48Vdc or via an external power plug,not included, on Vac.198347 CROCUS SHDSL 2P TWIN-CN7 RP SHDSL card with 2 dual pair SHDSL modems witheach a G703 interface and remote power feeding.Also suitable for 4 pair operation. Fits into CN7.

Crocus SHDSL Annex A: 393Annexproduct informationThe following table displays the product information of the Crocus SHDSL DTE interfaces.Sales code Product name Description143666 V35 INTF. CROCUS Plug-in modular interface V.35 transparent.142199 V36 INTF.CROCUS Plug-in modular interface V.36 transparent.161611 RS-530 INTF.CROCUS Plug-in modular interface RS-530 transparent.142200 X21 INTF.CROCUS Plug-in modular interface X.21 transparent.175253 G703 INTF 2M CROCUS G.703 interface module for the Crocus SHDSL.Can only work with line speed 2Mbit/s. BNCconnectors.175254 G703 INTF NX64K CROCUS G.703 interface module for the Crocus SHDSL.Can work with line speeds below 2Mbit/s. BNCconnectors.150466 BRIDGE INTF.CROCUS Plug-in modular interface Ethernet Bridge fordirect UTP LAN connection. IEEE 802.3compliant.161613 ROUTER 2M INTF.CROCUS Plug-in modular interface Ethernet Router fordirect UTP LAN connection. IEEE 802.3compliant. Limited to 2M.177455 ROUTER 10M INTF.CROCUS Plug-in modular interface Ethernet Router fordirect UTP LAN connection. IEEE 802.3compliant. Up to 10M.

394 Crocus SHDSL Annex A:Annexproduct informationThe following table displays cables to be used in combination with the Crocus SHDSL RS530:Sales code Product name Description182968 CBL DCE RS530 (DB25M) - DTE V36M SH 2M Data-Cabling for TOP items: Serial CBL. See docTelindus Access Product Quick Reference. Forapplication, details and pin layout see document:-Data cables- on the Telindus Product dBase. ->Cable layout-19182969 CBL DCE RS530 (DB25M) - DTE V36M SH 5M Data-Cabling for TOP items: Serial CBL. See docTelindus Access Product Quick Reference. Forapplication, details and pin layout see document:-Data cables- on the Telindus Product dBase. ->Cable layout-19182970 CBL DCE RS530 (DB25M) - DTE X21M SH 2M Data-Cabling for TOP items: Serial CBL. See docTelindus Access Product Quick Reference. Forapplication, details and pin layout see document:-Data cables- on the Telindus Product dBase. ->Cable layout-20182971 CBL DCE RS530 (DB25M) - DTE X21M SH 5M Data-Cabling for TOP items: Serial CBL. See docTelindus Access Product Quick Reference. Forapplication, details and pin layout see document:-Data cables- on the Telindus Product dBase. ->Cable layout-20The following table displays the product information of the CN7:Sales code Product name Description198344 Card nest CN7 ETSI card nest with 17 slots, 7U high.198346 Crocus SHDSL G703 NX64K TWIN-CN7 RP SHDSL card with 2 single pair SHDSL modemswith each a G703 interface and remote powerfeeding. Fits into CN7. Line speeds 192- 2048kbps.198347 Crocus SHDSL 2P G703 NX64K TWIN-CN7 RP SHDSL card with 2 dual pair SHDSL modems witheach a G703 interface and remote power feeding.Fits into CN7. Line speeds 384 - 2048 kbps.202755 Crocus SHDSL G703 NX64K TWIN-CN7 SHDSL card with 2 single pair SHDSL modemswith each a G703 interface. Fits into CN7. Linespeeds 192- 2048 kbps.202756 Crocus SHDSL 2P G703 NX64K TWIN-CN7 SHDSL card with 2 dual pair SHDSL modems witheach a G703 interface. Fits into CN7. Line speeds384 - 2048 kbps.198345 Orchid CN7 Management concentrator card for CN7. Includesa CTRL interface for local management and anEthernet interface for remote management.203420 Crocus SHDSL 2P G703 NX64K Repeater indoorRP/NPWRDesktop SHDSL 2 pair repeater. Remotelypowered or locally powered (external poweradapter not included). Suitable for indoor use.203421 Crocus SHDSL G703 NX64K RJ45 TT 230VAC Desktop SHDSL single pair modem with a G703interface with 120 Ohm RJ45 connector and 75Ohm BNC connectors and local 230VACpowering. Line speeds 192 - 2048 kbps.203422 Crocus SHDSL G703 NX64K RJ45 TT 48VDC Desktop SHDSL single pair modem with a G703interface with 120 Ohm RJ45 connector and 75Ohm BNC connectors and local 48Vdc powering.Line speeds 192 - 2048 kbps.

Crocus SHDSL Annex A: 395Annexproduct informationSales code Product name Description203423 Crocus SHDSL G703 2M RJ45 TT RP Desktop SHDSL single pair modem with a G703interface with 120 Ohm RJ45 connector andremote powered. Line speed 2Mbps.203455 CROCUS SHDSL G703 NX64K RJ45 TT RP Desktop SHDSL single pair modem with a G703interface with 120 Ohm RJ45 connector andremote powered. Line speeds 192 - 2048kbit/s203424 Crocus SHDSL G703 NX64K RJ45 TT RP/NPWR Desktop SHDSL single pair modem with a G703interface with 120 Ohm RJ45 connector and 75Ohm BNC connectors and remote powered.Connector for local powering (power adapter notincluded). Line speeds 192 - 2048 kbps.203425 Crocus SHDSL 2P G703 NX64K RJ45 TT230VACDesktop SHDSL 2 pair modem with a G703interface with 120 Ohm RJ45 connector and 75Ohm BNC connectors and local 230VACpowering. Line speeds 384 - 2048 kbps.203426 Crocus SHDSL 2P G703 NX64K RJ45 TT 48VDC Desktop SHDSL 2 pair modem with a G703interface with 120 Ohm RJ45 connector and 75Ohm BNC connectors and local 48Vdc powering.Line speeds 384 - 2048 kbps.203427 Crocus SHDSL 2P G703 2M RJ45 TT RP Desktop SHDSL 2 pair modem with a G703interface with 120 Ohm RJ45 connector and 75Ohm BNC connectors and remote powered. Linespeed 2Mbps203457 CROCUS SHDSL 2P G703 NX64K RJ45 TT RP Desktop SHDSL 2 pair modem with a G703interface with 120 Ohm RJ45 connector andremote powered. Line speeds 192 - 2048kbit/s203428 Crocus SHDSL 2P G703 NX64K RJ45 TT RP/NPWR191706 PWR-PLUG +/-48/24VDC FOR 7,5 /12VDC CPEDEVICESDesktop SHDSL 2 pair modem with a G703interface with 120 Ohm RJ45 connector and 75Ohm BNC connectors and remote powered.Connector for local powering (power adapter notincluded). Line speeds 384 - 2048 kbps.Wallplug power module with input range: 18 to72Vdc and output: 7,5 / 12Vdc for Desktop unitsdelivered without power adapter. (xxx NPWR).Fully isolated input. Suitable for + & - DC inputvoltages.199744 PWR-PLUG (EUR VERSION) 230VAC->12VDC Wallplug power module EUR type, 230Vac ->12Vdc for Desktop units delivered without poweradapter. (xxx NPWR).

396 Crocus SHDSL Annex A:Annexproduct information

Crocus SHDSL Annex B: 397AnnexabbreviationsAnnex B: abbreviationsThe following table gives a list of abbreviations and their description.Terms/abbreviations-48Vdc1P2P4P9VdcABRADSLAISALAL-ETAMIARPATMBOOTPbpsC-SideCBRCCPCHAPCLIDescription-48 Volts - Direct Current1 pair2 pair4 pair9 Volts - Direct CurrentAvailable Bit RateAsymmetric Digital Subscriber LineAlarm Indication SignalAnalogue LoopAnalogue Loop - Error TestAlternate Mark InversionAddress Resolution ProtocolAsynchronous Transfer ModeBootstrap Protocolbits per secondCustomer SideConstant Bit RateCompression Control ProtocolChallenge Handshake Authentication ProtocolCommand Line InterfaceCN7 Card Nest 7COCPECRCCTRLCTSCVCV TwinCV-ACV-BdBCentral OfficeCustomer Premises EquipmentCyclic Redundancy CheckControlClear To SendCard VersionCard Version TwinCard Version modem ACard Version modem Bdecibel

398 Crocus SHDSL Annex B:AnnexabbreviationsTerms/abbreviationsDCDDCEDHCPDIPDLDLCIDPDSDSLAMDTEEBEMCEOCERRESESDExtTxClkETETSIFASFRFSFTPGbGBGbpsG703DescriptionData Carrier DetectData Communications EquipmentDynamic Host Configuration ProtocolDual In line PinDigital LoopData Link Connection IdentifierDual Power/ Dual PortDip Switch bankDigital Subscriber Line Access MultiplexerData Terminal EquipmentErrored BlockElectromagnetic CompatibilityEmbedded Operations ChannelErrorErrored SecondElectrostatic DischargeExternal Transmit ClockError TestEuropean Telecommunications Standards InstituteFrame Alignment SignalFrame RelayFuseFile Transfer ProtocolGigabitGigabyteGigabits Per SecondG703 interfaceHDB3 High Density Bipolar 3HDLCICMPifIGMPIMAPHigh-level Data Link ControlInternet Control Message ProtocolInterfaceInternet Group Management ProtocolIntegrated Multi-service Access Platform

Crocus SHDSL Annex B: 399AnnexabbreviationsTerms/abbreviationsIPIPCPIPSECITU-TKbKBKbpsL2TPLANLCPLEDLFALOSLTUMACMbMBMbpsMIBN-sideNATNCPNMSNTUPAPPATPCBPCRPDHPPPPPPoAPPPoEPVCDescriptionInternet ProtocolInternet Protocol Control ProtocolInternet Protocol SecurityInternational Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication StandardizationSectorKilobitKilobyteKilobits Per SecondLayer 2 Tunnelling ProtocolLocal Area NetworkLink Control ProtocolLight Emitting DiodeLoss of Frame AlignmentLoss Of SignalLine Terminating UnitMedia Access ControlMegabitMegabyteMegabits Per SecondManagement Information BaseNetwork SideNetwork Address TranslationNetwork Control ProtocolsNetwork Management SystemNetwork Terminating UnitPassword Authentication ProtocolPort Address TranslationPrinted Circuit BoardPeak Cell RatePlesiochronous Digital HierarchyPoint-to-Point ProtocolPPP over ATMPPP over EthernetPermanent Virtual Circuits

400 Crocus SHDSL Annex B:AnnexabbreviationsTerms/abbreviationsPWRRAIRDLRDL-ETRFCRIPRPRS530RTSRxRxClkRxDSASDHSELVSESSHDSLSNMPSPISQSSRSTTCPTC-PAMTFTPTMATMA CLITMLTNVTSTSTTTTxDescriptionPowerRemote Alarm IndicationRemote Digital LoopRemote Digital Loop - Error TestRequest For CommentsRouting Information ProtocolRemote PowerRS530 interfaceRequest To SendReceiveReceive ClockReceive DataSecurity AssociationSynchronous Digital HierarchySafety Extra Low VoltageSeverely Errored SecondSymmetric High-Bitrate Digital Subscriber LineSimple Network Management ProtocolSecurity Parameter IndexSignal QualitySolid State RelayStrapTransmission Control ProtocolTrellis Coded Pulse Amplitude ModulationTrivial File Transfer ProtocolTelindus Management ApplicationTMA Command Line InterfaceTelindus Memory LoaderTelecom Network VoltageTimeslotTestTable TopTransmit

Crocus SHDSL Annex B: 401AnnexabbreviationsTerms/abbreviationsTxClkTxDUBRUDPVacVBRVBR-rtVBR-nrtVCIVdcVLANVPNVPIWANDescriptionTransmit ClockTransmit DataUnspecified Bit RateUser Datagram ProtocolVolts - Alternate CurrentVariable Bit RateVariable Bit Rate real-timeVariable Bit Rate non-real-timeVirtual Channel IdentifierVolts - Direct CurrentVirtual Local Area NetworkVirtual Private NetworksVirtual Path IdentifiersWide Area Network

402 Crocus SHDSL Annex B:Annexabbreviations

Crocus SHDSLAnnexIndex1IndexAabsolute addressinguse 160access to PDH networks 99examples 100synchronisation 99access to SDH networks 102asynchronous or synchronous 102DXC 103examples 104typical 2 Mbit/s connections 102accessing PDH and SDH networksclocking 91action, what is 67activatingconfiguration 176remote power source operation 35alarm attributes 313configuration 318general 322introduction 317overview 314alarm signalling 324alarmsend 335general 325interface 339line 328line pair 330repeater 335alternative clocking 111analogue loop 365application softwareoverview 8what is 348, 351attribute - actionactivate configuration 192clearErrorCounter 256Cold Boot 248cold boot 193load default configuration 192load saved configuration 193loopbackActivation 267, 371maximumSpeedSearch 257testActivation 256attribute - alarmalarmContactHighMask 321alarmContactLowMask 321alarmInfo 323, 326, 329, 331, 336, 340alarmLevel 319alarmMask 319Cold Boot 327remoteAlarmMask 321totalAlarmLevel 323attribute - configurationaisDetection 222alarmContactHighMasktop object 191alarmContactLowMasktop object 191alarmLeveldteInterface object 216, 219, 224, 230,233line object 207linePair object 209, 211top object 191alarmMaskdteInterface object 216, 219, 224, 230,233line object 207linePair object 209, 211top object 191asymmetricPsd 201channel 80, 195clocking 109, 216, 219, 224, 230, 232cms2Address 235coding 154, 221consoleNoTrafficTimeOut 235crc4Insertion 154, 222ctrlPortProtocol 161, 236ctsDelay 214dualPairMode 206eocChannel 82, 202eocHandling 85, 202fallbackClocking 156, 226forwardTmaToCtrlPort 162, 191forwardTmaToLine 162, 191framing 144, 221IanFilter 229internalDmm 166, 237jitterAttenuation 154, 222lanFilter 157linkAlarmThresholds 203management 164, 205minLinePairSpeed 139, 198mode 81, 197multiplexingMode 155, 226name 205, 215, 218, 223, 229, 232numExpectedRepeaters 202pwrSource 211rdlDetect 216, 219, 224, 230, 233region 80, 195remoteAlarmMasklinePair object 211top object 191retrain 198rtsControl 153, 214saBits 165, 223

2 Crocus SHDSLAnnexIndexsecurity 190serialMode 216speed 133, 215, 218, 229, 232speed2P 133, 215, 219, 229, 232sqThreshold 222sqTime 222startupMargin 201stationClockFallback 155, 226sysContact 190sysLocation 190sysName 190testDuration 201, 363, 371tests 215, 223timeSlots 145, 221timingMode 90, 196transmitSampleClock 216, 219, 230, 232txEocMessages 202x21Conversion 156, 227xSignal 218attribute - performanceG703Performance 306G826Performance 307Line 299LineParameters 302Performance 303clearErrorCounter 300currUsedProcPower 311errorCount 299freeBlockCount 311freeDataBuffers 311freeMemory 311g703Performance 306g826Performance 307largestFreeBlockSize 311line 299lineParameters 302performance 303retrain 300taskInfo 312testActivation 300, 363totalDataBuffers 311totalMemory 311usedProcPower 312attribute - statusactualBitRate 260ais 279alItu141 270asymmetricPsd 255bootVersion 247cardNestNumber 287cardSlotNumber 287configurationSaving 247ctsItu106 270dcdItu109 270deviceId 247dsrItu107 270eocAlarmThresholds 256, 266eocSoftVersion 265eocState 265errorCount 255extClockSource 271, 275flash1Version 248framerType 252ifClocking 272, 276, 280, 285ifDescr 250, 271, 276, 279, 284ifOperStatus 250, 259, 273, 277, 281, 285ifSpeed 250, 259, 272, 276, 280, 285ifType 250, 272, 276, 279, 284indicator 275lfa 279lineAttenuation 260, 267linePairsSwapped 255loaderVersion 247los 279maxLinePairSpeed 251maxSpeedResult 254maxSpeedSearch 254messages 246minLinePairSpeed 250modemPosition 287numDiscoveredRepeaters 255rai 279rdlItu140 270region 255remIfClocking 271, 275, 284rtsItu105 270rxdItu104 270, 275, 279shdslVersion 265signalNoise 260, 267status 259, 262stepupThreshold 260sysDescr 246sysObjectID 246sysServices 246sysUpTime 246taskInfo 289testOriginator 253testStatus 253testType 252tiItu142 270timeSinceLastRetrain 259timeSlots 279transmitPower 260txdItu103 270, 275, 279vendorId 264vendorModel 264vendorSerial 264vendorSoftVersion 264version 262wanRxd 284wanTxd 284attribute string, reading ixattribute, what is 67auto clockingbridge and router interfaces 127

Crocus SHDSLAnnexIndex3examples 130RS530, V35 and V36 interfaces 125X21 interface 128auto speed mode, how works 135auto-sensing 124Bbasic configurationpasswords 172basic line parametersconfiguring 80boot softwarewhat is 348, 349bridge interfaceauto clocking 127configuring 157interface configuration attributes 228interface status attributes 283Ccard versionconnecting the line 30inserting in the CN4 card nest 27inserting the DTE interface 31motherboard 52changing DIP switch settingsof the CV 55of the TT 50changing strap settingsof the CV 55of the TT 50clockingaccessing PDH and SDH networks 91alternative 111attribute 109preferred 111special points of interest on some interfaces119clocking and speed combinations 136clocking decision sequences 121clocking modeconfiguring 108CN4 card nestfilling 28inserting the card version 27line connector 29compatibility with other SHDSL devices 179configurationactivating 176alarm attributes 318configuration actionsexecuting 174what is 175configuration attributes 183general 189interface 212line 194line pair 208management 234overview 184configuration types 175configuringbasic line parameters 80bridge interface 157clocking mode 108Dual Port G703-Serial interface 155EOC handling 83framing 143G703 interface 154interface specific attributes 152internal DMM function 166management attributes 158management data on a G703 interface 165management data on the line 164minimum line speed 137remote power 171RS530, V35 and V36 interfaces 153time slots 143timing mode 90user speed 132user speed and time slots 148user speed and time slots on the Dual PortG703-Serial interface 147connectingCrocus SHDSL CV 26Crocus SHDSL TT 20line to card version 30line to Table Top 24power supply 22containment tree 68terminology 66what is 67control connectorforwarding management data 162selecting the purpose 161specifications 383conventions in this manualgraphical viitypographical vicopyright notice iiCrocus SHDSLattribute overview 69connecting the CV 26connecting the TT 20DIP switches 45features 4introduction 3

4 Crocus SHDSLAnnexIndexmaintaining 57product overview 5straps 45types 374crocusShdsl 206Ddata carrier detect LED (DCD/109) 43diagnostic tests 359introduction 360specifications 384different clocking modesschematic overview 112digital loop 368DIP switch table, reading viiiDIP switches 45changing settings of the CV 55changing settings of the TT 50of the CV 51, 53of the TT 46, 48displaying the subsystem picture 344documentconventionsgraphical viitypographical vicopyright notice iidocumentation set venvironmental information ivfirmware version described in this ixintended audience ixorganisation vproperties iistatements iiiyour feedback ixdocumentation set vdownloadingin boot mode 356in loader mode 355via a management concentrator 357with TMA 353with TML 354DTE interface overview 7Dual Port G703-Serial interfaceconfiguring 155configuring the user speed and time slots 147interface clocking 120interface configuration attributes 225interface performance attributes 309interface status attributes 282EEMC compliancespecifications 388endalarms 335performance attributes 304status attributes 263environmental compliancespecifications 387environmental information ivEOCconfiguring handling 83discovering devices on the SHDSL line 86EOC handling attribute 85retrieved information 86what is 84error LED (AIS/ERR) 42error test 364exampleauto clocking 130management over the line and the controlport 167management over the line and the E1 interface169executing configuration actions 174external clock signalpresence 123Ffeedback ixfilling an entire CN4 card nest 28firmwareversion ixfixed clocking modes 110forwarding management data to the line andcontrol connector 162framed modeselecting 144, 148framingconfiguring 143front panel display 71"windows" 72connect remote window 78DTE window 76line window 75main window 73model browsing window 78test window 77version window 78front panel LEDsindicators 39introduction 40GG703 data

Crocus SHDSLAnnexIndex5ordering 149G703 interfaceconfiguring 154configuring management data 165interface clocking 120interface configuration attributes 220interface performance attributes 305interface status attributes 278specifications 379generalalarm attributes 322alarms 325configuration attributes 189status attributes 245group, what is 67IIdentification iximportant download issues 352important remarkon starting a TMA session 63on the minimum line pair speed 138inserting the DTE interfacein the Card Version 31in the Table Top 25installation and connection precautions 19installingoptional remote power module 36Installing and connecting 13interfacealarms 339configuration attributes 212status attributes 268tests 369interface clockingDual Port G703-Serial interface 120G703 interface 120X21 interface 119interface configuration attributesbridge 228dual Port G703-Serial interface 225G703 interface 220router interface 231RS530, V35 and V36 213X21 interface 217interface performance attributesDual Port G703-Serial interface 309G703 interface 305interface specific attributesconfiguring 152interface status attributesbridge interface 283dual Port G703-Serial interface 282G703 interface 278router interface 283RS530, V35 and V36 269X21 interface 274internal DMM functionconfiguring 166introducingmaintenance and management tools 10introductionalarm attributes 317Crocus SHDSL 3diagnostic tests 360front panel LEDs 40management attributes 65performance terms 297performance timing 296TMA 59Kkeyboard managementstarting 64LLEDdata carrier detect (DCD/109) 43error(AIS/ERR) 42power (PWR) 41receive data (RXD/104) 43request to send (RTS/105) 42test(TST/142) 41transmit data (TXD/103) 43LED indicatorsfront panel 39linealarms 328configuration attributes 194configuring management data 164forwarding management data 162performance attributes 298specifications 375status attributes 249tests 361line pairalarms 330configuration attributes 208performance attributes 301status attributes 258line test action 362load default configuration 176using a DIP switch 177loader softwarewhat is 348, 350

6 Crocus SHDSLAnnexIndexlow speed limitations on the G703 Nx64k interfaces150Mmaintaining the Crocus SHDSL 57maintenance and managementconnection possibilities 12maintenance and management toolsintroducing 10managementconfiguration attributes 234rules of thumb and remarks 159status attributes 286management attributesconfiguring 158management interface connectorsspecifications 382management toolsentering passwords 173maximum covered distance on a noise free linespecifications 378mechanical dimensionsspecifications 388minimum line pair speedattribute 139important remark 138purpose 142minimum line speedconfiguring 137motherboardcard version 52Table Top 47Nnetwork clocking principles 93central clock 93hierarchical structure 93station clock 93Oobject, what is 67odd speeds, using 134operating systemperformance attributes 310status 288optional remote power moduleinstalling 36orderingG703 data 149serial data 149organisation of this manual vover-current protection compliancespecifications 388overviewalarm attributes 314application software 8configuration attributes 184DTE interface 7performance attributes 292remote power operation 34status attributes 240over-voltage protection compliancespecifications 388Ppasswordsadding to the security table 173basic configuration 172entering in the different management tools173PDH networks 94asynchronous tributaries 94disadvantages 95gateways 95timing 95performance attributes 291end 304line 298line pair 301operating system 310overview 292repeater 304performance termsintroduction 297performance timingintroduction 296possible clocking modes versus DTE interface118Power back-off 9power LED (PWR) 41power requirementsspecifications 385power supplyconnecting 22preferred clocking 111presence of external clock signal 123product information 391, 397DTE interfaces 393product overviewCrocus SHDSL 5purpose of the minimum line pair speed 142

Crocus SHDSLAnnexIndex7Rreadinga DIP switch table viiian attribute string ixreceive data LED (RXD/104) 43relative addressinguse 160remarks onDIP switch for RP source operation 36, 53, 54dualPairMode attribute 206opening the housing 46remote power source operation 35selecting a site 16remote digital loop 366remote powerconfiguring 171status attributes 261what is 33remote power operation 32overview 34remote power source operationactivating 35repeateralarms 335performance attributes 304status attributes 263tests 370use 38request to send LED (RTS/105) 42RJ45 - RJ12 adapterspecifications 377router interfaceauto clocking 127interface configuration attributes 231interface status attributes 283RS530 interfaceautoclocking 125configuring 153interface configuration attributes 213interface status attributes 269rules of thumb and remarks concerning management159Ssafetyinstructions 14requirements iisafety compliance specifications 388schematic overview of the different clockingmodes 112SDH networks 96network elements 97redundant ring structures 98SDH hierarchy 96synchronisation 98security tableadding passwords 173selectinga site 16purpose of the control connector 161time slots 145unframed or framed mode 144, 148serial dataordering 149signal and protective ground interconnection 23software download 347special points of interest concerning clocking onsome interfaces 119specificationscontrol connector 383Crocus SHDSL types 374diagnostic tests 384EMC compliance 388environmental compliance 387G703 interface 379line 375management interface connectors 382maximum covered distance on a noise freeline 378mechanical dimensions 388over-current protection compliance 388over-voltage protection compliance 388power requirements 385RJ45 - RJ12 adapter 377safety compliance 388speed attribute 133starting a TMA sessionthrough a management concentrator 62through the control connector 60starting keyboard management 64starting TMA on the Crocus SHDSL 58statements iiistatus attributes 239end 263general 245interfaces 268line 249line pair 258managemant 286overview 240remote power 261repeater 263step-by-step configuration 79straps 45

8 Crocus SHDSLAnnexIndexchanging settings of the CV 55changing settings of the TT 50of the CV 51of the TT 46, 49structured value, what is 67subsystem picturedisplay 344elements 345synchronous interfaces 106data transfer 106exchange of clock signals 107TTable Topconnections 21inserting the DTE interface 25motherboard 47technical specifications 373test LED (TST/142) 41time slotsconfiguring 143, 148selecting 145transposition 146timing modeconfiguring 90TMA subsystem picture 343transmit data LED (TXD/103) 43transpositiontime slots 146troubleshooting 178configuring 153interface configuration attributes 213interface status attributes 269value, what is 67Wwall mounting 17warningEMC 19ESD 19important safety instructions 14safety warning 14what isapplication software 348, 351boot software 348, 349containment tree 67EOC 84loader software 348, 350remote power 33XX21 interfaceauto clocking 128interface clocking 119interface configuration attributes 217interface status attributes 274Uunframed modeselecting 144, 148unpacking 15user speedauto speed mode, how works 135configuring 132, 148odd speeds, using 134speed attribute 133usinga repeater 38relative or absolute addressing 160VV35 interfaceautoclocking 125configuring 153interface configuration attributes 213interface status attributes 269V36 interfaceautoclocking 125